You are on page 1of 258

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

Software Version 6.2e.2

Extreme Networks, Inc. 3585 Monroe Street Santa Clara, California 95051 (888) 257-3000 http://www.extremenetworks.com
Published: June 2003 Part Number: 100149-00 Rev 01

©2003 Extreme Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. Extreme Networks and BlackDiamond are registered trademarks of Extreme Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other jurisdictions. ExtremeWare, ExtremeWare Vista, ExtremeWorks, ExtremeAssist, ExtremeAssist1, ExtremeAssist2, PartnerAssist, Extreme Standby Router Protocol, ESRP, SmartTraps, Alpine, Summit, Summit1, Summit4, Summit4/FX, Summit7i, Summit24, Summit48, Summit 200 Series, Summit 200-24, Summit 200-48, Summit Virtual Chassis, SummitLink, SummitGbX, SummitRPS and the Extreme Networks logo are trademarks of Extreme Networks, Inc., which may be registered or pending registration in certain jurisdictions. The Extreme Turbodrive logo is a service mark of Extreme Networks, which may be registered or pending registration in certain jurisdictions. Specifications are subject to change without notice. NetWare and Novell are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. Merit is a registered trademark of Merit Network, Inc. Solaris is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. F5, BIG/ip, and 3DNS are registered trademarks of F5 Networks, Inc. see/IT is a trademark of F5 Networks, Inc. “Data Fellows”, the triangle symbol, and Data Fellows product names and symbols/logos are trademarks of Data Fellows. F-Secure SSH is a registered trademark of Data Fellows.

All other registered trademarks, trademarks and service marks are property of their respective owners.

2

Contents

Preface
Introduction Conventions Related Publications xiii xiv xiv

Chapter 1

Summit 200 Series Switch Overview
Summit 200 Series Switches Summary of Features Summit 200-24 Switch Physical Features Summit 200-24 Switch Front View Summit 200-24 Switch Rear View Summit 200-48 Switch Physical Features Summit 200-48 Switch Front View Summit 200-48 Switch Rear View Mini-GBIC Type and Hardware/Software Support Mini-GBIC Type and Specifications 15 15 16 16 18 19 19 21 22 22

Chapter 2

Switch Installation
Determining the Switch Location Following Safety Information Installing the Switch Rack Mounting Free-Standing Stacking the Switch and Other Devices Connecting Equipment to the Console Port Powering On the Switch Checking the Installation 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 30 31

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

3

Contents

Logging In for the First Time Installing or Replacing a Mini-Gigabit Interface Connector (Mini-GBIC) Safety Information Preparing to Install or Replace a Mini-GBIC Removing and Inserting a Mini-GBIC

31 32 32 32 33

Chapter 3

ExtremeWare Overview
Summary of Features Virtual LANs (VLANs) Spanning Tree Protocol Quality of Service Unicast Routing Load Sharing ESRP-Aware Switches Software Licensing Feature Licensing Security Licensing for Features Under License Control SSH2 Encryption Software Factory Defaults 35 36 36 37 37 37 37 38 38 39 39 40

Chapter 4

Accessing the Switch
Understanding the Command Syntax Syntax Helper Command Shortcuts Summit 200 Series Switch Numerical Ranges Names Symbols Line-Editing Keys Command History Common Commands Configuring Management Access User Account Administrator Account Default Accounts Creating a Management Account Domain Name Service Client Services Checking Basic Connectivity Ping Traceroute 41 42 42 42 43 43 43 44 44 46 46 47 47 48 49 50 50 50

4

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

Contents

Chapter 5

Managing the Switch
Overview Using the Console Interface Using Telnet Connecting to Another Host Using Telnet Configuring Switch IP Parameters Disconnecting a Telnet Session Controlling Telnet Access Using Secure Shell 2 (SSH2) Enabling SSH2 Using SNMP Accessing Switch Agents Supported MIBs Configuring SNMP Settings Displaying SNMP Settings Authenticating Users RADIUS Client Configuring TACACS+ Using Network Login Using Network Login in Campus Mode Using Network Login in ISP Mode DHCP Server on the Switch Network Login Configuration Commands Displaying Network Login Settings Disabling Network Login Using EAPOL Flooding Using the Simple Network Time Protocol Configuring and Using SNTP SNTP Configuration Commands SNTP Example 53 54 54 54 54 56 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 60 60 60 65 66 67 69 70 70 70 71 71 72 72 75 75

Chapter 6

Configuring Ports on a Switch
Enabling and Disabling Switch Ports Configuring Switch Port Speed and Duplex Setting Switch Port Commands Load Sharing on the Switch Load-Sharing Algorithms Configuring Switch Load Sharing Load-Sharing Example Verifying the Load-Sharing Configuration Switch Port-Mirroring 77 77 79 80 80 81 82 82 82

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

5

Contents Port-Mirroring Commands Port-Mirroring Example Extreme Discovery Protocol EDP Commands 83 83 84 84 Chapter 7 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Overview of Virtual LANs Benefits Types of VLANs Port-Based VLANs Tagged VLANs VLAN Names Default VLAN Renaming a VLAN Configuring VLANs on the Switch VLAN Configuration Commands VLAN Configuration Examples Displaying VLAN Settings MAC-Based VLANs MAC-Based VLAN Guidelines MAC-Based VLAN Limitations MAC-Based VLAN Example Timed Configuration Download for MAC-Based VLANs 85 85 86 86 88 90 90 91 91 91 92 92 93 93 94 94 94 Chapter 8 Forwarding Database (FDB) Overview of the FDB FDB Contents FDB Entry Types How FDB Entries Get Added Associating a QoS Profile with an FDB Entry Configuring FDB Entries FDB Configuration Examples Displaying FDB Entries 97 97 97 98 98 99 100 100 Chapter 9 Access Policies Overview of Access Policies Access Control Lists Rate Limits Routing Access Policies Using Access Control Lists Access Masks 101 101 101 102 102 102 6 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

Contents Access Lists Rate Limits How Access Control Lists Work Access Mask Precedence Numbers Specifying a Default Rule The permit-established Keyword Adding Access Mask. Access List. and Rate Limit Entries Verifying Access Control List Configurations Access Control List Commands Access Control List Examples Using Routing Access Policies Creating an Access Profile Configuring an Access Profile Mode Adding an Access Profile Entry Deleting an Access Profile Entry Applying Access Profiles Routing Access Policies for RIP Routing Access Policies for OSPF Making Changes to a Routing Access Policy Removing a Routing Access Policy Routing Access Policy Commands 102 103 104 104 104 104 105 106 106 106 110 114 114 114 114 115 115 115 117 118 118 119 Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) Overview Internet IP Addressing Configuring VLANs for NAT NAT Modes Configuring NAT Configuring NAT Rules Creating NAT Rules Creating Static and Dynamic NAT Rules Creating Portmap NAT Rules Creating Auto-Constrain NAT Rules Advanced Rule Matching Configuring Timeouts Displaying NAT Settings Disabling NAT 121 122 122 123 124 124 125 125 125 126 126 127 127 128 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 7 . Access List. and Rate Limit Entries Deleting Access Mask.

Contents Chapter 11 Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching Overview of the EAPS Protocol Fault Detection and Recovery Restoration Operations Summit 200 Series Switches in Multi-ring Topologies Commands for Configuring and Monitoring EAPS Creating and Deleting an EAPS Domain Defining the EAPS Mode of the Switch Configuring EAPS Polling Timers Configuring the Primary and Secondary Ports Configuring the EAPS Control VLAN Configuring the EAPS Protected VLANs Enabling and Disabling an EAPS Domain Enabling and Disabling EAPS Unconfiguring an EAPS Ring Port Displaying EAPS Status Information 129 131 132 133 134 135 135 135 136 137 137 138 138 138 138 Chapter 12 Quality of Service (QoS) Overview of Policy-Based Quality of Service Applications and Types of QoS Voice Applications Video Applications Critical Database Applications Web Browsing Applications File Server Applications Configuring QoS for a Port or VLAN Traffic Groupings Access List Based Traffic Groupings MAC-Based Traffic Groupings Explicit Class of Service (802.1p and DiffServ) Traffic Groupings Configuring DiffServ Physical and Logical Groupings Verifying Configuration and Performance QoS Monitor Displaying QoS Profile Information Modifying a QoS Configuration Traffic Rate-Limiting Dynamic Link Context System DLCS Guidelines DLCS Limitations DLCS Commands 143 144 144 144 144 145 145 145 146 146 147 148 150 152 153 153 153 154 154 154 155 155 155 8 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

Contents Chapter 13 Status Monitoring and Statistics Status Monitoring Port Statistics Port Errors Port Monitoring Display Keys Setting the System Recovery Level Logging Local Logging Remote Logging Logging Configuration Changes Logging Commands RMON About RMON RMON Features of the Switch Configuring RMON Event Actions 157 159 159 160 161 161 162 163 163 164 165 165 165 166 167 Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Overview of the Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Domains Defaults STPD BPDU Tunneling STP Configurations Configuring STP on the Switch STP Configuration Example Displaying STP Settings Disabling and Resetting STP 169 169 170 170 170 172 175 175 175 Chapter 15 IP Unicast Routing Overview of IP Unicast Routing Router Interfaces Populating the Routing Table Subnet-Directed Broadcast Forwarding Proxy ARP ARP-Incapable Devices Proxy ARP Between Subnets Relative Route Priorities Configuring IP Unicast Routing Verifying the IP Unicast Routing Configuration 177 178 179 180 180 181 181 181 182 182 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 9 .

Contents IP Commands Routing Configuration Example Displaying Router Settings Resetting and Disabling Router Settings Configuring DHCP/BOOTP Relay Verifying the DHCP/BOOTP Relay Configuration UDP-Forwarding Configuring UDP-Forwarding UDP-Forwarding Example ICMP Packet Processing UDP-Forwarding Commands 183 187 188 189 190 190 190 191 191 191 192 Chapter 16 Interior Gateway Routing Protocols Overview RIP Versus OSPF Overview of RIP Routing Table Split Horizon Poison Reverse Triggered Updates Route Advertisement of VLANs RIP Version 1 Versus RIP Version 2 Overview of OSPF Link-State Database Areas Point-to-Point Support Route Re-Distribution Configuring Route Re-Distribution OSPF Timers and Authentication Configuring RIP RIP Configuration Example Displaying RIP Settings Resetting and Disabling RIP Configuring OSPF Configuring OSPF Wait Interval Displaying OSPF Settings OSPF LSD Display Resetting and Disabling OSPF Settings 193 194 194 195 195 195 195 195 195 196 196 197 200 201 201 202 203 205 206 206 206 211 212 212 213 10 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

and Resetting IGMP Functions 215 216 217 217 Appendix A Safety Information Important Safety Information Power Power Cord Connections Lithium Battery 219 219 220 220 220 Appendix B Technical Specifications Summit 200-24 Switch Summit 200-48 Switch 223 226 Appendix C Appendix D Supported Standards Software Upgrade and Boot Options Downloading a New Image Rebooting the Switch Saving Configuration Changes Returning to Factory Defaults Using TFTP to Upload the Configuration Using TFTP to Download the Configuration Downloading a Complete Configuration Downloading an Incremental Configuration Scheduled Incremental Configuration Download Remember to Save Upgrading and Accessing BootROM Upgrading BootROM Accessing the BootROM menu Boot Option Commands 231 232 232 233 233 234 234 234 234 235 235 235 235 236 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 11 .Contents Chapter 17 IP Multicast Groups and IGMP Snooping Overview Configuring IGMP and IGMP Snooping Displaying IGMP Snooping Configuration Information Clearing. Disabling.

Contents Appendix E Troubleshooting LEDs Using the Command-Line Interface Port Configuration VLANs STP Debug Tracing TOP Command Contacting Extreme Technical Support 233 234 235 236 237 237 237 237 Index Index of Commands 12 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

It assumes a basic working knowledge of: • Local area networks (LANs) • Ethernet concepts • Ethernet switching and bridging concepts • Routing concepts • Internet Protocol (IP) concepts • Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) NOTE If the information in the release notes shipped with your switch differs from the information in this guide.Preface This preface provides an overview of this guide. and lists other publications that may be useful. follow the release notes. Introduction This guide provides the required information to install the Summit 200 series switch and configure the ExtremeWare™ software running on the Summit 200 series switch. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 13 . This guide is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for installing and setting up network equipment. describes guide conventions.

If you must press two or more keys simultaneously. Warning Risk of severe personal injury.. and then press the Return or Enter key. the key names are linked with a plus sign (+).Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions that are used throughout this guide. you must type something. Example: Press [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]. such as [Return] or [Esc].com/ 14 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .. system damage. or represents information as it appears on the screen.” Key names are written with brackets. Table 2: Text Conventions Convention Screen displays The words “enter” and “type” [Key] names Description This typeface indicates command syntax. When you see the word “enter” in this guide. Important features or instructions. Caution Risk of personal injury. Table 1: Notice Icons Icon Notice Type Note Alerts you to. Related Publications The publications related to this one are: • ExtremeWare Release Notes • Summit 200 Series Switch Release Notes Documentation for Extreme Networks products is available on the World Wide Web at the following location: • http://www. or loss of data.extremenetworks. Words in italicized type Italics emphasize a point or denote new terms at the place where they are defined in the text. Do not press the Return or Enter key when an instruction simply says “type.

Aware support • Ethernet Automated Protection Switching (EAPS) support • Routing Information Protocol (RIP) version 1 and RIP version 2 • Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol • DiffServ support Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 15 . and four hardware queues • Wire-speed Internet Protocol (IP) routing • DHCP/BOOTP Relay • Network Address Translation (NAT) • Extreme Standby Router Protocol (ESRP) .1 Summit 200 Series Switch Overview This chapter describes the features and functionality of the Summit 200 series switches: • Summit 200 Series Switches on page 15 • Summary of Features on page 15 • Summit 200-24 Switch Physical Features on page 16 • Summit 200-48 Switch Physical Features on page 19 • Mini-GBIC Type and Hardware/Software Support on page 22 Summit 200 Series Switches The Summit 200 series switches include the following switch models: • Summit 200-24 switch • Summit 200-48 switch Summary of Features The Summit 200 series switches support the following ExtremeWare features: • Virtual local area networks (VLANs) including support for IEEE 802.1p • Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (IEEE 802.1p.1D) • Quality of Service (QoS) including support for IEEE 802. MAC QoS.1Q and IEEE 802.

or 1000BASE-ZX Small Form Factor pluggable (SFP) Gigabit Interface Connectors (GBICs)—also known as mini-GBICs—using LC optical fiber connectors.45 mm) that provides 24 autosensing 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports using RJ-45 connectors.75 inches or 44. Figure 1: Summit 200-24 switch front view 10/100 Mbps ports Mini-GBIC port status LEDs Unit stacking Console ID LED port 1000-baseT ports Mini-GBIC ports LC24001A NOTE See Table 5 for information about supported mini-GBIC types and distances. Summit 200-24 Switch Front View Figure 1 shows the Summit 200-24 switch front view. 16 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . 1000BASE-LX.Summit 200 Series Switch Overview • Access-policy support for routing protocols • Access list support for packet filtering • Access list support for rate-limiting • IGMP snooping to control IP multicast traffic • Load sharing on multiple ports • RADIUS client and per-command authentication support • TACACS+ support • Network Login • Console command-line interface (CLI) connection • Telnet CLI connection • SSH2 connection • Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support • Remote Monitoring (RMON) • Traffic mirroring for ports Summit 200-24 Switch Physical Features The Summit 200-24 switch is a compact enclosure (see Figure 1) one rack unit in height (1. It also provides two 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports using RJ-45 connectors and two optical ports that also allow Gigabit Ethernet uplink connections through Extreme 1000BASE-SX.

NOTE Only mini-GBICs that have been certified by Extreme Networks (available from Extreme Networks) should be inserted into the mini-GBIC receptacles on the Summit 200 series switch. Two of the ports are 10/100/1000BASE-T ports using RJ-45 connectors. The Summit 200-24 switch supports the use of 1000BASE-SX. doubles the bandwidth available on a link.Summit 200-24 Switch Physical Features NOTE See “Summit 200-24 Switch LEDs” on page 17 for more details. Full-Duplex The Summit 200-24 switch provides full-duplex support for all ports. using optical fibers with LC connectors. in effect. Port Connections The Summit 200-24 switch has 24 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports using RJ-45 connectors for communicating with end stations and other devices over 10/100Mbps Ethernet. or a combination of one 1000BASE-T port and one mini-GBIC. The switch also has four Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports. All 10/100 Mbps ports on the Summit 200-24 switch autonegotiate for half. both mini-GBIC ports. The other two ports are unpopulated receptacles for mini-SFP GBICs. or 1000BASE-ZX mini-GBICs. For example.or full-duplex operation. Console Port Use the console port (9-pin. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 17 . NOTE For information on the mini-GBIC. These ports are labeled 25 and 26 on the front panel of the switch. 1000BASE-LX. Summit 200-24 Switch LEDs Table 3 describes the light emitting diode (LED) behavior on the Summit 200-24 switch. “D” type connector) for connecting a terminal and carrying out local management. Full-duplex allows frames to be transmitted and received simultaneously and. Only two of the four Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports can be active at one time. you can use both 1000BASE-T ports. see “Mini-GBIC Type and Hardware/Software Support” on page 22.

Link is not present or the port is disabled. mini-GBIC is present and being used for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink. Summit 200-24 Switch Rear View Figure 2 shows the rear view of the Summit 200-24 switch. Link is present. and there is activity on the port.Summit 200 Series Switch Overview Table 3: Summit 200-24 switch LED behavior Unit Status LED (MGMT LED) Color Green solid Green blinking Amber Fan LED Color Green Indicates The fan is operating normally. 1000BASE-T link is selected. Port Status LEDs (Ports 1–26) Color Green Green blinking Off Indicates Link is present. port is enabled. Amber blinking A failed condition is present on the fan. Indicates The Summit switch is operating normally. The switch acting as the stack master will be assigned the number 0. Media-Selection (Fiber) LEDs (Ports 25 and 26) Color Green Off Indicates Fiber link is selected. The Summit switch has failed its POST or an overheat condition is detected. the switch is using the RJ-45 port for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink. Figure 2: Summit 200-24 switch rear view Power socket LC24002 18 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . The Summit switch POST is in progress. each switch will be assigned a unique stacking ID number that will be visible in the unit stacking ID number LED. Unit Stacking ID Number LED Color N/A Indicates When several Summit 200-24 switches are interconnected (stacked). port is enabled. which is the default.

MAC Address This label shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device.45 mm) that provides 48 autosensing 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports using RJ-45 connectors.75 inches or 44. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 19 . 1000BASE-LX. Summit 200-48 Switch Front View Figure 3 shows the Summit 200-48 switch front view. The power supply operates down to 90 V. Figure 3: Summit 200-48 switch front view Console port 10/100 Mbps ports Mini-GBIC ports 1000-baseT ports LC48001 NOTE See Table 5 for information about supported mini-GBIC types and distances. Summit 200-48 Switch Physical Features The Summit 200-48 switch is a compact enclosure (see Figure 3) one rack unit in height (1. or 1000BASE-ZX SFP mini-GBICs using optical fibers with LC connectors.Summit 200-48 Switch Physical Features Power Socket The Summit 200-24 switch automatically adjusts to the supply voltage. Serial Number Use this serial number for fault-reporting purposes. NOTE See “Summit 200-48 Switch LEDs” on page 21 for more details. It also provides two 10/100/1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports using RJ-45 connectors and two optical ports that also allow Gigabit Ethernet uplink connections through Extreme 1000BASE-SX. NOTE The Summit 200-24 switch certification and safety label is located on the bottom of the switch.

1000BASE-LX. NOTE When configuring the Summit 200-48 switch. see “Mini-GBIC Type and Hardware/Software Support” on page 22. you can use both 1000BASE-T ports. both mini-GBIC ports. Full-Duplex The Summit 200-48 switch provides full-duplex support for all ports. “D” type connector) for connecting a terminal and carrying out local management. Two of the ports are 10/100/1000BASE-T ports using RJ-45 connectors. Port group 1 consists of ports 1 through 24 and port 49. NOTE For information on the mini-GBIC. Port Connections The Summit 200-48 switch has 48 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports using RJ-45 connectors for communicating with end stations and other devices over 10/100Mbps Ethernet. For example. NOTE Only mini-GBICs that have been certified by Extreme Networks (available from Extreme Networks) should be inserted into the mini-GBIC receptacles on the Summit 200 series switch. 20 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . using optical fibers with LC connectors.or full-duplex operation. or ACL ingress ports and egress port. The switch also has four Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports. Full-duplex allows frames to be transmitted and received simultaneously and. must belong to the same port group. All 10/100 Mbps ports on the Summit 200-48 switch autonegotiate for half. Only two of the four Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports can be active at one time. or a combination of one 1000BASE-T port and one mini-GBIC. in effect. all ports specified as mirrored ports and mirroring port. The Summit 200-48 switch supports the use of 1000BASE-SX. These ports are labeled 49 and 50 on the front panel of the switch. port group 2 consists of ports 25 through 48 and port 50.Summit 200 Series Switch Overview Console Port Use the console port (9-pin. or 1000BASE-ZX mini-GBICs. doubles the bandwidth available on a link. The other two ports are unpopulated receptacles for mini-SFP GBICs.

The Summit switch POST is in progress. Indicates The Summit switch is operating normally. mini-GBIC is present and being used for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink. the switch is using the RJ-45 port for the Gigabit Ethernet uplink. Amber blinking A failed condition is present on the fan. and there is activity on the port. Port Status LEDs (Ports 1–50) Color Green Green blinking Off Indicates Link is present.Summit 200-48 Switch Physical Features Summit 200-48 Switch LEDs Table 4 describes the LED behavior on the Summit 200-48 switch. Table 4: Summit 200-48 switch LED behavior Unit Status LED (MGMT LED) Color Green solid Green blinking Amber Fan LED Color Green Indicates The fan is operating normally. Link is present. Media-Selection (Fiber) LEDs (Ports 49 and 50) Color Green Off Indicates Fiber link is selected. 1000BASE-T link is selected. port is enabled. Summit 200-48 Switch Rear View Figure 4 shows the rear view of the Summit 200-48 switch. The Summit switch has failed its POST or an overheat condition is detected. Figure 4: Summit 200-48 switch rear view Power socket LC48002 Power Socket The Summit 200-48 switch automatically adjusts to the supply voltage. Link is not present or the port is disabled. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 21 . port is enabled. The power supply operates down to 90 V.

which conforms to the 1000BASE-LX standard.5/125 µm multimode fiber 62. The Summit 200 series switches support only the SFP mini-GBIC.Summit 200 Series Switch Overview Serial Number Use this serial number for fault-reporting purposes.5/125 µm multimode fiber 10/125 µm single-mode fiber 1000BASE-ZX (1550 nm optical window) 10/125 µm single-mode fiber 22 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . also known as the mini-GBIC.5/125 µm multimode fiber 1000BASE-LX (1310 nm optical window) 50/125 µm multimode fiber 50/125 µm multimode fiber 62.000 Standard 1000BASE-SX (850 nm optical window) Media Type 50/125 µm multimode fiber 50/125 µm multimode fiber 62. MAC Address This label shows the unique Ethernet MAC address assigned to this device. and the ZX mini-GBIC. Mini-GBIC Type and Specifications Table 5 describes the mini-GBIC type and distances for the Summit 200 series switches. which conforms to the 1000BASE-SX standard. Table 5: Mini-GBIC types and distances Mhz•Km Rating 400 500 160 200 400 500 500 — — Maximum Distance (Meters) 500 550 220 275 550 550 550 5.3z standard. in three types: the SX mini-GBIC. the LX mini-GBIC. NOTE The Summit 200-48 switch certification and safety label is located on the bottom of the switch. The system uses identifier bits to determine the media type of the mini-GBIC that is installed. Mini-GBIC Type and Hardware/Software Support The Summit 200 series switch supports the SFP GBIC. This section describes the mini-GBIC types and specifications. NOTE Only mini-GBICs that have been certified by Extreme Networks (available from Extreme Networks) should be inserted into the mini-GBIC receptacles on the Summit 200 series switch. a long-haul mini-GBIC that conforms to the IEEE 802.000 50.

connectors. LX Mini-GBIC Specifications Table 7 describes the specifications for the LX mini-GBIC. There is no minimum attenuation or minimum cable length restriction.5 micron multimode fiber and 550 meters over 50 micron multimode fiber. There is no minimum attenuation or minimum cable length restriction.5 dB 830 nm –21 dBm –4 dBm 860 nm –9.5 dBm 830 nm 850 nm –4 dBm 860 nm Minimum Typical Maximum Total optical system budget for the SX mini-GBIC is 11.Mini-GBIC Type and Hardware/Software Support SX Mini-GBIC Specifications Table 6 describes the specifications for the SX mini-GBIC.5 dB.5 dB 1270 nm –23 dBm –3 dBm 1355 nm –9.25 dB/km) Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dB of the total budget be reserved for losses induced by cable splices.5 dB remains available for cable-induced attenuation. Measure cable plant losses with a 1310 nm light source and verify this to be within budget. When calculating the maximum distance attainable using optical cable with a specified loss per kilometer (for example 0. and operating margin. Thus. and operating margin. Table 7: LX mini-GBIC specifications Parameter Transceiver Optical output power Center wavelength Receiver Optical input power sensitivity Optical input power maximum Operating wavelength General Total system budget 13. Table 6: SX mini-GBIC specifications Parameter Transceiver Optical output power Center wavelength Receiver Optical input power sensitivity Optical input power maximum Operating wavelength General Total system budget 11.5 dB remains available for cable induced attenuation.5 dBm 1275 nm 1310 nm –3 dBm 1355 nm Minimum Typical Maximum Total optical system budget for the LX mini-GBIC is 13. Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dB of the total budget be reserved for losses induced by cable splices. connectors. the 1000BASE-SX standard specifies supported distances of 275 meters over 62. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 23 . While 8.5 dB. 10.

0 dB LX100 23.Summit 200 Series Switch Overview ZX Mini-GBIC Specifications Table 8 describes the specifications for the ZX mini-GBIC.0 dB 25. ZX Rev 03.0 dB ZX GBIC Rev. When calculating the maximum distance attainable using optical cable with a specified loss per kilometer (for example 0.5 dB ZX GBIC Rev. Extreme Networks recommends that 3 dB of the total budget be reserved for losses induced by cable splices. 03 LX100 XM_041 24 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .0 dB LX70 LX100 30.0 dB 18. 03 LX70 22.0 dB LX100 LX70 ZX GBIC 24. NOTE The ZX mini-GBIC is equivalent to the ZX Rev 03 GBIC. Table 8: ZX mini-GBIC specifications Parameter Transceiver Optical output power Center wavelength Receiver Optical input power sensitivity Optical input power maximum Operating wavelength 1540 nm 1550 nm –23 dBm –3 dBm 1570 nm –2 dBm 1540 nm 0 dBm 1550 nm 3 dBm 1570 nm Minimum Typical Maximum Long Range GBIC System Budgets Measure cable plant losses with a 1550 nm light source and verify this to be within budget.5 dB ZX GBIC ZX GBIC Rev. 03 21. 03 29.5 dB 19.0 dB ZX GBIC 23.25 dB/km).0 dB LX100 ZX GBIC Rev.0 dB 24.5 dB 27.0 dB ZX GBIC 21.0 dB LX70 23. and LX100). Figure 5: Total optical system budgets for long range GBICs ZX GBIC 19. Figure 5 shows the total optical system budget between long range GBICs in various end-to-end combinations (ZX.0 dB LX70 20. LX70. and operating margin. 03 ZX GBIC Rev. connectors.

Table 9: Minimum attenuation requirements Receivers GBIC Type LX70 LX100 Transceivers ZX (prior to Rev 03) ZX Rev 03 ZX mini LX70 9 dB 8 dB 2 dB 5 dB 6 dB LX100 13 dB 12 dB 6 dB 9 dB 10 dB ZX (prior to Rev 03) 7 dB 6 dB 0 dB 3 dB 4 dB ZX Rev 03 7 dB 6 dB 0 dB 3 dB 4 dB ZX mini 9 dB 8 dB 2 dB 5 dB 6 dB Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 25 .Mini-GBIC Type and Hardware/Software Support Table 9 lists the minimum attenuation requirements to prevent saturation of the receiver for each type of long range GBIC.

Summit 200 Series Switch Overview 26 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

where it can be free-standing or mounted in a standard 19-inch equipment rack.2 Switch Installation This chapter describes the following topics: • Determining the Switch Location on page 27 • Following Safety Information on page 28 • Installing the Switch on page 28 • Connecting Equipment to the Console Port on page 29 • Powering On the Switch on page 30 • Checking the Installation on page 31 • Logging In for the First Time on page 31 • Installing or Replacing a Mini-Gigabit Interface Connector (Mini-GBIC) on page 32 CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments of performance or procedures other than those specified herein can result in hazardous radiation exposure. Determining the Switch Location The Summit 200 series switch is suited for use in the office. ensure that: • The switch is accessible and cables can be connected easily. When deciding where to install the switch. Two mounting brackets are supplied with the switch. Alternately. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 27 . the device can be rack-mounted in a wiring closet or equipment room. • Water or moisture cannot enter the case of the unit. You should provide a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) clearance. • Units are not stacked more than four high if the switch is free-standing. • No objects are placed on top of the unit. • Air-flow around the unit and through the vents in the side of the case is not restricted.

or to attach the switch to a wall. To rack mount the Summit 200 series switch: 1 Place the switch upright on a hard flat surface. or before carrying out any maintenance procedures. 4 Insert the screws and fully tighten with a suitable screwdriver. Installing the Switch The Summit 200 series switch switch can be mounted in a rack. 7 Secure the switch with suitable screws (not provided). with the front facing you. read the safety information provided in w of this guide. Rack Mounting CAUTION Do not use the rack mount kits to suspend the switch from under a table or desk. Figure 6: Fitting the mounting bracket LC24003 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other side of the switch.Switch Installation Following Safety Information Before installing or removing any components of the switch. or placed free-standing on a tabletop. as shown in Figure 6. 3 Locate a mounting bracket over the mounting holes on one side of the unit. 8 Connect the switch to the redundant power supply (if applicable). 9 Connect cables. 6 Insert the switch into the 19-inch rack. 2 Remove the existing screws from the sides of the case (retain the screws for Step 4). 28 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

Appropriate cables are available from your local supplier. The terminal connected to the console port on the switch must be configured with the same settings. Place the devices on top of one another. Stacking the Switch and Other Devices You can place up to four Summit switches on top of one another. pinouts for a DB-9 male console connector are described in Table 10. ensuring that the corners align. NOTE This relates only to stacking the devices directly one on top of one another. Do not set the switch console port flow control to XON/XOFF. To make your own cables. you will be unable to access the switch. The switch console port settings are set as follows: • Baud rate—9600 • Data bits—8 • Stop bit—1 • Parity—None • Flow control—None NOTE If you set the switch console port flow control to XON/XOFF rather than None. This procedure is described in the documentation supplied with the terminal. Connecting Equipment to the Console Port Connection to the console port is used for direct local management.Connecting Equipment to the Console Port Free-Standing The Summit 200 series switch is supplied with four self-adhesive rubber pads. Apply the pads to the underside of the device by sticking a pad at each corner of the switch. Apply the pads to the underside of the device by sticking a pad in the marked area at each corner of the switch. Table 10: Console Connector Pinouts Function DCD (data carrier detect) RXD (receive data) TXD (transmit data) DTR (data terminal ready) GND (ground) DSR (data set ready) Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Direction In In Out Out — In Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 29 .

Figure 7: Null-modem cable pin-outs Summit Cable connector: 9-pin female PC/Terminal Cable connector: 25-pin male/female Screen Shell TxD 3 RxD 2 Ground 5 RTS 7 CTS 8 DSR 6 DCD 1 DTR 4 1 3 2 7 4 20 5 6 8 Screen RxD TxD Ground RTS DTR CTS DSR DCD ser_sum1 Figure 8 shows the pin-outs for a 9-pin to 9-pin PC-AT null-modem serial cable. Figure 8: PC-AT serial null-modem cable pin-outs Summit Cable connector: 9-pin female PC-AT Serial Port Cable connector: 9-pin female Screen Shell DTR 4 TxD 3 RxD 2 CTS 8 Ground 5 DSR 6 RTS 7 DCD 1 Shell Screen DCD 1 RxD 2 TxD 3 DTR 4 Ground 5 DSR 6 RTS 7 CTS 8 ser_sum2 Powering On the Switch To turn on power to the switch. connect the AC power cable to the switch and then to the wall outlet.Switch Installation Table 10: Console Connector Pinouts (continued) Function RTS (request to send) CTS (clear to send Pin Number 7 8 Direction Out In Figure 7 shows the pin-outs for a 9-pin to RS-232 25-pin null-modem cable. 30 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Turn the on/off switch to the on position.

For example: login: admin Administrator capabilities allow you to access all switch functions. 4 At the password prompt.67. During the POST. “Summit 200 Series Switch Overview”. press [Return]. and the MGMT LED flashes. “Accessing the Switch”. see Chapter 1. Summit200-24) in its prompt. follow these steps: 1 Connect a terminal or workstation running terminal-emulation software to the console port. it is operational. the port LED is off.Checking the Installation Checking the Installation After turning on power to the Summit 200 series switch. admin. To configure the IP settings manually.45. If the switch fails the POST.8 255.255. has no password assigned. you can log in to the switch and configure an IP address for the default VLAN (named default). enter the default user name admin to log on with administrator privileges. When you have successfully logged on to the switch. If the switch passes the POST. by typing save NOTE For more information on saving configuration changes. 2 At your terminal. refer to the ExtremeWare Software User Guide. all ports are temporarily disabled. the MGMT LED is solid green. 6 Save your configuration changes so that they will be in effect after the next switch reboot. Logging In for the First Time After the Summit 200 series switch completes the POST.255. Once operational. press [Return] one or more times until you see the login prompt. 5 Assign an IP address and subnetwork mask for VLAN default by typing config vlan default ipaddress 123. NOTE For more information on the LEDs. see Chapter 4. The MGMT LED flashes until the switch successfully passes the POST. the command-line prompt displays the name of the switch (for example. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 31 . the device performs a Power On Self-Test (POST). 3 At the login prompt. the MGMT LED is amber.0 Your changes take effect immediately. NOTE For more information on switch security. The default name.

coupler. Use only devices approved by Extreme Networks.Switch Installation 7 When you are finished using the facility. Installing or Replacing a Mini-Gigabit Interface Connector (Mini-GBIC) This section describes the safety precautions and preparation steps that you must perform before inserting and securing a mini-GBIC. the Summit 200 series switch locks you out of the login facility. You must wait a few minutes before attempting to log in again. • Connect one end of the link to the Tx port. Without an attenuator. • Prepare and clean an external attenuator. NOTE Remove the LC fiber-optic connector from the mini-GBIC prior to removing the mini-GBIC from the switch. • Do not stretch the fiber. WARNING! Mini-GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation. Preparing to Install or Replace a Mini-GBIC To ensure proper installation. • Make sure the bend radius of the fiber is not less than 2 inches. you are ready to install or replace a mini-GBIC. Safety Information Before you install or replace a mini-GBIC. measure the total loss from the Tx port to the other side of the link. In addition to the previously described tasks. if needed. complete the following tasks before inserting the mini-GBIC: • Disable the port that is needed to install or replace the mini-GBIC. Once you complete all of the described tasks. and connectors. logout of the switch by typing logout NOTE After two incorrect login attempts. Extreme Networks recommends the following when installing or replacing mini-GBICs on an active network: • Use the same type of mini-GBIC at each end of the link. Avoid direct eye exposure to beam. Mini-GBICs are a class 1 laser device. read the safety information in this section. 32 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . • Inspect and clean the fiber tips.

Removing a Mini-GBIC To remove a mini-GBIC similar to the one labeled “Module A” in Figure 9. Figure 9: Mini-GBIC modules Module A Module B XM_024 Mini-GBICs are a 3. rotate the front handle down and pull the mini-GBIC out of the slot. the mini-GBIC installed in your switch is one that is not approved or supported by Extreme Networks. Use only devices approved by Extreme Networks. Avoid direct eye exposure to beam. ensure that you install a mini-GBIC that is approved and supported by Extreme Networks. To remove a mini-GBIC similar to the one labeled “Module B” in Figure 9. gently press and hold the black plastic tab at the bottom of the connector to release the mini-GBIC. NOTE If you see an amber blinking Mini-GBIC port status LED on your Summit 200 series switch. WARNING! Mini-GBICs can emit invisible laser radiation.Installing or Replacing a Mini-Gigabit Interface Connector (Mini-GBIC) Removing and Inserting a Mini-GBIC You can remove mini-GBICs from. Figure 9 shows the two types of mini-GBIC modules. and pull the mini-GBIC out of the SFP receptacle on the switch. To correct this problem. NOTE Remove the LC fiber-optic connector from the mini-GBIC prior to removing the mini-GBIC from the switch. or insert mini-GBICs into your Summit 200 series switch without powering off the system.3 V Class 1 laser device. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 33 .

If the mini-GBIC has a handle. 34 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .Switch Installation Inserting a Mini-GBIC NOTE Mini-GBICs can be installed in the SFP mini-GBIC receptacles for ports 25 and 26 on the Summit 200 series switches. push up on the handle to secure the mini-GBIC. To insert a mini-GBIC connector: 1 Holding the mini-GBIC by its sides. insert the mini-GBIC into the SFP receptacle on the switch. 2 Push the mini-GBIC into the SFP receptacle until you hear an audible click. indicating the mini-GBIC is securely seated in the SFP receptacle.

1D) • Quality of Service (QoS) including support for IEEE 802.1p • Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (IEEE 802. Summary of Features The Summit 200 series switch supports the following ExtremeWare features: • Virtual local area networks (VLANs) including support for IEEE 802. This section describes the supported ExtremeWare features for the Summit 200 series switch.3 ExtremeWare Overview This chapter describes the following topics: • Summary of Features on page 35 • Software Licensing on page 38 • Security Licensing for Features Under License Control on page 39 • Software Factory Defaults on page 40 ExtremeWare is the full-featured software operating system that is designed to run on the Summit 200 series switch.1p. MAC QoS. and four hardware queues • Wire-speed Internet Protocol (IP) routing • DHCP/BOOTP Relay • Network Address Translation (NAT) • Extreme Standby Router Protocol (ESRP) .Aware support • Ethernet Automated Protection Switching (EAPS) support • Routing Information Protocol (RIP) version 1 and RIP version 2 • Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol • Diffserv support • Access-policy support for routing protocols • Access list support for packet filtering • Access list support for rate-limiting • IGMP snooping to control IP multicast traffic • Load sharing on multiple ports Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 35 .1Q and IEEE 802.

see Chapter 14. • Redundant paths are enabled if the main traffic paths fail. A single spanning tree can span multiple VLANs. “Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)”. NOTE For more information on VLANs. Implementing VLANs on your network has the following three advantages: • They help to control broadcast traffic. If a device in VLAN Marketing transmits a broadcast frame.ExtremeWare Overview • RADIUS client and per-command authentication support • TACACS+ support • Network Login • Console command-line interface (CLI) connection • Telnet CLI connection • SSH2 connection • Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) support • Remote Monitoring (RMON) • Traffic mirroring for ports Virtual LANs (VLANs) ExtremeWare has a VLAN feature that enables you to construct your broadcast domains without being restricted by physical connections.and topology-independent devices that communicate as if they were on the same physical local area network (LAN).1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). “Virtual LANs (VLANs)”. Spanning Tree Protocol The Summit 200 series switch supports the IEEE 802. and ensure that: • Redundant paths are disabled when the main paths are operational. A VLAN is a group of location. NOTE For more information on STP. • They ease the change and movement of devices on networks. • They provide extra security. only VLAN Marketing devices receive the frame. see Chapter 7. 36 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . STP enables you to implement parallel paths for network traffic. Devices in VLAN Marketing can only communicate with devices on VLAN Sales using routing services. which is a bridge-based mechanism for providing fault tolerance on networks.

Static IP routes are maintained in the routing table. and four queues. and priority. “IP Unicast Routing”. NOTE For more information on Quality of Service. “Quality of Service (QoS)”. If needed. For example. When ESRP-aware switches are attached to ESRP-enabled switches. The following routing protocols are supported: • RIP version 1 • RIP version 2 • OSPF NOTE For more information on IP unicast routing. all traffic is assigned the “normal” QoS policy profile. but are connected on a network that has other Extreme switches running ESRP are ESRP-aware. By default.Summary of Features Quality of Service ExtremeWare has Quality of Service (QoS) features that support IEEE 802. The algorithm also guarantees packet sequencing between clients. depending on the application involved Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 37 . Load Sharing Load sharing allows you to increase bandwidth and resiliency by using a group of ports to carry traffic in parallel between systems. “Configuring Ports on a Switch”. NOTE For information on load sharing. No configuration of this feature is necessary.1p.0 or above). you can create other QoS policies and rate-limiting access control lists and apply them to different traffic types so that they have different maximum bandwidth. If Extreme switches running ESRP are connected to layer 2 switches that are not manufactured by Extreme Networks (or Extreme switches that are not running ExtremeWare 4. see Chapter 12. see Chapter 15. ESRP-Aware Switches Extreme switches that are not running ESRP. see Chapter 6. These features enable you to specify service levels for different traffic groups. Unicast Routing The Summit 200 series switch can route IP traffic between the VLANs that are configured as virtual router interfaces. the ESRP-aware switches reliably perform fail-over and fail-back scenarios in the prescribed recovery times. VLANs see the load-sharing group as a single virtual port. The sharing algorithm allows the switch to use multiple ports as a single logical port. MAC QoS. the fail-over times seen for traffic local to the segment may appear longer.

In ExtremeWare version 6. Feature Licensing Summit 200 series switches support software licensing for different levels of functionality. software upgrades.1Q tag on the connecting port. The following sections describe the features that are associated with license keys. Edge is a subset of Advanced Edge. Edge functionality includes all switching functions. access list.ExtremeWare Overview and the FDB timer used by the other vendor’s layer 2 switch. as untagged using the protocol filter any. Edge Functionality Edge functionality requires no license key. and ESRP-aware functions. Keys are stored in NVRAM and. including: • Rate-limiting ACLs • IP routing using OSPF • EAPS Edge (cannot be a core node on the ring) • Network Login • RADIUS and TACACS+ command authentication • Network Address Translation (NAT) Enabling the Advanced Edge Functionality To enable the Advanced Edge software feature license. and reconfigurations. Summit 200 series switches have Edge functionality without the requirement of a license key. once entered. if only a single VLAN is involved. feature support is separated into two sets: Edge and Advanced Edge. The VLANs associated with the ports connecting an ESRP-aware switch to an ESRP-enabled switch must be configured using an 802. ESRP can be used with layer 2 switches from other vendors. Keys are typically unique to the switch. use the following command: enable license advanced-edge <license_key> where license_key is an integer. or. 38 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . and are not transferable. but the recovery times vary. Software Licensing Some Extreme Networks products have capabilities that are enabled by using a license key.2e.2. As such. ESRP will not function correctly if the ESRP-aware switch interconnection port is configured for a protocol-sensitive VLAN using untagged traffic. Layer 3 routing functions include support for: • IP routing using RIP version 1 and/or RIP version 2 • IP routing between directly attached VLANs • IP routing using static routes Advanced Edge Functionality The Advanced Edge license enables support of additional functions. and also includes all available layer 3 QoS. persist through reboots.

Security Licensing for Features Under License Control

NOTE The command unconfig switch all does not clear licensing information. Once it is enabled on the switch, this license cannot be disabled.

Verifying the Advanced Edge License
To verify the Advanced Edge license, use the show switch command.

Obtaining an Advanced Edge License
You can order the desired functionality from the factory, using the appropriate model of the desired product. If you order licensing from the factory, the switch arrives packaged with a certificate that contains the unique license key(s), and instructions for enabling the correct functionality on the switch. The certificate is typically packaged with the switch documentation. Once the license key is entered, it should not be necessary to enter the information again. However, we recommend keeping the certificate for your records. You can upgrade the Advanced Edge licensing of an existing product by purchasing a voucher for the desired product and functionality. Please contact your supplier to purchase a voucher. The voucher contains information and instructions on obtaining a license key for the switch using the Extreme Networks Support website at: http://esupport.extremenetworks.com or by phoning Extreme Networks Technical Support at: • (800) 998-2408 • (408) 579-2826

Security Licensing for Features Under License Control
Certain additional ExtremeWare security features, such as the use of Secure Shell (SSH2) encryption, might be under United States export restriction control. Extreme Networks ships these security features in a disabled state. In order to enable the use of these features, you must first obtain an export license, which you can do through Extreme Networks (at no extra charge).

SSH2 Encryption
ExtremeWare version 6.0 and above supports the SSH2 protocol. SSH2 allows the encryption of Telnet session data. The encryption methods used are under U.S. export restriction control. To obtain information on enabling SSH2 encryption, access the Extreme Networks Support website at: http://esupport.extremenetworks.com Fill out a contact form to indicate compliance or noncompliance with the export restrictions. If you are in compliance, you will be given information that will allow you to enable security features.

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

39

ExtremeWare Overview

Software Factory Defaults
Table 11 shows factory defaults for ExtremeWare features supported on the Summit 200 series switch. Table 11: ExtremeWare Software Feature Factory Defaults for the Summit 200 Series
Item Serial or Telnet user account Telnet SSH2 SNMP SNMP read community string SNMP write community string RMON BOOTP QoS 802.1p priority 802.3x flow control Virtual LANs 802.1Q tagging Spanning Tree Protocol Forwarding database aging period IP Routing RIP OSPF IGMP IGMP snooping NTP DNS EAPS NAT Network Login RADIUS TACACS+ Port Mirroring Default Setting admin with no password and user with no password Enabled Disabled Enabled public private Disabled Enabled on the default VLAN (default) All traffic is part of the default queue Recognition enabled Enabled on Gigabit Ethernet ports Two VLANs predefined. VLAN named default contains all ports and belongs to the STPD named s0 All packets are untagged on the default VLAN (default) Disabled for the switch; enabled for each port in the STPD 300 seconds (5 minutes) Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled

NOTE For default settings of individual ExtremeWare features, see the applicable individual chapters in this guide.

40

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

4

Accessing the Switch

This chapter describes the following topics: • Understanding the Command Syntax on page 41 • Line-Editing Keys on page 43 • Command History on page 44 • Common Commands on page 44 • Configuring Management Access on page 46 • Domain Name Service Client Services on page 49 • Checking Basic Connectivity on page 50

Understanding the Command Syntax
This section describes the steps to take when entering a command. Refer to the sections that follow for detailed information on using the command-line interface. When entering a command at the prompt, ensure that you have the appropriate privilege level. Most configuration commands require you to have the administrator privilege level. To use the command-line interface (CLI), follow these steps: 1 Enter the command name. If the command does not include a parameter or values, skip to step 3. If the command requires more information, continue to step 2. 2 If the command includes a parameter, enter the parameter name and values. 3 The value part of the command specifies how you want the parameter to be set. Values include numerics, strings, or addresses, depending on the parameter. 4 After entering the complete command, press [Return]. NOTE If an asterisk (*) appears in front of the command-line prompt, it indicates that you have outstanding configuration changes that have not been saved. For more information on saving configuration changes, see Appendix D, “Software Upgrade and Boot Options”.

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

41

Accessing the Switch

Syntax Helper
The CLI has a built-in syntax helper. If you are unsure of the complete syntax for a particular command, enter as much of the command as possible and press [Return]. The syntax helper provides a list of options for the remainder of the command. The syntax helper also provides assistance if you have entered an incorrect command.

Command Completion with Syntax Helper
ExtremeWare provides command completion by way of the [Tab] key. If you enter a partial command, pressing the [Tab] key posts a list of available options, and places the cursor at the end of the command.

Abbreviated Syntax
Abbreviated syntax is the most unambiguous, shortest allowable abbreviation of a command or parameter. Typically, this is the first three letters of the command. In command tables throughout this guide, abbreviated syntax is noted using bold characters.

NOTE When using abbreviated syntax, you must enter enough characters to make the command unambiguous and distinguishable to the switch.

Command Shortcuts
All named components of the switch configuration must have a unique name. Components are named using the create command. When you enter a command to configure a named component, you do not need to use the keyword of the component. For example, to create a VLAN, you must enter a unique VLAN name:
create vlan engineering

Once you have created the VLAN with a unique name, you can then eliminate the keyword vlan from all other commands that require the name to be entered. For example, on the stand-alone switch, instead of entering the command
config vlan engineering delete port 1-3,6

you could enter the following shortcut:
config engineering delete port 1-3,6

Summit 200 Series Switch Numerical Ranges
Commands that require you to enter one or more port numbers on a Summit 200 series switch use the parameter <portlist> in the syntax. A portlist can be a range of numbers, for example:
port 1-3

You can add additional port numbers to the list, separated by a comma:
port 1-3,6,8

42

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

Line-Editing Keys

Names
All named components of the switch configuration must have a unique name. Names must begin with an alphabetical character and are delimited by whitespace, unless enclosed in quotation marks.

Symbols
You may see a variety of symbols shown as part of the command syntax. These symbols explain how to enter the command, and you do not type them as part of the command itself. Table 12 summarizes command syntax symbols. Table 12: Command Syntax Symbols
Symbol Description

< > (angle brackets) Enclose a variable or value. You must specify the variable or value. For example, in the syntax config vlan <name> ipaddress <ip_address> you must supply a VLAN name for <name> and an address for <ip_address> when entering the command. Do not type the angle brackets. [ ] (square brackets) Enclose a required value or list of required arguments. One or more values or arguments can be specified. For example, in the syntax use image [primary | secondary] you must specify either the primary or secondary image when entering the command. Do not type the square brackets. | (vertical bar) Separates mutually exclusive items in a list, one of which must be entered. For example, in the syntax config snmp community [read-only | read-write] <string> you must specify either the read or write community string in the command. Do not type the vertical bar. { } (braces) Enclose an optional value or a list of optional arguments. One or more values or arguments can be specified. For example, in the syntax reboot {<date> <time> | cancel} you can specify either a particular date and time combination, or the keyword cancel to cancel a previously scheduled reboot. If you do not specify an argument, the command will prompt, asking if you want to reboot the switch now. Do not type the braces.

Line-Editing Keys
Table 13 describes the line-editing keys available using the CLI. Table 13: Line-Editing Keys
Keystroke Backspace Delete or [Ctrl] + D [Ctrl] + K Description Deletes character to left of cursor and shifts remainder of line to left. Deletes character under cursor and shifts remainder of line to left. Deletes characters from under cursor to end of line.

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

43

Manually configures the port speed and duplex setting of one or more ports on a switch. Moves cursor to right. Press [Return] at the beginning of a line to terminate the command and apply the banner. Command History ExtremeWare “remembers” the last 49 commands you entered. Moves cursor to last character in line. inserts text and shifts previous text to right. Commands specific to a particular feature are described in the other chapters of this guide. Table 14: Common Commands Command clear session <number> config account <username> {encrypted} {<password>} Description Terminates a Telnet session from the switch. Moves cursor to first character in line. Configures a user account password. Moves cursor to left. Clears screen and movers cursor to beginning of line. config banner config ports <portlist> auto off {speed [10 | 100 | 1000]} duplex [half | full] config ssh2 key {pregenerated} 44 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . To clear the banner. User names and passwords are case-sensitive. You can enter up to 24 rows of 79-column text that is displayed before the login prompt of each session. Displays next command in command history buffer and places cursor at end of command. Passwords must have a minimum of 1 character and can have a maximum of 32 characters. press [Return] at the beginning of the first line. Configures the banner string.Accessing the Switch Table 13: Line-Editing Keys (continued) Keystroke Insert Left Arrow Right Arrow Home or [Ctrl] + A End or [Ctrl] + E [Ctrl] + L [Ctrl] + P or Up Arrow [Ctrl] + N or Down Arrow Description Toggles on and off. Generates the SSH2 host key. Displays previous command in command history buffer and places cursor at end of command. When toggled on. You can display a list of these commands by using the following command: history Common Commands Table 14 describes common commands used to manage the switch.

Disables pausing of the screen display when a show command output reaches the end of the page. and reboots the system after any exception. Deletes a VLAN. This command is available to admin-level users and to users with RADIUS command authorization. • The default setting is none. You cannot set the year past 2036. Specify one of the following: • • none—Recovery without system reboot. Specify: • • autodst—Enables automatic Daylight Savings Time change. Creates a user account. all—ExtremeWare logs an error to the syslog.Common Commands Table 14: Common Commands (continued) Command config sys-recovery-level [none | critical | all] Description Configures a recovery option for instances where an exception occurs in ExtremeWare. Creates a VLAN. Disables a port on the switch. and reboots the system after critical exceptions. The username is between 1 and 32 characters. console sessions remain open until the switch is rebooted or you logoff. critical—ExtremeWare logs an error to the syslog. The format is as follows: mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss The time uses a 24-hour clock format. Disables BOOTP for one or more VLANs.minutes from GMT time. the password is between 0 and 16 characters. The default setting is autodst. config time <date> <time> Configures the system date and time. Disables logging of CLI commands to the Syslog. Disables the timer that disconnects all sessions. Deletes a user account. Telnet sessions remain open until you close the Telnet client. Once disabled. config timezone <gmt_offset> {autodst | noautodst} Configures the time zone information to the configured offset from GMT time. noautodst—Disables automatic Daylight Savings Time change. The format of gmt_offset is +/. create vlan <name> delete account <username> delete vlan <name> disable bootp vlan [<name> | all] disable cli-config-logging disable clipaging disable idletimeouts disable ports <portlist> Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 45 . config vlan <name> ipaddress <ip_address> {<mask>} create account [admin | user] <username> {encrypted} {<password>} Configures an IP address and subnet mask for a VLAN.

see “RADIUS Client” in Chapter 5. Disables web access. the switch erases the currently selected configuration image in flash memory and reboots. enable clipaging enable idletimeouts enable ssh2 {access-profile [<access_profile> | none]} {port <tcp_port_number>} enable telnet {access-profile [<access_profile> | none]} {port <tcp_port_number>} enable web history show banner unconfig switch {all} Configuring Management Access ExtremeWare supports the following two levels of management: • User • Administrator In addition to the management levels. Displays the previous 49 commands entered on the switch. By default. For more information on RADIUS. The default setting is enabled.Accessing the Switch Table 14: Common Commands (continued) Command disable ssh2 disable telnet disable web enable bootp vlan [<name> | all] enable cli-config-logging Description Disables SSH2 Telnet access to the switch. Enables BOOTP for one or more VLANs. Enables SSH2 Telnet sessions. If you specify the keyword all. all parameters are reset to default settings. “Managing the Switch”. By default. you can optionally use an external RADIUS server to provide CLI command authorization checking for each command. and date and time information) to the factory defaults. Enables web server on the switch for Network Login support. Disables Telnet access to the switch. with the exception of: 46 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Enables Telnet access to the switch. By default. Resets all switch parameters (with the exception of defined user accounts. As a result. User Account A user-level account has viewing access to all manageable parameters. SSH2 uses TCP port number 22. The default setting is enabled. Enables a timer that disconnects all sessions (both Telnet and console) after 20 minutes of inactivity. the web server is enabled. The default setting is disabled. Telnet uses TCP port number 23. Enables the logging of CLI configuration commands to the Syslog for auditing purposes. Enables pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page. Displays the user-configured banner.

It can also add and delete users. The number that follows the colon indicates the sequential line/command number. it indicates that you have outstanding configuration changes that have not been saved. For example: Summit200-24:18# Prompt Text The prompt text is taken from the SNMP sysname setting. the switch is configured with two accounts. The administrator can disconnect a management session that has been established by way of a Telnet connection. Passwords must have a minimum of four characters and can have a maximum of 12 characters. as shown in Table 15. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 47 . • SNMP community strings. For example: Summit200-24:2> Administrator Account An administrator-level account can view and change all switch parameters.Configuring Management Access • User account database. For example: *Summit200-24:19# Default Accounts By default. the user logged on by way of the Telnet connection is notified that the session has been terminated. If this happens. Table 15: Default Accounts Account Name admin user Access Level This user can access and change all manageable parameters. and change the password associated with any account name. If you have logged on with administrator capabilities. This user cannot view the SNMP community strings. the command-line prompt ends with a (#) sign. Changing the Default Password Default accounts do not have passwords assigned to them. This user can view (but not change) all manageable parameters. The admin account cannot be deleted. the command-line prompt ends with a (>) sign. A user-level account can use the ping command to test device reachability. with the following exceptions: • • This user cannot view the user account database. If you have logged on with user capabilities. If an asterisk (*) appears in front of the command-line prompt. and change the password assigned to the account name.

contact your local technical support representative. NOTE If you forget your password while logged out of the command-line interface. 2 At the password prompt. or you can create new names and passwords for the accounts. who will advise on your next course of action. follow these steps: 1 Log in to the switch as admin. To create a new account. press [Return]. 3 Add a default admin password by entering the following command: config account admin 4 Enter the new password at the prompt. To add a password to the default user account. follow these steps: 1 Log in to the switch using the name admin. press [Return]. To add a password to the default admin account. or enter the password that you have configured for the admin account. 5 Re-enter the password at the prompt. 3 Add a new user by using the following command: create account [admin | user] <username> 4 Enter the password at the prompt.Accessing the Switch NOTE User names and passwords are case-sensitive. Passwords can have a minimum of 0 characters and can have a maximum of 31 characters. 2 At the password prompt. press [Return]. Creating a Management Account The switch can have a total of 16 management accounts. 5 Re-enter the new password at the prompt. 3 Add a default user password by entering the following command: config account user 4 Enter the new password at the prompt. or enter the password that you have configured for the admin account. 48 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . 2 At the password prompt. 5 Re-enter the new password at the prompt. follow these steps: 1 Log in to the switch using the name admin. You can use the default names (admin and user).

Table 16 describes the commands used to configure DNS.com. use the following command: delete account <username> NOTE The account name admin cannot be deleted.foo. executing ping bar searches for bar. you must have administrator privileges.com. Removes a DNS server. if the default domain is configured to be foo. the nslookup utility can be used to return the IP address of a hostname. Displays the DNS configuration. Up to three name servers can be configured. you must have administrator privileges. For example. Configures the domain that the DNS client uses if a fully qualified domain name is not entered. Displays the IP address of the requested host. Table 16: DNS Commands Command config dns-client add <ipaddress> Description Adds a DNS name server(s) to the available server list for the DNS client. Domain Name Service Client Services The Domain Name Service (DNS) client in ExtremeWare augments the following commands to allow them to accept either IP addresses or host names: • telnet • download [bootrom | configuration | image] • upload configuration • ping • traceroute In addition. To delete an account.Domain Name Service Client Services Viewing Accounts To view the accounts that have been created. config dns-client default-domain <domain_name> config dns-client delete <ipaddress> nslookup <hostname> show dns-client Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 49 . Use the following command to see the accounts: show accounts Deleting an Account To delete a account.

If not specified. Traceroute The traceroute command enables you to trace the routed path between the switch and a destination endstation.Accessing the Switch Checking Basic Connectivity The switch offers the following commands for checking basic connectivity: • ping • traceroute Ping The ping command enables you to send Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo messages to a remote IP device. Specifies the name of the host. To use the hostname. The traceroute command syntax is: traceroute [<ip_address> | <hostname>] {from <src_ipaddress>} {ttl <TTL>} {port <port>} where: ip_address hostname Specifies the IP address of the destination endstation. the address of the transmitting interface is used. The ping command syntax is: ping {continuous} {size <start_size> {. To use the hostname. the switch continues to send ping messages until interrupted. This option can be interrupted by pressing any key. per packet. you must first configure DNS. If both the start_size and end_size are specified. If no end_size is specified. transmits ICMP requests using 1 byte increments. Specifies the size of the ICMP request. The ping command is available for both the user and administrator privilege level. Table 17: Ping Command Parameters Parameter continuous size Description Specifies ICMP echo messages to be sent continuously. Press any key to interrupt a ping request. packets of start_size are sent. Decodes the list of recorded routes and displays them when the ICMP echo reply is received.<end_size>}} [<ip_address> | <hostname>] {from <src_address> | with record-route | from <src_ipaddress> with record-route} Options for the ping command are described in Table 17. <ipaddress> <hostname> from with record-route If a ping request fails. you must first configure DNS. 50 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Specifies the IP address of the host. Specifies the hostname of the destination endstation. Uses the specified source address in the ICMP packet.

Configures the switch to trace up to the time-to-live number of the switch. If not specified. Uses the specified UDP port number. the address of the transmitting interface is used. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 51 .Checking Basic Connectivity from ttl port Uses the specified source address in the ICMP packet.

Accessing the Switch 52 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

5 Managing the Switch This chapter describes the following topics: • Overview on page 53 • Using the Console Interface on page 54 • Using Telnet on page 54 • Using Secure Shell 2 (SSH2) on page 57 • Using SNMP on page 58 • Authenticating Users on page 60 • Using Network Login on page 66 • Using EAPOL Flooding on page 71 • Using the Simple Network Time Protocol on page 72 Overview Using ExtremeWare. Remote access includes: — Telnet using the CLI interface. — SSH2 using the CLI interface. you can manage the switch using the following methods: • Access the CLI by connecting a terminal (or workstation with terminal-emulation software) to the console port. The switch supports up to the following number of concurrent user sessions: • One console session • Eight Telnet sessions • Eight SSH2 sessions Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 53 . — SNMP access using ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager or another SNMP manager. • Access the switch remotely using TCP/IP through one of the switch ports.

Only VT100 emulation is supported. RS-232 port labeled console. you will see the switch prompt and you can log in. Connecting to Another Host Using Telnet You can Telnet from the current CLI session to another host using the following command: telnet [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] {<port_number>} If the TCP port number is not specified. the Telnet connection will time out after 20 minutes of inactivity. Configuring Switch IP Parameters To manage the switch by way of a Telnet connection or by using an SNMP Network Manager. You can then start managing the switch without further configuration. Check the user manual supplied with the Telnet facility if you are unsure of how to do this. the IP address and subnet mask for the switch will be downloaded automatically. Once the connection is established. you must add the following information to the BOOTP server: • Switch Media Access Control (MAC) address. you will see the switch prompt and you may log in. you must configure the switch IP parameters. Using Telnet Any workstation with a Telnet facility should be able to communicate with the switch over a TCP/IP network. located on the front of the Summit 200 series switch. Before you can start a Telnet session.Managing the Switch Using the Console Interface The CLI built into the switch is accessible by way of the 9-pin. See “Configuring Switch IP Parameters” on page 54 for more information. If idletimeouts are enabled. 54 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Telnet is enabled by default. you must first configure the switch IP parameters. If a connection to a Telnet session is lost inadvertently. the Telnet session defaults to port 23. Up to eight active Telnet sessions can access the switch concurrently. Using a BOOTP Server If you are using IP and you have a Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server set up correctly on your network. Once the connection is established. the switch terminates the session within two hours. found on the rear label of the switch • IP address • Subnet address mask (optional) Once this is done. To open the Telnet session. you must specify the IP address of the device that you want to manage.

For example: login: admin Administrator capabilities enable you to access all switch functions. see Chapter 15. If you configure the switch to use BOOTP. you must have at least one VLAN on the switch. the BOOTP server must be capable of differentiating its relay based on the gateway portion of the BOOTP packet. even if the configuration has been saved. see Chapter 7. Therefore. you must configure the IP address of the VLAN using the command-line interface. To retain the IP address through a power cycle. “IP Unicast Routing”. use the default user name admin to log in with administrator privileges. enter your user name and password. or Web interface. 2 At your terminal. Ensure that you have entered a user name and password with administrator privileges. enter them at the login prompt. The default user names have no passwords assigned. — If you have been assigned a user name and password with administrator privileges.Using Telnet You can enable BOOTP on a per-VLAN basis by using the following command: enable bootp vlan [<name> | all] By default. if you are using BOOTP relay through a router. To assign IP parameters to the switch. To configure the IP settings manually. Manually Configuring the IP Settings If you are using IP without a BOOTP server. — If you are logging in for the first time. “Virtual LANs (VLANs)”. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 55 . Note that they are both case-sensitive. IP addresses are always assigned to a VLAN. Telnet. 3 At the login prompt. or Web interface to communicate with the device. The switch can be assigned multiple IP addresses. NOTE For more information on DHCP/BOOTP relay. you must perform the following tasks: • Log in to the switch with administrator privileges. the switch IP address is not retained through a power cycle. The switch comes configured with a default VLAN named default. To use Telnet or an SNMP Network Manager. All VLANs within a switch that are configured to use BOOTP to get their IP address use the same MAC address. press [Return] one or more times until you see the login prompt. NOTE For information on creating and configuring VLANs. Telnet software. you must enter the IP parameters for the switch in order for the SNMP Network Manager. • Assign an IP address and subnet mask to a VLAN. follow these steps: 1 Connect a terminal or workstation running terminal-emulation software to the console port. and it must be assigned an IP address and subnet mask. BOOTP is enabled on the default VLAN.

the command-line prompt displays the name of the switch in its prompt. by typing: save 8 When you are finished using the facility. log out of the switch by typing: logout or quit Disconnecting a Telnet Session An administrator-level account can disconnect a Telnet management session.45.0 Your changes take effect immediately. When you have successfully logged in to the switch.1 7 Save your configuration changes so that they will be in effect after the next switch reboot. you can express a subnet mask by using dotted decimal notation. Using CIDR notation. 2 Determine the session number of the session you want to terminate by using the following command: show session 3 Terminate the session by using the following command: clear session <session_number> 56 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . the user logged in by way of the Telnet connection is notified that the session has been terminated.67. or by using classless inter-domain routing notation (CIDR).45.67.255. NOTE As a general rule.45. If this happens.255.67. when configuring any IP addresses for the switch. enter the password and press [Return].Managing the Switch 4 At the password prompt.8 / 24 6 Configure the default route for the switch using the following command: config iproute add default <gateway> {<metric>} For example: config iproute add default 123.8 255. follow these steps: 1 Log in to the switch with administrator privileges. CIDR uses a forward slash plus the number of bits in the subnet mask. the command identical to the one above would be: config vlan default ipaddress 123. 5 Assign an IP address and subnetwork mask for the default VLAN by using the following command: config vlan <name> ipaddress <ipaddress> {<subnet_mask>} For example: config vlan default ipaddress 123. To terminate a Telnet session.

you must first obtain a security license. export restrictions. It is highly recommended that you use the F-Secure® SSH client products from Data Fellows corporation. at the console port use the following: enable telnet You must be logged in as an administrator to enable or disable Telnet. Using Secure Shell 2 (SSH2) Secure Shell 2 (SSH2) is a feature of ExtremeWare that allows you to encrypt Telnet session data between the switch and a network administrator using SSH2 client software. This can be done automatically by the switch or by the client application.S. use the following command: enable ssh2 {port <tcp_port_number>} An authentication key must be generated for each SSH2 session. The ExtremeWare SSH2 switch application is based on the Data Fellows™ SSH2 server implementation. To enable SSH2. For more information.datafellows. These applications are available for most operating systems. which you can do through Extreme Networks.com. before enabling SSH2. Enabling SSH2 Because SSH2 is currently under U.Using Secure Shell 2 (SSH2) Controlling Telnet Access By default. Telnet services are enabled on the switch.0. use the following command: config ssh2 key {pregenerated} If you do not select automatic key generation. use the following command: show management You can choose to disable Telnet by using the following command: disable telnet To re-enable Telnet on the switch. SSH2 is not compatible with SSH1. refer to the Data Fellows website at: http://www. you are prompted to enter the key when you enable SSH2. NOTE SSH2 is compatible with the Data Fellows SSH2 client version 2. To display the status of Telnet. “ExtremeWare Overview”. The procedure for obtaining a security license key is described in Chapter 3. To have the key generated by the switch.12 or above. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 57 .

• Community strings—The community strings allow a simple method of authentication between the switch and the remote Network Manager.cs. Using SNMP Any Network Manager running the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) can manage the switch. Accessing Switch Agents To have access to the SNMP agent residing in the switch.fi. General technical information is also available from http://www.ssh. Supported MIBs In addition to private MIBs. Also. Read-write community strings provide read and write access to the switch. Rose ISBN 0-13-8121611-9 Published by Prentice Hall.hut.Managing the Switch You can specify a TCP port number to be used for SSH2 communication. Read community strings provide read-only access to the switch. Each Network Manager provides its own user interface to the management facilities. The following sections describe how to get started if you want to use an SNMP manager. By default the TCP port number is 22. as described in RFC 2021. Configuring SNMP Settings The following SNMP parameters can be configured on the switch: • Authorized trap receivers—An authorized trap receiver can be one or more network management stations on your network. You can have a maximum of 16 trap receivers configured for each switch. you may form an SSH2-encrypted session with the switch. The default read-write community string is private. Once these tasks are accomplished. Entries in this list can also be created. It assumes you are already familiar with SNMP management. and deleted using the RMON2 trapDestTable MIB variable. The default read-only community string is public. modified. The community string for all authorized trap receivers must be configured on the 58 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . This can be downloaded from: ftp://ftp. After you obtain the SSH2 key value. the switch supports the standard MIBs listed in Appendix C.fi/pub/ssh. The switch sends SNMP traps to all trap receivers. There are two types of community strings on the switch. A total of eight community strings can be configured on the switch. The supported key exchange is DSA. 18 May 1994. For additional information on the SSH protocol refer to [FIPS-186] Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPSPUB) 186. refer to the following publication: The Simple Book by Marshall T. Digital Signature Standard. provided the Management Information Base (MIB) is installed correctly on the management station. The supported cipher is 3DES-CBC. at least one VLAN must have an IP address assigned to it. ensure that the client is configured for any nondefault TCP port information that you have configured on the switch. copy the key to the SSH2 client application. If not.

Configures the name of the switch. Disables SNMP on the switch. Summit1 switch). • System name—The system name is the name that you have assigned to this switch. Disabling SNMP access does not affect the SNMP configuration (for example. A maximum of 32 characters is allowed. Configures the name of the system contact. Adds an SNMP read or read/write community string. The IP address can be a unicast. A maximum of 16 trap receivers is allowed. community strings). Turns on SNMP trap support. SNMP community strings can contain up to 127 characters. • System contact (optional)—The system contact is a text field that enables you to enter the name of the person(s) responsible for managing the switch. config snmp community [read-only | read-write] <string> config snmp delete trapreceiver [<ip_address> community <string> | all] config snmp syscontact <string> config snmp syslocation <string> config snmp sysname <string> disable snmp access disable snmp traps enable snmp access enable snmp traps unconfig management Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 59 . and can be enclosed by double quotation marks. Table 18 describes SNMP configuration commands. The default sysname is the model name of the device (for example. The default read-write community string is private. Each community string can have a maximum of 127 characters. Prevents SNMP traps from being sent from the switch. The sysname appears in the switch prompt. • System location (optional)—Using the system location field. Table 18: SNMP Configuration Commands Command config snmp add trapreceiver <ipaddress> community <string> Description Adds the IP address of a specified trap receiver. Turns on SNMP support for the switch. Configures the location of the switch. you can enter an optional location for this switch. Deletes the IP address of a specified trap receiver or all authorized trap receivers. A maximum of 255 characters is allowed. Summit200-24). multicast. Does not clear the SNMP trap receivers that have been configured. A maximum of 255 characters is allowed. or broadcast address. Restores default values to all SNMP-related entries.Using SNMP switch for the trap receiver to receive switch-generated traps. The default read-only community string is public. The default name is the model name of the switch (for example.

If the RADIUS client is enabled. use the following command: show management This command displays the following information: • Enable/disable state for Telnet. You can define a primary and secondary RADIUS server for the switch to contact. For examples on per-command RADIUS configurations. and then to the secondary RADIUS server. Per-Command Authentication Using RADIUS The RADIUS implementation can be used to perform per-command authentication. but access to the RADIUS primary an secondary server fails. and SNMP • SNMP community strings • Authorized SNMP station list • SNMP trap receiver list • RMON polling configuration • Login statistics Authenticating Users ExtremeWare provides two methods to authenticate users who login to the switch: • Radius client • TACACS+ RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS. NOTE You cannot configure RADIUS and TACACS+ at the same time. if the primary does not respond. The ExtremeWare RADIUS client implementation allows authentication for Telnet or console access to the switch. the switch uses its local database for authentication. When a user attempts to login using Telnet. http. SSH2. the request is relayed to the primary RADIUS server.Managing the Switch Displaying SNMP Settings To display the SNMP settings configured on the switch. You do not need to configure any additional switch parameters to take advantage of this capability. RFC 2138) is a mechanism for authenticating and centrally administrating access to network nodes. or the console. The privileges assigned to the user (admin versus nonadmin) at the RADIUS server take precedence over the configuration in the local switch database. see “Configuring RADIUS Client” on page 61. Per-command authentication allows you to define several levels of user capabilities by controlling the permitted command sets based on the RADIUS username and password. The RADIUS server implementation automatically negotiates the per-command authentication capability with the switch. 60 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

• • • The RADIUS server defined by this command is used for user name authentication and CLI command authentication. Table 19: RADIUS Commands Command config radius [primary | secondary] server [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] {<udp_port>} client-ip <ipaddress> Description Configures the primary and secondary RADIUS server. client-ip <ipaddress> — The IP address used by the switch to identify itself when communicating with the RADIUS server. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 61 . [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] — The IP address or hostname of the server being configured. Specify the following: • [primary | secondary] — Configure either the primary or secondary RADIUS server. [<ipadress> | <hostname>] — The IP address or hostname of the server being configured. RADIUS commands are described in Table 19. The default UDP port setting is 1645. Disables the RADIUS client. Configures the RADIUS accounting server. The default UDP port setting is 1646. Disables RADIUS accounting. client-ip <ipaddress> — The IP address used by the switch to identify itself when communicating with the RADIUS server. Specify the following: • [primary | secondary] — Configure either the primary or secondary RADIUS server. The default port value is 1645. config radius [primary | secondary] shared-secret {encrypted} <string> config radius-accounting [primary | secondary] server [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] {<udp_port>} client-ip <ipaddress> Configures the authentication string used to communicate with the RADIUS server. the RADIUS port number to use when talking to the RADIUS server. <udp_port> — The UDP port to use to contact the RADIUS server. config radius-accounting [primary | secondary] shared-secret {encrypted} <string> disable radius disable radius-accounting Configures the authentication string used to communicate with the RADIUS accounting server.Authenticating Users Configuring RADIUS Client You can define primary and secondary server communication information. <udp_port> — The UDP port to use to contact the RADIUS server. The client IP address is the IP address used by the RADIUS server for communicating back to the switch. • • • The accounting server and the RADIUS authentication server can be the same. and for each RADIUS server.

and access level. all CLI logins are sent to the RADIUS servers for authentication.ses testing type proxy v1 [prefix] -------pfx pm1. Displays the current RADIUS client configuration and statistics.--------test type = nas v2 %^$%#*(&!(*&)+ type=nas :-):-(. The example shows excerpts from the client and user configuration files. 62 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . The client configuration file (ClientCfg. ClientCfg.1. password. source name. each CLI command is sent to the RADIUS server for authentication before it is executed. and service type information.edu/aaa Included below are excerpts from relevant portions of a sample Merit RADIUS server implementation.2. Unconfigures the radius accounting client configuration. Displays the current RADIUS accounting client configuration and statistics Unconfigures the radius client configuration.txt) defines the authorized source machine. Enables RADIUS accounting. pm2.txt #Client Name #---------------#10.Managing the Switch Table 19: RADIUS Commands (continued) Command enable radius Description Enables the RADIUS client.-------------.3:256 #pm1 #pm2 #merit. The RADIUS client must also be enabled.merit. enable radius-accounting show radius show radius-accounting unconfig radius {server [primary | secondary]} unconfig radius-accounting {server [primary | secondary]} RADIUS RFC 2138 Attributes The RADIUS RFC 2138 optional attributes supported are as follows: • User-Name • User-Password • Service-Type • Login-IP-Host RADIUS Server Configuration Example (Merit) Many implementations of RADIUS server use the publicly available Merit© AAA server application. When enabled. The user configuration file (users) defines username. available on the World Wide Web at: http://www.edu/homeless #homeless Key [type] [version] --------------. When used with a RADIUS server that supports ExtremeWare CLI authorization.^):-}! type nas hmoemreilte.

Next.42 10.0.Authenticating Users #xyz. To do so. define the desired profiles in an ASCII configuration file called profiles. The parser performs exact string matches on other text to validate commands.203.edu #anyoldthing:1234 10.202.1.52. CLI commands can be defined easily in a hierarchal manner by using an asterisk (*) to indicate any possible subsequent entry. For all clients that use RADIUS per-command authentication. you must add the following type to the client file: type:extreme:nas + RAD_RFC + ACCT_RFC Within the users configuration file.1.com/extreme/support/otherapps.3 10. A profile with the permit on keywords allows use of only the listed commands. The software is available in compiled format for Solaris™ or Linux™ operating systems. Looking at the following example content in profiles for the profile named PROFILE1. Service-Type = Administrative Filter-Id = "unlim" RADIUS Per-Command Configuration Example Building on this example configuration. enable the CLI authorization function and indicate a profile name for that user. use the Extreme-modified RADIUS Merit software that is available from the Extreme Networks web server at http://www. A profile with the deny keyword allows use of all commands except the listed commands. This file contains named profiles of exact or partial strings of CLI commands. Service-Type = Administrative Filter-Id = "unlim" albert Password = "password".merit. as well as in source code format.14 users user Password Filter-Id = admin Password Filter-Id = eric moretesting whoknows? andrew-linux eric eric samf type=Ascend:NAS v1 type=NAS+RAD_RFC+ACCT_RFC type=nas type=nas type=nas type=nas = "" "unlim" = "". which uses the deny keyword. you can use RADIUS to perform per-command authentication to differentiate user capabilities.1.htm or by contacting Extreme Networks technical support. To use per-command authentication. If authorization is enabled without specifying a valid profile. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 63 . A named profile is linked with a user through the users file.extremenetworks. Service-Type = Administrative "unlim" Password = "". • Cannot issue the disable ipforwarding command. the user is unable to perform any commands.) or newline. Service-Type = Administrative Filter-Id = "unlim" samuel Password = "password". additional keywords are available for Profile-Name and Extreme-CLI-Authorization. Commands are separated by a comma (. the following attributes are associated with the user of this profile: • Cannot use any command starting with enable.41 10.203.

the clear counter command and the show management command. disable *. Service-Type = Administrative Filter-Id = "unlim" Password = "". Profile-Name = "Profile1" Filter-Id = "unlim" Extreme:Extreme-CLI-Authorization = Enabled lulu Password = "". Service-Type = Administrative. but can perform no other functions on the switch. Service-Type = Administrative. disable ipforwarding show switch } PROFILE2 { enable *. clear counters show management } PROFILE3 deny { create vlan *. Profile-Name = "" Filter-Id = "unlim" Extreme:Extreme-CLI-Authorization = Enabled admin eric albert Password = "". We also know from the users file that gerald has these capabilities. We also know that eric is able to log in. but is unable to perform any commands. • Can perform all other commands. In PROFILE2. Service-Type = Administrative. configure rip add } 64 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Service-Type = Administrative. configure iproute *. The following lists the contents of the file users with support for per-command authentication: user Password = "" Filter-Id = "unlim" Password = "". Profile-Name = "Profile1" Filter-Id = "unlim" Extreme:Extreme-CLI-Authorization = Enabled gerald Password = "". Profile-Name "Profile2" Filter-Id = "unlim" Extreme:Extreme-CLI-Authorization = Enabled Contents of the file “profiles”: PROFILE1 deny { enable *. a user associated with this profile can use any enable command.Managing the Switch • Cannot issue a show switch command. We know from the users file that this applies to the users albert and lulu. because he has no valid profile assigned. show fdb delete *.

TACACS+ is used to communicate between the switch and an authentication database. To remove a server. Table 20: TACACS+ Commands Command config tacacs [primary | secondary] server [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] {<udp_port>} client-ip <ipaddress> Description Configure the server information for a TACACS+ server. specifying the primary server address. You can configure two TACACS+ servers. secondary server address. Enables TACACS+. use the address 0.0. and accounting on a centralized server. similar in function to the RADIUS client. Specify the following: • primary | secondary — Specifies primary or secondary server configuration. all CLI logins are sent to one of the two TACACS+ server for login name authentication and accounting. Configures the TACACS+ accounting server. • • • config tacacs [primary | secondary] shared-secret {encrypted} <string> config tacacs-accounting [primary | secondary] server [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] {<udp_port>} client-ip <ipaddress> config tacacs-accounting [primary | secondary] shared-secret {encrypted} <string> disable tacacs disable tacacs-accounting disable tacacs-authorization enable tacacs Configures the shared secret string used to communicate with the TACACS+ server. NOTE You cannot use RADIUS and TACACS+ at the same time.0.0. Once enabled. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 65 . Configures the shared secret string used to communicate with the TACACS+ accounting server. Table 20 describes the commands that are used to configure TACACS+. You can use the same server for accounting and authentication.Authenticating Users Configuring TACACS+ Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+) is a mechanism for providing authentication. <ipaddress> | <hostname> — Specifies the TACACS+ server. authorization. <udp_port> — Optionally specifies the UDP port to be used. and UDP port number to be used for TACACS+ sessions. Disables TACACS+ accounting. The ExtremeWare version of TACACS+ is used to authenticate prospective users who are attempting to administer the switch. Disables CLI command authorization. client-ip — Specifies the IP address used by the switch to identify itself when communicating with the TACACS+ server. Disables TACACS+.

66 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Displays the current TACACS+ configuration and statistics. • ISP mode—ISP mode is used when the port and VLAN used will remain constant. enable tacacs-authorization show tacacs show tacacs-accounting unconfig tacacs {server [primary | secondary]} unconfig tacacs-accounting {server [primary | secondary]} Using Network Login Network login is a feature designed to control the admission of user packets into a network by giving addresses only to users that have been properly authenticated. ports are moved into a forwarding state and moved to the VLAN configuration on the RADIUS server. Enables CLI command authorization. Network login has two modes of operation: • Campus mode—Campus mode is used when a port in a VLAN will move to another VLAN when authentication has been completed successfully. a RADIUS server to provide a user database or specific configuration details.Managing the Switch Table 20: TACACS+ Commands (continued) Command enable tacacs-accounting Description Enables TACACS+ accounting. the TACACS+ client must also be enabled. per VLAN basis and uses an integration of DHCP. Unconfigures the TACACS+ client configuration. Displays the current TACACS+ accounting client configuration and statistics. and. Network login is controlled by an administrator on a per port. If accounting is use. user authentication over the web interface. When enabled. This is the only address that the client can reach in a non-authenticated state. NOTE Windows authentication is not supported via network login. sometimes. ports on the VLAN are kept in a non-forwarding state. each command is transmitted to the remote TACACS+ server for authorization before the command is executed. This mode is for the roaming user who will not always be using the same port for authentication. that port will not forward any packets until authentication takes place. When network login is enabled on a port in a VLAN. These two network login modes have the following functional similarities: • Until authentication takes place. • Each mode requires the user to open a web browser with the IP address of the switch. • The web server on the switch provides user authentication. All network settings are configured for that VLAN. Unconfigures the TACACS+ accounting client configuration. • After authentication takes place.

and the URL to be redirected to is the Extreme Networks home page http://192. The syntax of these settings will vary based on the type of RADIUS server that you are using. per VLAN basis. This VLAN will be used for authentication through a RADIUS server. follow these steps: 1 Configure the switch as a RADIUS client.207.201. For example: auto Authentication-Type = Unix-PW.attr Extreme-Netlogin-Vlan 203 string (1. In this case.<ipaddress2> The switch will assign a temporary DHCP address within the DHCP range to the client.207.16. 0. 3 Enable network login on the port. 0. The RADIUS server is 10. 0.6 version of RADIUS.37. the permanent VLAN is corp. using this command: config vlan <name> dhcp-address-range <ipaddress1> .16" Extreme:Extreme-Netlogin-Url-Desc = "Extreme Networks Home" In this example. Service-Type = login Filter-Id = "unlim" Extreme:Extreme-Netlogin-Vlan = "corp" Extreme:Extreme-Netlogin-Url = "http://192.attr Extreme. A port that is tagged can belong to more than one VLAN. ENCAPS) The following optional configuration parameters can also be specified: Extreme. ENCAPS) 205 string (1. The RADIUS server must also contain entries in the user file for a permanent VLAN.37.Using Network Login Using Network Login in Campus Mode Campus mode requires: • A DHCP server • A RADIUS server configuration The RADIUS server must have the following options configured in its dictionary file for network login: Extreme. using the command: enable netlogin ports <portlist> vlan <name> NOTE Network login is used on a per port.243 and the IP address of the Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 67 . See “RADIUS Client” on page 60. the URL to be redirected to after authentication has taken place.26. Example Configuration Using Campus Mode This example creates a permanent VLAN named corp on the switch.attr Extreme-Netlogin-Url Extreme-Netlogin-Url-Desc 204 string (1. 2 Configure a DHCP range for the port or ports in the VLAN on which you want to enable network login. network login can be enabled on one port for each VLAN. and the description of that URL. ENCAPS) NOTE These settings are for the Merit 3. the username is auto. Configuring Campus Mode To configure the switch to use network login in campus mode.

NOTE It is important to use the IP address of a VLAN that is reachable from anywhere on the network A page will open with a link for network login.0.168. 2 Plug into the port that has network login enabled.0. If you have more than one Ethernet adapter.26. the client will have its temporary IP address.26.0. 68 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .201.201. A temporary VLAN named temporary is created and port 9 is added. Network login is enabled on the port. the user will follow these steps: 1 Set up the Windows IP configuration for DHCP.243 client-ip 10. In this example. 6 Click the network login link.1/24 temporary dhcp-address-range 192. At this point.168.168. In this example. 7 Enter the username and password configured on the RADIUS server. Use the buttons to release the IP configuration and renew the DHCP lease. 5 Bring up the web browser and enter the IP address of the switch.26. the user will be redirected to the URL configured on the RADIUS server.11/24 radius primary server 10. The secret is “secret”.20 .201. A dialog box opens requesting a username and password. After the user has successfully logged in.26.168. the user will plug into port 9. Choose the Ethernet adapter that is connected to the port on which network login is enabled.201.Managing the Switch switch is 10.192. specify the adapter by using a number for the adapter following the ipconfig command. create config config config enable create config config config enable vlan corp corp ipaddress 10.11 radius primary shared-secret secret radius vlan temporary temporary add port 9 temporary ipaddress 192. — Windows NT/2000—use the ipconfig command line utility. You can find the adapter number using the command ipconfig/all.11. 4 Release any old IP settings and renew the DHCP lease. This is done differently depending on the version of Windows the user is running: — Windows 9x—use the winipcfg tool.100 netlogin ports 9 vlan temporary User Login Using Campus Mode To log in as a user from the client. the client should have obtained the IP address 192. Use the command ipconfig/release to release the IP configuration and ipconfig/renew to get the temporary IP address from the switch. 3 Log in to Windows.20.0.

Example Configuration Using ISP Mode This example creates a permanent VLAN named corp on the switch. create vlan corp config corp ipaddress 10. For more information on the show vlan command. there are several ways that a port can return to a non-authenticated. No Extreme-specific lines are required for the dictionary or the user file. non-forwarding state: • The user successfully logs out using the logout web browser window.201. A port that is tagged can belong to more than one VLAN. • After successful authentication. Port 9 is added to the VLAN corp. a RADIUS server might be used to provide user authentication.243 client-ip 10.201.26.26.26.11/24 config radius primary server 10. • The link from the user to the switch’s port is lost. the following takes place: • Authentication is done through the RADIUS server. Extreme Networks recommends that you do not log out until the login process is completed. the connection information configured on the RADIUS server is returned to the switch: — The permanent VLAN — The URL to be redirected to (optional) — The URL description (optional) • The port is moved to the permanent VLAN. You can verify this using the show vlan command. The login process is completed when you receive a permanent address. The radius server is 10. Network login is enabled on the port.11. NOTE Because network login is sensitive to state changes during the authentication process.201. using this command: enable netlogin ports <portlist> vlan <name> NOTE Network login is used on a per port. Using Network Login in ISP Mode In ISP mode.201.26. In this case. per VLAN basis.201. The secret is “secret”.11 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 69 . This VLAN will be used for authentication through RADIUS. • An administrator changes the port state. network login can be enabled on one port for each VLAN.Using Network Login During the user login process. Configuring ISP Mode Configure the switch to use network login in ISP mode.243 and the IP address of the switch is 10.26. see “Displaying VLAN Settings” on page 92. After a successful login has been achieved.

Disables network login on a specified port in a VLAN. Enables network login on a specified port in a VLAN. The default value is 30 seconds. per VLAN basis. use the following command: show netlogin info {ports <portlist> vlan <name>} Example #show netlogin info ports 9 vlan temporary Port 9: VLAN: temporary Port State: Not Authenticated 70 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Configures the DHCP options returned as part of the DHCP response by a switch configured as a DHCP server.Managing the Switch config enable config enable radius primary shared-secret secret radius corp add port 9 netlogin ports 9 vlan corp DHCP Server on the Switch A DHCP server with limited configuration capabilities is included in the switch to provide IP addresses to clients. DHCP is enabled on a per port. To enable or disable DHCP on a port in a VLAN. Disables DHCP on a specified port in a VLAN.<ipaddress2> config vlan <name> dhcp-lease-timer <lease-timer> config vlan <name> dhcp-options [default-gateway | dns-server | wins-server] <ipaddress> config vlan <name> netlogin-lease-timer <lease-timer> Description Configures a set of DHCP addresses for a VLAN. Table 21: Network Login Configuration Commands Command config vlan <name> dhcp-address-range <ipaddress1> . use one of the following commands: enable dhcp ports <portlist> vlan <name> disable dhcp ports <portlist> vlan <name> Network Login Configuration Commands Table 21 describes the commands used to configure network login. Enables DHCP on a specified port in a VLAN. disable dhcp ports <portlist> vlan <name> disable netlogin ports <portlist> vlan <name> enable dhcp ports <portlist> vlan <name> enable netlogin ports <portlist> vlan <name> Displaying Network Login Settings To display the network login settings. Configures the timer value in seconds returned as part of the DHCP response for clients attached to network enabled ports. Configures the timer value in seconds returned as part of the DHCP response.

Summit 200 series switches do not forward EAPOL frames. No packets sent by the user on port 9 will get past the port until authentication takes place. The encapsulating mechanism used for communication between the supplicant and the authenticator is referred to as EAP Over LANs. you can verify that status by using the command: show config The following example disables EAPOL frame flooding on a Summit 200 series switch: disable eapol-flooding You can verify the current EAPOL flooding state by using the command: show eapol-flooding Table 22 describes the commands used to configure EAPOL flooding.1x port authentication access control process: the supplicant. To disable network login.1D). By default (per IEEE 802. you might opt to change this behavior to support an upstream central authenticator by enabling the switch to flood the EAPOL frame on the VLAN associated with the ingress port. the show command displays the port state as authenticated. The following example enables EAPOL frame flooding on a Summit 200 series switch: enable eapol-flooding When EAPOL flooding is enabled on the switch. the user is using campus mode and no authentication has taken place. and the authenticating server. the authenticator. #show netlogin info ports 9 vlan corp Port 9: VLAN: corp Port State: Authenticated Temp IP: Unknown DHCP: Not Enabled User: auto MAC: 00:10:A4:A9:11:3B Disabling Network Login Network login must be disabled on a port before you can delete a VLAN that contains that port. After authentication has taken place and the permanent IP address is obtained.1x) uses Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) as the underlying mechanism for transferring information between the three network entities engaged in the IEEE 802.Using EAPOL Flooding Temp IP: Unknown DHCP: Not Enabled User: Unknown MAC: Unknown In this example. use the following command: disable netlogin ports <portlist> vlan <name> Using EAPOL Flooding Port-based Network Access Control (IEEE 802. Under certain conditions. the port state displays as not authenticated. Therefore. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 71 . or EAPOL.

Using the Simple Network Time Protocol ExtremeWare supports the client portion of the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Version 3 based on RFC1769.minutes from the GMT time. or for switches using SNTP to query the SNTP server(s) directly. SNTP can be used by the switch to update and synchronize its internal clock from a Simple Network Time Protocol server. 4 If you would like this switch to use a directed query to the SNTP server. identify the preferred method for obtaining SNTP updates. If the switch listens to SNTP broadcasts. it restarts the query process. follow these steps: 1 Identify the host(s) that are configured as SNTP server(s). 2 Configure the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) offset and Daylight Savings Time preference. A combination of both methods is possible. Additionally. the switch waits for the sntp-client update interval before querying again. The default setting is enabled. skip this step. In addition. Configuring and Using SNTP To use SNTP. Enables EAPOL flooding on the switch. the switch sends out a periodic query to the indicated SNTP server. Enables network login on a specified port in a VLAN. To configure the switch to use a directed query. The network time information is automatically saved into the on-board real-time clock.Managing the Switch Table 22: EAPOL Flooding Configuration Commands Command disable eapol-flooding enable eapol-flooding show eapol-flooding Description Disables EAPOL flooding on the switch. These features have been tested for year 2000 compliance. The command syntax to configure GMT offset and usage of Daylight Savings is as follows: config timezone <GMT_offset> {autodst | noautodst} The GMT_OFFSET is in +/. or if it is not synchronized. Automatic Daylight Savings Time (DST) changes can be enabled or disabled. You must identify the method that should be used for the switch being configured. 72 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . or the switch listens to broadcast SNTP updates. The options are for the SNTP server to send out broadcasts. the switch sends out a periodic query to the SNTP servers defined later (if configured) or listens to broadcast SNTP updates from the network. configure the switch to use the SNTP server(s). otherwise. the switch queries the secondary server (if one is configured). 3 Enable the SNTP client using the following command: enable sntp-client Once enabled. the switch supports the configured setting for Greenwich Mean time (GMT) offset and the use of Daylight Savings Time. If the primary server does not respond within 1 second. If the switch cannot obtain the time. When enabled. use the following command: config sntp-client [primary | secondary] server [<ip_address> | <hostname>] NTP queries are first sent to the primary server.

Trevor City. CA. Buenos Aires. Reykjavik. the switch should be configured with the appropriate offset to GMT based on geographical location. and the current local time. Edinburgh. Guyana. Table 23 describes GMT offsets. 6 You can verify the configuration using the following commands: — show sntp-client This command provides configuration and statistics associated with SNTP and its connectivity to the SNTP server. Iceland. CA. Lima. Argentina. Casablanca. Seattle. Dublin. New York. NY. the interval for which the SNTP client updates the real-time clock of the switch can be changed using the following command: config sntp-client update-interval <seconds> The default sntp-client update-interval value is 64 seconds. Lisbon. Caracas. Mexico Saskatchewan. Peru. Columbia. Scotland. England. Portugal. Morocco -6:00 -7:00 -8:00 -9:00 -10:00 -360 -420 -480 -540 -600 CST—Central Standard MST—Mountain Standard PST—Pacific Standard YST—Yukon Standard AHST—Alaska-Hawaii Standard CAT—Central Alaska HST—Hawaii Standard -11:00 -12:00 -660 -720 NT—Nome IDLW—International Date Line West Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 73 . Daylight Savings Time. Cupertino. Cape Verde Islands Cities London. NTP updates are distributed using GMT time. To properly display the local time in logs and other timestamp information. Georgetown. WA USA Azores. — show switch This command indicates the GMT offset. MI USA Mexico City. Canada Los Angeles. Ireland. Table 23: Greenwich Mean Time Offsets GMT Offset in Hours +0:00 GMT Offset Common Time Zone in Minutes References +0 GMT—Greenwich Mean UT or UTC—Universal (Coordinated) WET—Western European -1:00 -2:00 -3:00 -4:00 -5:00 -60 -120 -180 -240 -300 AST—Atlantic Standard EST—Eastern Standard WAT—West Africa AT—Azores Brasilia. Brazil. La Paz Bogota.Using the Simple Network Time Protocol 5 Optionally.

Harare. Greece. Moscow. Madrid. Istanbul. Iran Abu Dhabi. Pune. Kenya. Turkey. Belgium. Muscat. Bern. FWT—French Winter Brussels. Berlin. Fiji. Saudi Arabia. Sweden. Tblisi. Russia Zone 2 Athens. Amsterdam. Switzerland. New Zealand. India +2:00 +120 +3:00 +180 +4:00 +5:00 +5:30 +6:00 +7:00 +8:00 +9:00 +10:00 +240 +300 +330 +360 +420 +480 +540 +600 ZP4—Russia Zone 3 ZP5—Russia Zone 4 IST—India Standard Time ZP6—Russia Zone 5 WAST—West Australian Standard CCT—China Coast. France. Riyadh. Russia Zone 1 BT—Baghdad. UAE. Spain. Oslo.Managing the Switch Table 23: Greenwich Mean Time Offsets (continued) GMT Offset in Hours +1:00 GMT Offset Common Time Zone in Minutes References +60 CET—Central European Cities Paris. Russia Zone 8 EAST—East Australian Standard GST—Guam Standard Russia Zone 9 +11:00 +12:00 +660 +720 IDLE—International Date Line East NZST—New Zealand Standard NZT—New Zealand Wellington. The Netherlands. Nairobi. Finland. Tehran. Allahabad. MET—Middle European Austria. Volgograd. Kabul New Delhi. Helsinki. Vienna. Zimbabwe Kuwait. Rome. Italy. Israel. Marshall Islands 74 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . MEWT—Middle European Winter Stockholm. Jerusalem. Germany. SWT—Swedish Winter Norway EET—Eastern European. Russia Zone 7 JST—Japan Standard. Russia.

0. Table 24: SNTP Configuration Commands Command config sntp-client [primary | secondary] server [<ipaddress> | <host_name>] Description Configures an SNTP server for the switch to obtain time information.1. the switch queries a specific SNTP server and a backup SNTP server.Using the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Configuration Commands Table 24 describes SNTP configuration commands. The default setting is 64 seconds. Displays configuration and statistics for the SNTP client. If the primary server does not respond within 1 second.1 sntp-client secondary server 10. Configures the interval between polling for time information from SNTP servers. CA. Enables Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) client functions. config sntp-client update-interval <seconds> disable sntp-client enable sntp-client show sntp-client SNTP Example In this example.1. Disables SNTP client functions. and an update occurs every 20 minutes.2 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 75 . The commands to configure the switch are as follows: config config enable config config timezone -480 autodst sntp-client update interval 1200 sntp-client sntp-client primary server 10. or if it is not synchronized. Queries are first sent to the primary server. the switch queries the second server. The switch is located in Cupertino.0.

Managing the Switch 76 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

5. By default. To enable or disable one or more ports.6 Configuring Ports on a Switch This chapter describes the following topics: • Enabling and Disabling Switch Ports on page 77 • Load Sharing on the Switch on page 80 • Switch Port-Mirroring on page 82 • Extreme Discovery Protocol on page 84 Enabling and Disabling Switch Ports By default. and 12 through 15 on a Summit 200 series switch. to disable ports 3. the ports autonegotiate port speed. and their speed cannot be modified. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 77 . use the following command: disable ports 3. The copper-medium Gigabit Ethernet ports can be configured as 10/100/1000 Mbps ports. You can manually configure the duplex setting and the speed of 10/100 Mbps ports. the switch is configured to use autonegotiation to determine the port speed and duplex setting for each port.12-15 Even though a port is disabled. You can also configure each port for a particular speed (either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps). NOTE The fiber-medium Gigabit Ethernet ports on the switch are statically set to 1 Gbps. Configuring Switch Port Speed and Duplex Setting By default.5. 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX ports can connect to either 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T networks. all ports are enabled. use the following command: [enable | disable] ports <portlist> For example. the link remains enabled for diagnostic purposes.

The following example turns autopolarity off for ports 3-5 on a Summit 200 series switch: config ports 3-5 auto-polarity off NOTE If you attempt to invoke this command on a Gigabit Ethernet switch port. you may need to turn autonegotiation off on a Gigabit Ethernet port. the system causes the Ethernet link to come up regardless of the cable type connected to the port. and enabled by default. Even though a Gigabit Ethernet port runs only at full duplex. If autonegotiation is set to off. crossover cable) used to make the connection to the switch port. By default. The following example turns autonegotiation off for port 25 (a Gigabit Ethernet port) on a stand-alone Summit 200-24 switch: config ports 25 auto off duplex full Turning Off Autopolarity Detection for an Ethernet Port The autopolarity detection feature allows the system to detect and respond to the Ethernet cable type (straight-through vs. You can also verify the current autopolarity status by using the command: show ports {<portlist>} info detail 78 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . the 10/100 Mbps ports autonegotiate the duplex setting. The autopolarity feature is supported only on the 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX switch ports. It is enabled or disabled as part of autonegotiation. the system displays a message indicating that the specified port is not supported by this feature.Configuring Ports on a Switch All ports on a stand-alone switch can be configured for half-duplex or full-duplex operation. use the following command: config ports <portlist> auto off {speed [10 | 100 | 1000]} duplex [half | full] To configure the system to autonegotiate. you can verify that status by using the command: show config This command will list the ports for which the feature has been disabled. you must specify the duplex setting. you might opt to turn autopolarity off on one or more 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX ports. When autopolarity is disabled on one or more Ethernet ports. When the autopolarity feature is disabled. When the autopolarity feature is enabled. When autonegotiation is turned on. To configure port speed and duplex setting. Turning Off Autonegotiation for a Gigabit Ethernet Port In certain interoperability situations. flow control is disabled. flow control is enabled. use the following command: config ports <portlist> auto on Flow control is supported only on Gigabit Ethernet ports. the link will come up only when a crossover cable is connected to the port. Under certain conditions.

the link is available for diagnostic purposes. off—Disables the autopolarity detection feature. duplex—The duplex setting (half. Specify the following: • • • config ports <portlist> auto on auto off—The port will not autonegotiate the settings. Resets autonegotiation for one or more ports by resetting the physical link. • • • config ports <portlist> display-string <string> Configures a user-defined string for a port. Table 25: Switch Port Commands Command config ports <portlist> auto off {speed [10 | 100 | 1000]} duplex [half | full] Description Changes the configuration of a group of ports. Even when disabled. Defines a load-sharing group of ports. on—Enables the autopolarity detection feature. only. The string can be up to 16 characters. 802. config ports <all | portlist> auto-polarity <off | Disables or enables the autopolarity detection on> feature for one or more Ethernet ports. config sharing address-based [mac_source | mac_destination | mac_source_destination | ip_source | ip_destination | ip_source_destination] disable ports <portlist> disable sharing <port> enable ports <portlist> enable sharing <port> grouping <portlist> {address-based} restart ports <portlist> show ports {<portlist>} collisions Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 79 .3z for Gigabit Ethernet ports. Enables a port.or full-duplex).3u for 10/100 Mbps ports or 802. The string is displayed in certain show commands (for example. Disables a load-sharing group of ports. show port all info). The optional load-sharing algorithm. Disables a port. The ports specified in <portlist> are grouped to the master port. Specify the following: • all—Specifies that the feature is either disabled or enabled for all of the Ethernet ports on the switch. address-based. Displays real-time collision statistics. uses addressing information as criteria for egress port selection. speed—The speed of the port. identified as a number. or ranges of numbers (two numbers separated by a hyphen). Enables autonegotiation for the particular port type. several numbers separated by commas.Enabling and Disabling Switch Ports Switch Port Commands Table 25 describes the switch port commands. Configures the part of the packet examined by the switch when selecting the egress port for transmitting load-sharing data. This feature is available using the address-based load-sharing algorithm. portlist—Specifies that the feature is either disabled or enabled for one or more ports.

The sharing algorithm allows the switch to use multiple ports as a single logical port. Displays detailed system-related information. VLANs see the load-sharing group as a single logical port. Use the [Spacebar] to toggle between packet.Configuring Ports on a Switch Table 25: Switch Port Commands (continued) Command show ports {<portlist>} configuration show ports {<portlist>} info {detail} show ports {<portlist>} packet show ports {<portlist>} rxerrors show ports {<portlist>} stats show ports {<portlist>} txerrors show ports {<portlist>} utilization Description Displays the port configuration. If the failed port becomes active again. This feature is supported between Extreme Networks switches only. Most load-sharing algorithms guarantee packet sequencing between clients. Algorithm selection is not intended for use in predictive traffic engineering. If a port in a load-sharing group fails. traffic is redistributed to the remaining ports in the load-sharing group. traffic is redistributed to include that port. Displays real-time port statistics. 80 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . and bandwidth utilization information. Displays the address-based load sharing configuration. For example. show sharing address-based unconfig ports <portlist> display-string <string> Load Sharing on the Switch Load sharing with switches allows you to increase bandwidth and resiliency by using a group of ports to carry traffic in parallel between switches. Displays real-time port utilization information. Displays real-time receive error statistics. Check with an Extreme Networks technical representative for more information. The load-sharing algorithms do not need to be the same on both ends. NOTE Load sharing must be enabled on both ends of the link or a network loop may result. Clears the user-defined display string from a port. but may be compatible with third-party trunking or link-aggregation algorithms. Displays real-time transmit error statistics. Displays a histogram of packet statistics. You can configure the address-based load-sharing algorithm on the Summit 200 series switch. byte. Load-Sharing Algorithms Load-sharing algorithms allow you to select the distribution technique used by the load-sharing group to determine the output port selection.

• For Layer 3 load sharing. IP source address. It can be thought of as the logical port representing the entire port group. you must create a load-sharing group of ports. mac_source_destination Indicates that the switch should examine the MAC source ip_source ip_source_destination ip_destination Indicates that the switch should examine the IP source address. Indicates that the switch should examine the IP destination address. This feature is available for the address-based load-sharing algorithm. and destination address.Load Sharing on the Switch The address-based load-sharing algorithm uses addressing information to determine which physical port in the load-sharing group to use for forwarding traffic out of the switch. only. Addressing information is based on the packet protocol. To verify your configuration. The first port in the load-sharing group is configured as the “master” logical port. the switch examines a specific place in the packet to determine which egress port to use for forwarding traffic: • For Layer 2 load sharing. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 81 . using the following command: config sharing address-based [mac_source | mac_destination | mac_source_destination | ip_source | ip_destination | ip_source_destination] where: mac_source mac_destination Indicates that the switch should examine the MAC source address. use the following command: show sharing address-based Configuring Switch Load Sharing To set up a switch to load share among ports. MAC destination address. You can control the field examined by the switch for IP address-based load sharing. Configured IP Address-Based Load Sharing When you configure load sharing. Indicates that the switch should examine the IP source address and destination address. This is the reference port used in configuration commands. — All other packets—Use the source and destination MAC address. as follows: — IP packets—Use the source and destination MAC and IP addresses. Indicates that the switch should examine the MAC destination address. the switch uses the MAC source address. the switch uses the IP destination address. and IP destination address.

As a result. To enable or disable a load-sharing group. logical port 9 represents physical ports 9 through 12. and uses the first port in the group as the master logical port 9: enable sharing 9 grouping 9-12 In this example. • Ports on the switch are divided into a maximum of six groups. logical port number. and the partner switch will continue to forward packets. Load-Sharing on a Summit 200 Series Switch The following example defines a load-sharing group that contains ports 9 through 12. if you use 100 Mbps ports. To define a load-sharing group. meaning that all data that traverses the port. • Port-based and round-robin load sharing algorithms do not apply. The traffic filter is defined by the physical port. you should always reference the master logical port of the load-sharing group (port 9 in the previous example) when configuring or viewing VLANs. regardless of VLAN configuration. NOTE Do not disable a port that is part of a load-sharing group. When using load sharing. Switch Port-Mirroring Port-mirroring configures the switch to copy all traffic associated with one or more ports. is copied to the monitor port.Configuring Ports on a Switch The following rules apply to the Summit 200 series switch: • Ports on the switch must be of the same port type. Disabling the port prevents it from forwarding traffic. a partner switch does not receive a valid indication that the port is not in a forwarding state. The system uses a traffic filter that copies a group of traffic to the monitor port. you assign a group of ports to a single. all ports on the switch must be 100 Mbps ports. VLANs configured to use other ports in the load-sharing group will have those ports deleted from the VLAN when load sharing becomes enabled. 82 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . but still allows the link to initialize. use the following commands: enable sharing <port> grouping <portlist> {address-based} disable sharing <port> Load-Sharing Example This section provides an example of how to define load-sharing on a Summit 200 series switch. For example. Verifying the Load-Sharing Configuration The screen output resulting from the show ports configuration command lists the ports that are involved in load sharing and the master logical port identity. The monitor port can be connected to a network analyzer or RMON probe for packet analysis.

Port group 1 consists of ports 1 through 24 and port 49. NOTE Frames that contain errors are not mirrored. This allows you to mirror multiple ports or VLANs to a mirror port. The default port tag will be added to any untagged packets as they are mirrored. mirror three or fewer ports at any given time. Deletes a particular mirroring filter definition. Dedicates a port to be the mirror output port. Once a port is specified as a monitor port. while preserving the ability of a single protocol analyzer to track and differentiate traffic within a broadcast domain (VLAN) and across broadcast domains (for example. all ports specified by mirror filters as well as the mirror output port must belong to the same port group. Table 26: Switch Port-Mirroring Configuration Commands Command config mirroring add ports <portlist> config mirroring delete ports <portlist> disable mirroring enable mirroring to <port> tagged show mirroring Description Adds a single mirroring filter definition. The mirrored port always transmits tagged frames. across VLANs when routing). Displays the port-mirroring configuration. NOTE For optimum performance. port group 2 consists of ports 25 through 48 and port 50. Port-Mirroring Commands Switch port-mirroring commands are described in Table 26. Up to eight mirroring definitions can be added. Disables port-mirroring. On the Summit 200-48 switch. it cannot be used for any other function. Port-Mirroring Example The following example selects port 3 as the mirror port and sends all traffic coming into or out of the switch on port 1 to the mirror port: enable mirroring to port 3 tagged config mirroring add port 1 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 83 .Switch Port-Mirroring Up to eight mirroring filters and one monitor port can be configured.

The default setting is enabled. EDP Commands Table 27 lists EDP commands. Table 27: EDP Commands Command disable edp ports <portlist> enable edp ports <portlist> show edp Description Disables the EDP on one or more ports. • Switch IP address. Displays EDP information.Configuring Ports on a Switch Extreme Discovery Protocol The Extreme Discovery Protocol (EDP) is used to gather information about neighbor Extreme Networks switches. • Switch VLAN-IP information. Enables the generation and processing of EDP messages on one or more ports. Information communicated using EDP includes: • Switch MAC address (switch ID). EDP is used to by the switches to exchange topology information. • Switch port number. • Switch software version information. 84 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

network administrators spend much of their time dealing with moves and changes. Benefits Implementing VLANs on your networks has the following advantages: • VLANs help to control traffic—With traditional networks. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 85 . VLANs increase the efficiency of your network because each VLAN can be set up to contain only those devices that must communicate with each other. congestion can be caused by broadcast traffic that is directed to all network devices. the addresses of each endstation must be updated manually. Any set of ports (including all ports on the switch) is considered a VLAN. Overview of Virtual LANs The term “VLAN” is used to refer to a collection of devices that communicate as if they were on the same physical LAN. LAN segments are not restricted by the hardware that physically connects them. • VLANs provide extra security—Devices within each VLAN can only communicate with member devices in the same VLAN. • VLANs ease the change and movement of devices—With traditional networks. The segments are defined by flexible user groups you create with the command-line interface. the traffic must cross a routing device. If users move to a different subnetwork. If a device in VLAN Marketing must communicate with devices in VLAN Sales. regardless of whether they require it.7 Virtual LANs (VLANs) This chapter describes the following topics: • Overview of Virtual LANs on page 85 • Types of VLANs on page 86 • VLAN Names on page 90 • Configuring VLANs on the Switch on page 91 • Displaying VLAN Settings on page 92 • MAC-Based VLANs on page 93 Setting up Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) on the switch eases many time-consuming tasks of network administration while increasing efficiency in network operations.

and port 26 are part of VLAN Sales. Spanning Switches with Port-Based VLANs To create a port-based VLAN that spans two switches. the traffic must be routed by the switch. Ports 1 through 24. a VLAN name is given to a group of one or more ports on the switch. 2 Cable the two switches together using one port on each switch per VLAN. ports 9 through 16. and ports 17 through 24 are part of VLAN Marketing. and port 25 are part of VLAN Finance. on the Summit 200-24 switch in Figure 10. A port can be a member of only one port-based VLAN. This means that each VLAN must be configured as a router interface with a unique IP address. For example. All ports on the BlackDiamond switch belong to VLAN Sales. ports 1 through 8. Figure 11 illustrates a single VLAN that spans a BlackDiamond switch and a Summit 200-24 switch. Figure 10: Example of a port-based VLAN on the Summit 200-24 switch Marketing Finance Sales LC24004 For the members of the different IP VLANs to communicate. and port 26 on system 2 (the Summit 200-24 switch). port 4 on system 1 (the BlackDiamond switch). you must do two things: 1 Assign the port on each switch to the VLAN. and port 26 on the Summit 200-24 switch also belong to VLAN Sales.Virtual LANs (VLANs) Types of VLANs VLANs can be created according to the following criteria: • Physical port • 802. The two switches are connected using slot 8. The Summit 200 series switch supports L2 port-based VLANs.1Q tag • MAC address • A combination of these criteria Port-Based VLANs In a port-based VLAN. 86 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

and port 26 are part of VLAN Accounting. Figure 12 illustrates two VLANs spanning two switches. On system 1. and port 25 are part of VLAN Engineering. as well. ports 1 through 8. On system 2. ports 17 through 24.Types of VLANs Figure 11: Single port-based VLAN spanning two switches System 1 1 2 3 4 A B 5 6 7 8 Sales 1 2 3 4 LC24005 To create multiple VLANs that span two switches in a port-based VLAN. At least one port on each switch must be a member of the corresponding VLANs. a port on system 1 must be cabled to a port on system 2 for each VLAN you want to have span across the switches. all ports on slot 8 are part of VLAN Engineering. all ports on slot 1 are part of VLAN Accounting. Figure 12: Two port-based VLANs spanning two switches System 1 System 2 1 2 3 4 A B 5 6 7 8 Accounting 1 1 2 2 Engineering 3 3 4 4 LC24006 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 87 .

In addition to configuring the VLAN tag for the port. as shown in Figure 12. the server must have a Network Interface Card (NIC) that supports 802. in a daisy-chained fashion. The switch adds and strips tags.1Q tagged packets may lead to the appearance of packets slightly bigger than the current IEEE 802.518 bytes. VLAN Engineering spans system 1 and system 2 by way of a connection between system 1. slot 8.1Q VLAN tag.1Q VLAN tag (VLANid) of 1 assigned.1Q bridges or routers are placed in the path. and system 2. each VLAN requires its own pair of trunk ports. Using this configuration. called the VLANid. Each dedicated port must be connected to a port that is a member of its VLAN on the next switch. The device must have a NIC that supports 802. port 6. port 6. NOTE The use of 802. you can create multiple VLANs that span multiple switches. This may affect packet error counters in other devices. Using tags. A single port can be a member of only one port-based VLAN.1Q tag defined. Each switch must have a dedicated port for each VLAN. The tag contains the identification number of a specific VLAN. Using tags. This is particularly useful if you have a device (such as a server) that must belong to multiple VLANs. The Summit 200 series switch supports L2 tagged VLANs.Virtual LANs (VLANs) VLAN Accounting spans system 1 and system 2 by way of a connection between system 1.1Q tagging. Assigning a VLAN Tag Each VLAN may be assigned an 802. and may also lead to connectivity problems if non-802. port 26 and system 2. as required. Not all ports in the VLAN must be tagged. All additional VLAN membership for the port must be accompanied by tags. multiple VLANs can span two switches with a single trunk. you decide whether each port will use tagging for that VLAN. The switch-to-switch connections are typically called trunks. In a port-based VLAN.1Q tagging. port 25. As ports are added to a VLAN with an 802. the switch determines (in real time) if each destination port should use tagged or untagged packet formats for that VLAN. slot 1. Uses of Tagged VLANs Tagging is most commonly used to create VLANs that span switches.3/Ethernet maximum of 1. As traffic from a port is forwarded out of the switch. Tagged VLANs Tagging is a process that inserts a marker (called a tag) into the Ethernet frame. by the port configuration for that VLAN. 88 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . NOTE Packets arriving tagged with a VLANid that is not configured on a port will be discarded. Another benefit of tagged VLANs is the ability to have a port be a member of multiple VLANs. multiple VLANs can span multiple switches using one or more trunks. The default mode of the switch is to have all ports assigned to the VLAN named default with an 802.

1Q Tagged server M M 1 M = Marketing S = Sales M 2 S S = Tagged port Marketing & Sales S 3 S 4 System 2 LC24007 Figure 14 is a logical diagram of the same network. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 89 . • The trunk port on each switch is tagged. Port 3 & 4 Slot 7. Figure 14: Logical diagram of tagged and untagged traffic Marketing System 1 Ports 1-8 System 2 Slot 1. Port 2 Slot 7.Types of VLANs Figure 13 illustrates the physical view of a network that uses tagged and untagged traffic. Port 1 * Sales System 1 Ports 17-24 & 26 System 2 Slot 1. Ports 9-16 & 25-32 *Tagged Ports SH_007 In Figure 13 and Figure 14: • The trunk port on each switch carries traffic for both VLAN Marketing and VLAN Sales. Figure 13: Physical diagram of tagged and untagged traffic System 1 M S S 1 2 3 4 A B 5 6 7 8 50015 802. • The server connected to port 16 on system 1 has a NIC that supports 802.1Q tagging. Ports 1-8 & 17-24 System 1 Port 16 * Port 25 * System 2 Slot 1.

or other special character. A given port can be a member of multiple VLANs. • It contains all the ports on a new or initialized switch. NOTE For the purposes of VLAN classification. Mixing Port-Based and Tagged VLANs You can configure the switch using a combination of port-based and tagged VLANs. It has an internal VLANid of 1. the switch determines if the destination port requires the frames to be tagged or untagged. As data passes out of the switch. a port can simultaneously be a member of one port-based VLAN and multiple tag-based VLANs. VLAN names can use standard alphanumeric characters. VLAN names are locally significant. Default VLAN The switch ships with one default VLAN that has the following properties: • The VLAN name is default. That is. • All other stations use untagged traffic. the VLAN names have no significance to the other switch. comma. Traffic coming from and going to the trunk ports is tagged. VLAN names used on one switch are only meaningful to that switch. The following characters are not permitted in a VLAN name: • Space • Comma • Quotation mark VLAN names must begin with an alphabetical letter.1Q tag containing a VLANid of zero are treated as untagged. or that contains a space. If another switch is connected to it. 90 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . VLAN Names Each VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters. Quotation marks can be used to enclose a VLAN name that does not begin with an alphabetical character. packets arriving on a port with an 802. NOTE You should use VLAN names consistently across your entire network. The traffic that comes from and goes to the other stations on this network is not tagged. In other words. All traffic coming from and going to the server is tagged. • The default VLAN is untagged on all ports. with the stipulation that only one of its VLANs uses untagged traffic.Virtual LANs (VLANs) • The server connected to port 16 on system 1 is a member of both VLAN Marketing and VLAN Sales.

and unknown unicast traffic. if any ports in this VLAN will use a tag. Configuring VLANs on the Switch This section describes the commands associated with setting up VLANs on the switch. VLAN Configuration Commands Table 28 describes the commands used to configure a VLAN.Configuring VLANs on the Switch Renaming a VLAN To rename an existing VLAN. config vlan <name> delete port <portlist> {tagged | untagged} {nobroadcast} config vlan <name> ipaddress <ipaddress> {<mask>} config vlan <name> tag <vlanid> Deletes one or more ports from a VLAN. Although the switch accepts a name change. 3 Assign a VLANid. Table 28: VLAN Configuration Commands Command Description config vlan <name> add port <portlist> {tagged Adds one or more ports to a VLAN. By default. once it is rebooted. Assigns an IP address and an optional mask to the VLAN. You can | untagged} {nobroadcast} specify tagged port(s). You cannot configure the same IP subnet on different VLANs. multicast. • You cannot change the VLAN name MacVlanDiscover. untagged port(s).1Q tag. Assigns a numerical VLANid. The valid range is from 2 to 4094 (1 is used by the default VLAN). 2 Assign an IP address and mask (if applicable) to the VLAN. if needed. • You cannot create a new VLAN named default. NOTE Each IP address and mask assigned to a VLAN must represent a unique IP subnet. 4 Assign one or more ports to the VLAN. use the following command: config vlan <old_name> name <new_name> The following rules apply to renaming VLANs: • Once you change the name of the default VLAN. decide if the port will use an 802. As you add each port to the VLAN. Configuring a VLAN involves the following steps: 1 Create and name the VLAN. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 91 . Specify nobroadcast to prevent the switch from forwarding broadcast. the original name is recreated. ports are untagged. it cannot be changed back to default.

Ports 1 through 3 are tagged. Ports 4 through 8 are added as tagged ports to the VLAN. 92 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Resets the IP address of the VLAN. create vlan video config video tag 1000 config video add port 4-8 tagged The following Summit 200 series switch example creates a VLAN named sales. ports are added as untagged. It assigns the VLANid 1000. The VLAN uses both tagged and untagged ports. which includes: • Name • VLANid • How the VLAN was created • IP address • STPD information • QoS profile information • Ports assigned • Tagged/untagged status for each port • How the ports were added to the VLAN • Number of VLANs configured on the switch Use the detail option to display the detailed format. Creates a named VLAN.Virtual LANs (VLANs) Table 28: VLAN Configuration Commands (continued) Command config vlan <old_name> name <new_name> create vlan <name> delete vlan <name> unconfig ports <portlist> monitor vlan <name> unconfig vlan <name> ipaddress Description Renames a previously configured VLAN.7 Displaying VLAN Settings To display VLAN settings. Removes port-based VLAN monitoring. with the VLANid 120. create config config config vlan sales sales tag 120 sales add port 1-3 tagged sales add port 4. VLAN Configuration Examples The following Summit 200 series switch example creates a tag-based VLAN named video. Removes a VLAN. use the following command: show vlan {<name>} {detail} The show command displays summary information about each VLAN. Note that when not explicitly specified. and ports 4 and 7 are untagged.

In each room. regardless of group association. As an example. the following configuration allows MAC 00:00:00:00:00:aa to enter into the VLAN only on ports 10 and 11 because of membership in group 100: * Summit48:50 # show mac Port Vlan 10 MacVlanDiscover 11 MacVlanDiscover 12 MacVlanDiscover 13 MacVlanDiscover 14 MacVlanDiscover Total Entries in Database:2 Mac Vlan 00:00:00:00:00:aa sales 00:00:00:00:00:01 sales 2 matching entries Group 100 100 any any any Group 100 any State Discover Discover Discover Discover Discover • The group “any” is equivalent to the group “0”. This feature allows you to designate a set of ports that have their VLAN membership dynamically determined by the MAC address of the end station that plugs into the physical port. • Partial configurations of the MAC to VLAN database can be downloaded to the switch using the timed download configuration feature. Ports that are configured as “any” allow any MAC address to be assigned to a VLAN. all other endstations lose connectivity. Connecting to a layer-2 repeater device can cause certain addresses to not be mapped to their respective VLAN if they are not correctly configured in the MAC-VLAN configuration database. Upon removal of the configured MAC-to-VLAN endstation. routing. the user plugs into one of the designated ports on the switch and is mapped to the appropriate VLAN. For example. consider the following guidelines: • A port can only accept connections from an endstation/host and should not be connected to a layer-2 repeater device. • Groups are used as a security measure to allow a MAC address to enter into a VLAN only when the group mapping matches the port mapping. you could use this application for a roaming user who wants to connect to a network from a conference room. and the configured MAC-to-VLAN mapped station enters on the repeater. any endstation that is attached to the repeater can be mapped to that VLAN while the configured endstation is active in that VLAN. Connectivity is maintained to the network with all of the benefits of the configured VLAN in terms of QoS. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 93 . and protocol support. MAC-Based VLAN Guidelines When using the MAC-to-VLAN mapping. You can configure the source MAC address-to-VLAN mapping either offline or dynamically on the switch. If a repeater device is connected to a MAC-Based VLAN port.MAC-Based VLANs MAC-Based VLANs MAC-Based VLANs allow physical ports to be mapped to a VLAN based on the source MAC address learned in the FDB.

Virtual LANs (VLANs) MAC-Based VLAN Limitations The following list contains the limitations of MAC-based VLANs: • Ports participating in MAC VLANs must first be removed from any static VLANs. use the following command: download configuration every <hour:minute> To display timed download information. the the VLAN associations are lost during a reboot and you must perform an incremental download of the MAC-to-VLAN database to recover the VLAN associations. and can only be assigned to a VLAN if inserted into ports 16 or 17. The MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:02 has a group number of “any” or “0” associated with it. three VLANs are created: engineering. To configure the primary and/or secondary server and file name. • The MAC-to-VLAN mapping can only be associated with VLANs that exist on the switch. MAC-Based VLAN Example In this following example. the configuration is automatically downloaded immediately after booting. The MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:03 has a group number of 200 associated with it and can only be inserted into ports 18 through 20. • A MAC address cannot be configured to associate with more than 1 VLAN. As a result. The timed downloads are configurable in 24 hour intervals. A single MAC address is associated with each VLAN. marketing. When a switch reboots. a timed TFTP configuration download allows you to download incremental configuration files from a primary or secondary server at specified time intervals. If this is attempted. the MAC address is associated with the most recent VLAN entry in the MAC-to-VLAN database. • The feature is intended to support one client per physical port. It is not stored in NVRAM. allowing it to be plugged into any port that is in MacVlanDiscover mode (ports 10-15 in this case). only. • The MAC-to-VLAN database is stored in memory. use the following command: show switch 94 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . per the configured primary and secondary servers. Once a client MAC address has successfully registered. enable enable enable config config config mac-vlan mac-vlan mac-vlan mac-vlan mac-vlan mac-vlan mac-group any ports 10-15 mac-group 10 ports 16-17 mac-group 200 ports 18-20 add mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:01 mac-group 10 engineering add mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:02 mac-group any marketing add mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:03 mac-group 200 sales Timed Configuration Download for MAC-Based VLANs To allow centralized control of MAC-based VLANs over multiple switches. The MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:01 has a group number of 10 associated with it. and sales. use the following command: config download server [primary | secondary] [<host_name> | <ip_address>] <filename> To enable timed interval downloads. the VLAN association remains until the port connection is dropped or the FDB entry ages out.

the downloaded file is an ASCII file that consists of CLI commands used to configure the most recent MAC-to-VLAN database. The following example shows an incremental configuration file for MAC-based VLAN information that updates the database and saves changes: config config config . . This feature is different from the normal download configuration command in that it allows incremental configuration without the automatic rebooting of the switch. . config config save mac-vlan add mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:01 mac-group any engineering mac-vlan add mac-address 00:00:00:00:ab:02 mac-group any engineering mac-vlan add mac-address 00:00:00:00:cd:04 mac-group any sales mac-vlan add mac-address 00:00:00:00:ab:50 mac-group any sales mac-vlan add mac-address 00:00:00:00:cd:60 mac-group any sales Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 95 .MAC-Based VLANs Example In relation to MAC-based VLANs.

Virtual LANs (VLANs) 96 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

and an identifier for the VLAN to which the device belongs. after a period of time (aging time). • Permanent entries—Permanent entries are retained in the database if the switch is reset or a power off/on cycle occurs. FDB Entry Types The Summit 200 series switch supports up to 8. an identifier for the port on which it was received. its entry is deleted from the database. all entries in the database are dynamic. Frames destined for devices that are not in the FDB are flooded to all members of the VLAN.191 layer 2 FDB entries and 2. • Nonaging entries—If the aging time is set to zero. refer to “Configuring FDB Entries” later in this chapter. Dynamic entries are deleted from the database if the switch is reset or a power off/on cycle occurs. but they are still deleted if the switch is reset. FDB Contents Each FDB entry consists of the MAC address of the device.8 Forwarding Database (FDB) This chapter describes the following topics: • Overview of the FDB on page 97 • Configuring FDB Entries on page 99 • Displaying FDB Entries on page 100 Overview of the FDB The switch maintains a database of all media access control (MAC) addresses received on all of its ports. The system administrator must make entries permanent. all aging entries in the database are defined as static. For more information about setting the aging time. It uses the information in this database to decide whether a frame should be forwarded or filtered.047 layer 3 FDB entries. All entries entered by way of the command-line Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 97 . the device has not transmitted. This means that they do not age. A permanent entry can either be a unicast or multicast MAC address. This prevents the database from becoming full with obsolete entries by ensuring that when a device is removed from the network. The following are four types of entries in the FDB: • Dynamic entries—Initially. nonaging entries. Entries in the database are removed (aged-out) if.

— A VLAN identifier (VLANid) is changed. or the command-line interface (CLI). Blackhole entries are never aged-out of the database. Blackhole entries are treated like permanent entries in the event of a switch reset or power off/on cycle. permanent entries stay the same as when they were created. and so on). • Blackhole entries—A blackhole entry configures the switch to discard packets with a specified MAC destination address. and the port identifier on which the source packet is received. The switch applies the QoS profile as soon as the FDB entry is learned. For example. Blackhole entries are useful as a security measure or in special circumstances where a specific destination address must be discarded. — A port mode is changed (tagged/untagged). refer to Chapter 12. How FDB Entries Get Added Entries are added into the FDB in the following two ways: • The switch can learn entries. — A port is deleted from a VLAN. Associating a QoS Profile with an FDB Entry You can associate a QoS profile with a MAC address (and VLAN) of a device that will be dynamically learned. NOTE For more information on QoS. the VLAN.Forwarding Database (FDB) interface are stored as permanent. Once created. The Summit 200 series switches support a maximum of 64 permanent entries. the permanent entry store is not updated when any of the following take place: — A VLAN is deleted. 98 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . The system updates its FDB with the source MAC address from a packet. • You can enter and update entries using a MIB browser. — A port QoS setting is changed. — A port goes down (link down). The FDB treats the entry like a dynamic entry (it is learned. it can be aged out of the database. — A port enters blocking state. an SNMP Network Manager. — A port is disabled.

the source MAC address of an ingress packet and the destination MAC address of an egress packet are examined for QoS profile assignment. both—The blackhole MAC address matches the ingress source MAC address or the egress destination MAC address.000 seconds. The default value is 300 seconds. Table 29: FDB Configuration Commands Command clear fdb [{<mac_address> | vlan <name> | ports <portlist>}] config fdb agingtime <number> Description Clears dynamic FDB entries that match the filter. • • dest-mac—The blackhole MAC address matches the egress destination MAC address. qosprofile—QoS profile associated with destination MAC address of the egress port. A value of 0 indicates that the entry should never be aged out. delete fdbentry {<mac_address> vlan <name> | all} Deletes one or all permanent FDB entries. Specify: <name> blackhole {source-mac | dest-mac • source-mac—The blackhole MAC address | both} matches the ingress source MAC address. name—VLAN associated with MAC address. using colon separated bytes. packets are multicast to the multiple destinations.Configuring FDB Entries Configuring FDB Entries To configure entries in the FDB. the egress QoS profile defaults to none. the command clears all FDB entries. Assigns a packet with the specified MAC address and VLAN to a specific QoS profile. portlist—Port numbers associated with MAC address. If you only specify the ingress QoS profile. create fdbentry <mac_address> vlan Creates a blackhole FDB entry. use the commands listed in Table 29. and vice-versa. When no options are specified. ingress-qosprofile—QoS profile associated with the source MAC address of the ingress port. If both profiles are specified. create fdbentry <mac_address> vlan <name> dynamic {{qosprofile <qosprofile> {ingress-qosprofile <qosprofile>}} | {ingress-qosprofile <qosprofile> {qosprofile <qosprofile>}} Creates a permanent dynamic FDB entry. Configures the FDB aging time.000. Specify the following: • • • • • mac_address—Device MAC address. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 99 . The range is 15 through 1. Creates a permanent static FDB entry. create fdbentry <mac_address> vlan <name> ports [<portlist> | all] {{qosprofile <qosprofile> {ingress-qosprofile <qosprofile>}} | {ingress-qosprofile <qosprofile> {qosprofile <qosprofile>}} If more than one port number is associated with a permanent MAC entry.

If MAC address learning is disabled. This example associates the QoS profile qp2 with a dynamic entry that will be learned by the FDB: create fdbentry 00:A0:23:12:34:56 vlan net34 dynamic qosprofile qp2 This entry has the following characteristics: • MAC address is 00A023123456. Displays all permanent entries. If you enter this command with no options specified. • The entry will be learned dynamically. • VLAN name is marketing. including the ingress and egress QoS profiles. • Port number for this device is 4. are forwarded. enable learning port <portlist> FDB Configuration Examples The following example adds a permanent entry to the FDB: create fdbentry 00:E0:2B:12:34:56 vlan marketing port 4 The permanent entry has the following characteristics: • MAC address is 00:E0:2B:12:34:56.Forwarding Database (FDB) Table 29: FDB Configuration Commands (continued) Command disable learning port <portlist> Description Disables MAC address learning on one or more ports for security purposes. Enables MAC address learning on one or more ports. Displays the entries for a slot and port combination. EDP traffic. 100 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Displays the entries for a VLAN. and packets destined to a permanent MAC address matching that port number. the command displays all FDB entries. The default setting is enabled. only broadcast traffic. • VLAN name is net34. Displaying FDB Entries To display FDB entries. use the following command: show fdb {<mac_address> | vlan <name> | ports <portlist> | permanent} where: mac_address vlan <name> ports <portlist> permanent Displays the entry for a particular MAC address. • QoS profile qp2 will be applied when the entry is learned.

Incoming packets that match a rate limit access control list are allowed as long as they do not exceed a pre-defined rate.9 Access Policies This chapter describes the following topics: • Overview of Access Policies on page 101 • Using Access Control Lists on page 102 • Using Routing Access Policies on page 114 • Making Changes to a Routing Access Policy on page 118 • Removing a Routing Access Policy on page 118 • Routing Access Policy Commands on page 119 Overview of Access Policies Access policies are a generalized category of features that impact forwarding and route forwarding decisions. Using access lists has no impact on switch performance. Access policies are used primarily for security and quality of service (QoS) purposes. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 101 . Each packet arriving on an ingress port is compared to the access list in sequential order and is either forwarded to a specified QoS profile or dropped. Excess packets are either dropped. or modified by resetting their DiffServ code point. The three categories of access policies are: • Access control lists • Rate limits • Routing access policies Access Control Lists Access control lists are used to perform packet filtering and forwarding decisions on incoming traffic.1p value and/or the DiffServe code point. These forwarded packets can also be modified by changing the 802. Rate Limits Rate limits are almost identical to access control lists.

The following sections describe how to use access control lists. Using Access Control Lists Each access control list consists of an access mask that selects which fields of each incoming packet to examine. Routing access policies can be used to ‘hide’ entire networks. using different lists of values to examine packets. unique precedence number associated with it. An access mask consists of a combination of the following thirteen fields: • Ethernet destination MAC address • Ethernet source MAC address • VLANid • IP Type of Service (TOS) or DiffServ code point • Ethertype • IP protocol • IP destination address and netmask • Layer 4 destination port • IP source address and netmask • Layer 4 source port. 102 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Access Masks There are between twelve and fourteen access masks available in the Summit 200 series switch. such as RIP or OSPF. Access Lists Each entry that makes up an access list contains a unique name and specifies a previously created access mask. and an action to take for packets that match. or ICMP type and/or ICMP code • TCP session initiation bits (permit-established keyword) • Egress port • Ingress ports An access mask can also have an optional. Access masks can be shared multiple access control lists. you must specify a value for each of the fields that make up the access mask used by the list. depending on which features are enabled on the switch. but are sometimes more efficient and easier to implement than access lists. or to trust only specific sources for routes or ranges of routes. Each access mask is created with a unique name and defines a list of fields that will be examined by any access control list that uses that mask (and by any rate limit that uses the mask). The access list also includes a list of values to compare with the incoming packets. The capabilities of routing access policies are specific to the type of routing protocol involved.Access Policies Routing Access Policies Routing access policies are used to control the advertisement or recognition of routing protocols. When you create an access list. and a list of values to compare with the values found in the packet.

You can send the packet to a particular QoS profile. you can configure the rate limit value in the range from 8 Mbps to 1000 Mbps in increments of 8 Mbps. if required for your implementation. “The permit-established Keyword” on page 104). which is to say the rate limit value can be set at 8. you can specify the following action: • Permit—Forward the packet. and arrive at a rate below the limit. a rate limit specifies an action to take when matching packets arrive at a rate above the limit you set. but modify the packet’s DiffServe code point. Additionally. • Permit with rewrite—Forward the packet. Rate Limits Each entry that makes up a rate limit contains a unique name and specifies a previously created access mask. you can configure the rate limit value in the range from 1 Mbps to 100 Mbps in 1 Mbps increments. Matching packets are not forwarded. For packets that match a particular list and arrive at a rate that exceeds the limit. you must specify a value for each of the fields that make up the access mask used by the list. a rate limit can only be applied to a single port. 16. See the release notes for the exact values of the actual rate limits. and modify the packet’s 802. For packets that match a particular list. Each port will have its own rate limit defined separately. You can send the packet to a particular QoS profile. NOTE Unlike an access list. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 103 .1p value and/or DiffServe code point. which is to say. 24. When you create a rate limit.Using Access Control Lists For packets that match a particular access control list.1p value and/or DiffServe code point. • Permit—Forward the packet. and modify the packet’s 802. NOTE The rate limit specified in the command line does not precisely match the actual rate limit imposed by the hardware. a rate limit includes a list of values to compare with the incoming packets and an action to take for packets that match. On a 1000 Mbps port (Gigabit Ethernet uplink port). you can specify the following actions: • Drop—Drop the packets. Excess packets are not forwarded. 3. Like an access list. 32 … 1000 Mbps. you can specify the following actions: • Drop—Drop the packets. • Permit-established—Drop the packet if it would initiate a new TCP session (see. the rate limit value can be set at 1. 2. On a 100 Mbps port (100BASE-TX). due to hardware constraints. 4 … 100 Mbps.

When a match is found.1. the packet is processed. Precedence numbers range from 1 to 25. they will all be carried out. the default rule is used to determine whether the packet is forwarded or dropped. the actions of the access list using the higher precedence access mask are applied. the packet is forwarded. 104 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . The first access mask defined without a specified precedence has the highest precedence. If no other access control list entry is satisfied. the packet is dropped.2. Access control list entries are evaluated from highest precedence to lowest precedence.1.0/24 permit The permit-established Keyword The permit-established keyword is used to directionally control attempts to open a TCP session. You should use an access mask with a low precedence for the default rule access control list.Access Policies How Access Control Lists Work When a packet arrives on an ingress port. A permit access list can also apply a QoS profile to the packet and modify the packet’s 802. Specifying a Default Rule You can specify a default access control list to define the default access to the switch. the fields of the packet corresponding to an access mask are compared with the values specified by the associated access lists to determine a match.x subnet even while the above default rule is in place: create access-mask ip_src_mask source-ip/24 precedence 1000 create access-list TenOneTwo ip_src_mask source-ip 10.1p value and the DiffServe code point. the default behavior is to forward the packet. If no default rule is specified. Session initiation can be explicitly blocked using this keyword. The following example shows an access control list that is used to specify an default rule to explicitly deny all traffic: create access-mask ingress_mask ports precedence 25000 create acess-list DenyAll ingress_mask ports 2-26 deny Once the default behavior of the access control list is established. but an access mask without a precedence specified has a higher precedence than any access mask with a precedence specified. If the resulting actions of all the matches do not conflict. Subsequent masks without a specified precedence have a lower precedence. NOTE If your default rule denies traffic. If the list is of type permit. If the access list is of type deny. It is possible that a packet will match more than one access control list. The following access control list example shows an access control list that will forward traffic from the 10. Access Mask Precedence Numbers The access mask precedence number determines the order in which each rule is examined by the switch and is optional. If there is a conflict. and so on.600.2. you should not apply this rule to the Summit 200 series switch port used as a management port. you can create additional entries using precedence numbers. with the number 1 having the highest precedence.

use the following command: create rate-limit <name> .. Most user entered access list commands will require multiple rules on the hardware. Maximum Entries If you try to create an access mask when no more are available. you must supply a unique name using the create command. the system will use one access mask. the system will issue a warning message. To add an access mask entry. use the following command: create access-list <name> . Access List. use the following command: create access-mask <name> .Using Access Control Lists NOTE For an example of using the permit-established keyword. For example.. and Rate Limit Entries Entries can be added to the access masks. For each of the following features that you enable. For access lists and rate limits. The permit-established keyword denies the access control list. a global rule (an access control list using an access mask without “ports” defined). To add a rate limit entry. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 105 . However. This number is part of the total access control list rules (1014). When the feature is disabled. and has the SYN=1 and ACK=0 flags set. enabling some features causes the system to use additional access masks. Adding Access Mask. To modify an existing entry. To add an entry. or create a new entry with a new unique name. The features are: • RIP • IGMP or OSPF (both would share a single mask) • DiffServ examination • QoS monitor The maximum number of access list allowed by the hardware is 254 for each block of eight 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports and 126 for each Gbps Ethernet port. will require 5 rules.. and rate limits... you must specify an access mask to use. for a total of 1014 rules (254*3+126*2). one for each of the 5 blocks of ports on the hardware. Having a permit-established access control list blocks all traffic that matches the TCP source/destination. reducing the number available.. and supply a number of optional parameters (see Table 30 for the full command syntax). the mask will again be available. The maximum number of rate-limiting rules allowed is 315 (63*5). refer to “Using the Permit-Established Keyword” on page 110. you must delete the entry and retype it. Three access masks are constantly used by the system. access lists. To add an access list entry. leaving a maximum of 13 user-definable access masks.

use the following command: delete access-list <name> To delete a rate limit entry. An access mask entry cannot be deleted until all the access lists and rate limits that reference it are also deleted.Access Policies Deleting Access Mask. and Rate Limit Entries Entries can be deleted from access masks. and rate limits. To view the access list configuration use the following command: show access-list {name | ports <portlist>} To view the rate limit configuration use the following command: show rate-limit {name | ports <portlist>} To view the access mask configuration use the following command: show access-mask {name} Access Control List Commands Table 30 describes the commands used to configure access control lists. NOTE On the Summit 200-48 switch. you can view the access list configuration. Access List. 106 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Port group 1 consists of ports 1 through 24 and port 49. use the following command: delete rate-limit <name> Verifying Access Control List Configurations To verify access control list settings. access lists. ACL ingress and egress ports must belong to the same port group. To delete an access mask entry. use the following command: delete access-mask <name> To delete an access list entry. port group 2 consists of ports 25 through 48 and port 50.

Using Access Control Lists Table 30: Access Control List Configuration Commands Command create access-list <name> access-mask <access-mask name> {dest-mac <dest_mac>} {source-mac <src_mac>} {vlan <name>} {ethertype [IP | ARP | <hex_value>]} {tos <ip_precedence> | code-point <code_point>} {ipprotocol [tcp|udp|icmp|igmp|<protocol_num>]} {dest-ip <dest_IP>/<mask length>} {dest-L4port <dest_port>} {source-ip <src_IP>/<mask length>} {source-L4port <src_port> | {icmp-type <icmp_type>} {icmp-code <icmp_code>}} {egressport <port>} {ports <portlist>} [permit {qosprofile <qosprofile>} {set code-point <code_point>} {set dot1p <dot1p_value>} | permit-established | deny] Description Creates an access list.1p value for matching packets. permit—Specifies the packets that match the access list description are permitted to be forward by this switch. ARP. vlan—Specifies the VLANid. deny—Specifies the packets that match the access list description are filtered (dropped) by the switch. ipprotocol—Specify an IP protocol. A mask length of 32 indicates a host entry. icmp-code—Specify the ICMP code. set—Modify the DiffServ code point and/or the 802. icmp-type—Specify the ICMP type. The access list name can be between 1 and 31 characters. ethertype—Specify IP. or the protocol number dest-ip—Specifies an IP destination address and subnet mask. dest-mac—Specifies the destination MAC address. permit-established—Specifies a uni-directional session establishment is denied. source-L4port—Specify the source port. tos—Specifies the IP precedence value. Any field specified in the access mask must have a corresponding value specified in the access list. An optional QoS profile can be assigned to the access list. or the hex value to match. Options include: • <name>—Specifies the access control list name. access-mask—Specifies the associated access mask. source-ip—Specifies an IP source address and subnet mask. code-point—Specifies the DiffServ code point value. source-mac—Specifies the source MAC address. egressport—Specify the egress port ports—Specifies the ingress port(s) on which this rule is applied. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 107 . The list is applied to all ingress packets. so that the switch can prioritize packets accordingly. dest-L4port—Specify the destination port.

code-point—Specifies the DiffServ code point field. The mask specifies which packet fields to examine. ethertype—Specifies the Ethertype field. precedence—Specifies the access mask precedence number. permit-established—Specifies the TCP SYN/ACK bit fields. You must supply the subnet mask. source-mac—Specifies the source MAC address field. Options include: • <access-mask name>—Specifies the access mask name. The access mask name can be between 1 and 31 characters. You must supply the subnet mask. vlan—Specifies the VLANid field. source-L4port—Specifies the source port field. The range is 1 to 25. source-ip—Specifies the IP source address field and subnet mask. egressport—Specify the egress port ports—Specifies the ingress port(s) on which this rule is applied. icmp-type—Specify the ICMP type field.Access Policies Table 30: Access Control List Configuration Commands (continued) Command create access-mask <access-mask name> {dest-mac} {source-mac} {vlan} {ethertype} {tos | code-point} {ipprotocol} {dest-ip /<mask length>} {dest-L4port} {source-ip /<mask length>} {source-L4port | {icmp-type} {icmp-code}} {permit-established} {egressport} {ports} {precedence <number>} Description Creates an access mask. icmp-code—Specify the ICMP code field. dest-ip—Specifies the IP destination field and subnet mask. dest-L4port—Specifies the destination port field.600. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 108 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . dest-mac—Specifies the destination MAC address field. tos—Specifies the IP precedence field. ipprotocol—Specifies the IP protocol field.

from 1 to 31 characters. ARP. A mask length of 32 indicates a host entry. permit—Specifies the packets that match the access list description are permitted to be forward by this switch. An optional QoS profile can be assigned to the access list. code-point—Specifies the DiffServ code point value. tos—Specifies the IP precedence value. source-L4port—Specify the source port. set—Modify the DiffServ code point or the 802. Any field specified in the access mask must have a corresponding value specified in the rate limit.Using Access Control Lists Table 30: Access Control List Configuration Commands (continued) Command create rate-limit <rule_name> access-mask <access-mask name> {dest-mac <dest_mac>} {source-mac <src_mac>} {vlan <name>} {ethertype [IP | ARP | <hex_value>]} {tos <ip_precedence> | code-point <code_point>} {ipprotocol [tcp|udp|icmp|igmp|<protocol_num>]} {dest-ip <dest_IP>/<mask length>} {dest-L4port <dest_port>} {source-ip <src_IP>/<mask length>} {source-L4port <src_port> | {icmp-type <icmp_type>} {icmp-code <icmp_code>}} {egressport <port>} {port <port number>} permit {qosprofile <qosprofile>} {set code-point <code_point>} {set dot1p <dot1p_value>} limit <rate_in_Mbps> {exceed-action [drop | set code-point <code_point>} Description Creates a rate limit. ethertype—Specify IP. icmp-type—Specify the ICMP type. The rule is applied to all ingress packets. access-mask—Specifies the associated access mask. dest-L4port—Specify the destination port. ipprotocol—Specify an IP protocol. packets. Options include: • • <rule_name>—Specifies the rate limit name. so that the switch can prioritize packets accordingly. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 109 . forwarded.1p value for matching. For 100 Mbps ports. icmp-code—Specify the ICMP code. specify a value from 1 to 100 Mbps in 1 Mbps increments. • exceed-action—Action to take for matching packets that exceed the rate. specify a value from 8 to 1000 Mbps in increments of 8 Mbps. limit—Specifies the rate limit <rate_in_Mbps>—The rate limit. source-mac—Specifies the source MAC address. For 1000 Mbps ports. vlan—Specifies the VLANid. or the protocol number dest-ip—Specifies the IP destination address and subnet mask. or the hex value to match. dest-mac—Specifies the destination MAC address. source-ip—Specifies the IP source address and subnet mask. egressport—Specify the egress port port—Specifies the ingress port to which this rule is applied.

10. and HTTP) to be established in one direction. Displays access-list information. • The workstations are configured using addresses 10. 110 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . NET10 VLAN and NET20 VLAN. Displays access-list information.100. The switch.10.1 10. Displays access-list information.20.100 and 10. • The NET10 VLAN is connected to port 2 and the NET20 VLAN is connected to port 10 • The IP addresses for NET10 VLAN is 10.100 NET10 VLAN 10.10.Access Policies Table 30: Access Control List Configuration Commands (continued) Command delete access-list <name> delete access-mask <name> Description Deletes an access list. • IPForwarding is enabled. Any access lists or rate limits that reference this mask must first be deleted.20. FTP.1 10. Deletes an access mask.10. Figure 15: Permit-established access list example topology 10.100 NET20 VLAN LC24008 The following sections describe the steps used to configure the example. are defined.20.10.10.1/24. shown in Figure 15.10.10.10. Deletes a rate limit.10.10.10. • The IP address for NET20 VLAN is 10. is configured as follows: • Two VLANs. delete rate-limit <name> show access-list {<name> | ports <portlist>} show access-mask {<name>} show rate-limit {<name> | ports <portlist>} Access Control List Examples This section presents three access control list examples: • Using the permit-establish keyword • Filtering ICMP packets • Using a rate limit Using the Permit-Established Keyword This example uses an access list that permits TCP sessions (Telnet.20.1/24.

ICMP data traffic.10.100/32 source-ip 10. create an access-mask that examines the IP protocol field for each packet.20.10.10. Although ICMP is used in conjunction with IP.20. The next set of access list commands permits TCP-based traffic to flow. one that blocks UDP. Figure 16: Access control list denies all TCP and UDP traffic 10. is not affected.100/32 ports 10 permit qp1 Figure 17 illustrates the outcome of this access list.10 deny create access-list denyudp ipproto_mask ipprotocol udp ports 2. such as ping traffic.100 NET20 VLAN TCP UDP ICMP LC24009 Step 2—Allow TCP traffic. it is technically not an IP data packet. an access list must be defined for each direction of the traffic flow.10.20. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 111 .20.10.10 deny Figure 16 illustrates the outcome of the access control list. First.10. The following commands creates the access mask and access lists: create access-mask ipproto_mask ipprotocol ports precedence 25000 create access-list denytcp ipproto_mask ipprotocol tcp ports 2.1 10.1 10. The following commands create the access control list: create access-mask ip_addr_mask ipprotocol dest-ip/32 source-ip/32 ports precedence 20000 create access-list tcp1_2 ip_addr_mask ipprotocol tcp dest-ip 10. Thus.10.10.10. UDP traffic is still blocked.100/32 source-ip 10.10.100/32 ports 2 permit qp1 create access-list tcp2_1 ip_addr_mask ipprotocol tcp dest-ip 10.10.10. Because each session is bi-directional. one that blocks all TCP. Then create two access-lists.100 NET10 VLAN 10.Using Access Control Lists Step 1—Deny IP Traffic.

10. actual data can be passed. SYN/ACK. When a TCP session begins. 112 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Pay attention to the destination and source address. Use the permit-established keyword to allow only host A to be able to establish a TCP session to host B and to prevent any TCP sessions from being initiated by host B. Figure 19 shows the final outcome of this access list. the ingress port that the rule is applied to.10. there is a three-way handshake that includes a sequence of a SYN. Figure 18 shows an illustration of the handshake that occurs when host A initiates a TCP session to host B.100/32 dest-L4port 23 ports 10 permit-established NOTE This step may not be intuitive. Figure 18: Host A initiates a TCP session to host B 10. NOTE This rule has a higher precedence than the rule “tcp2_1” and “tcp1_2”. as illustrated in Figure 18.10.20.100 EW_035 SYN SYN / ACK ACK Host A Host B EW_036 An access list that uses the permit-established keyword filters the SYN packet in one direction.Access Policies Figure 17: Access list allows TCP traffic TCP UDP ICMP 10.10. and the desired affect.10. After this sequence. and ACK packets. The commands for this access control list is as follows: create access-mask tcp_connection_mask ipprotocol dest-ip/32 dest-L4port permit-established ports precedence 1000 create access-list telnet-deny tcp_connection_mask ipprotocol tcp dest-ip 10.100 Step 3 .Permit-Established Access List.

20.10.100 EW_037 Example 2: Filter ICMP Packets This example creates an access list that filters out ping (ICMP echo) packets. Figure 20: ICMP packets are filtered out 10. The commands to create this rate limit is as follows: create access-mask port2_mask source-ip/24 ports precedence 100 create rate-limit port2_limit port2_mask source-ip 10.x subnet to 10 Mbps on ingress port 2.1 10.0/24 port 2 permit qp1 set code-point 7 limit 10 exceed-action drop Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 113 .10.10. Ingress traffic on port 2 below the rate limit is sent to QoS profile qp1 with its DiffServ code point set to 7.10.10.100 NET10 VLAN 10.10.10.10.10.20.10.10.1 10. ICMP echo packets are defined as type 8 code 0.10.100 10.10.100 NET20 VLAN ICMP LC24010 Example 3: Rate-limiting Packets This example creates a rate limit to limit the incoming traffic from the 10. The commands to create this access control list is as follows: create access-mask icmp_mask ipprotocol icmp-type icmp-code create access-list denyping icmp_mask ipprotocol icmp icmp-type 8 icmp-code 0 deny The output for this access list is shown in Figure 20.Using Access Control Lists Figure 19: Permit-established access list filters out SYN packet to destination SYN SYN 10. Ingress traffic on port 2 in excess of the rate limit will be dropped.20.

You must give the access profile a unique name (in the same manner as naming a VLAN. deny. Once a match is found.Access Policies Using Routing Access Policies To use routing access policies. protocol filter. Entries are IP addresses and subnet masks 4 Apply the access profile. or none. The operation is compared with each entry in the list. the operation is either permitted or denied. configure the access profile. 114 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . the operation is implicitly denied. If no match is found. or Spanning Tree Domain). If the operation does not match any entries in the list. using the following command: config access-profile <access_profile> add {<seq_number>} {permit | deny} [ipaddress <ipaddress> <mask> {exact}] The following sections describe the config access-profile add command. as long as it matches any entry in the access profile. use the following command: create access-profile <access_profile> type ipaddress Configuring an Access Profile Mode After the access profile is created. Each entry must have a permit or deny attribute. Creating an Access Profile The first thing to do when using routing access policies is to create an access profile. use the following command: config access-profile <access_profile> mode [permit | deny | none] Adding an Access Profile Entry Next. • Deny—The deny access profile mode denies the operation. • None—Using the none mode. To create an access profile. Three modes are available: • Permit—The permit access profile mode permits the operation. you must configure the access profile mode. as long as it matches any entry in the access profile. you must perform the following steps: 1 Create an access profile. the access profile can contain a combination of permit and deny entries. An access profile has a unique name and contains a list of IP addresses and associated subnet masks. If it does not match all specified entries in the list. To configure the access profile mode. the operation is permitted. depending on the configuration of the matched entry. The access profile mode determines whether the items in the list are to be permitted access or denied access. 3 Add entries to the access profile. 2 Configure the access profile to be of type permit. the operation is denied.

the same logic applies. entries are sequenced in the order they are added.24. If you do not specify the entry type. but a protocol function or VLAN can use only one access profile. A profile can be used by multiple routing protocol functions or VLANs. apply it to one or more routing protocols or VLANs.251. you must specify each entry type as either ‘permit’ or ‘deny’.251. If you are using off-byte boundary subnet masking. For example.0/24). the address 141. This policy can be combined with the trusted neighbor policy to accept selected routes only from a set of trusted neighbors.251. and ignore all addresses within the subnet.24. In other words. 141. Permit and Deny Entries If you have configured the access profile mode to be none. Deleting an Access Profile Entry To delete an access profile entry. the switch can be configured to use an access profile to determine: • Trusted Neighbor—Use an access profile to determine trusted RIP router neighbors for the VLAN on the switch running RIP.128/27 represents any host from subnet 141. use the following command: config access-profile <access_profile> delete <seq_number> Applying Access Profiles Once the access profile is defined. use a mask of /32 (for example. The keyword exact can be used when you wish to match only against the subnet address. then configure the mask to cover only the subnet portion (for example. Routing Access Policies for RIP If you are using the RIP protocol.Using Routing Access Policies Specifying Subnet Masks The subnet mask specified in the access profile command is interpreted as a reverse mask. Sequence Numbering You can specify the sequence number for each access profile entry. it is added as a permit entry. use the following command: config rip vlan [<name> | all] import-filter [<access_profile> | none] Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 115 . To configure a trusted neighbor policy. use the following command: config rip vlan [<name> | all] trusted-gateway [<access_profile> | none] • Import Filter—Use an access profile to determine which RIP routes are accepted as valid routes.28/32). 141. To configure an import filter policy.10. If you do not specify a sequence number.24. If you have configured the access profile mode to be permit or deny. but the configuration is more tricky. If you configure an IP address that is an exact match that is specifically denied or permitted. this forms an access policy. When an access profile is applied to a protocol function (for example.128.251. a reverse mask specifies the part of the address that must match the IP address to which the profile is applied. A reverse mask indicates the bits that are significant in the IP address. Each entry is assigned a value of 5 more than the sequence number of the last entry. If the IP address represents all addresses in a subnet address that you want to deny or permit. the export of RIP routes) or a VLAN. it is not necessary to specify a type for each entry.

The administrator wants to allow all internal access to the VLANs on the switch.0.0. The RIP protocol is used to communicate with other routers on the network.0.0.0.0.0.10 / 24 Backbone (RIP) 10. Figure 21: RIP access policy example Internet 10.0.1 / 24 Engsvrs Sales LC24011 Assuming the backbone VLAN interconnects all the routers in the company (and. Engsvrs and Backbone. a switch is configured with two VLANs.11 / 24 Switch being configured 10. the commands to build the access policy for the switch would be: create config config config access-profile nointernet ipaddress access-profile nointernet mode deny access-profile nointernet add 10. The IP address of the local interface connected to the corporate backbone is 10.2.1 / 24 10.12 / 24 10. but no access to the router that connects to the Internet. using the following command: config rip vlan [<name> | all] export-filter [<access_profile> | none] Examples In the example shown in Figure 21.10/32 rip vlan backbone trusted-gateway nointernet 116 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .0. therefore.1.Access Policies • Export Filter—Use an access profile to determine which RIP routes are advertised into a particular VLAN.1. The remote router that connects to the Internet has a local interface connected to the corporate backbone. the Internet router does not have the best routes for other local subnets).1.10/24.0.

those routes will remain until the associated LSAs in that area time-out. Suppose the network administrator wishes to only allow access to certain internet addresses falling within the range 192. the access policies associated with OSPF are different in nature than those associated with RIP. Access policies for OSPF are intended to extend the existing filtering and security capabilities of OSPF (for example. use the following command: config ospf direct-filter [<access_profile> | none] Example Figure 22 illustrates an OSPF network that is similar to the network used previously in the RIP example. If you are using the OSPF protocol. an access profile can be used to limit the routes that are advertised into OSPF for the switch as a whole. use the following command: config ospf asbr-filter [<access_profile> | none] • Direct Filter—For switches configured to support direct route re-distribution into OSPF.1. an access profile can be applied to an OSPF area that filters a set of OSPF inter-area routes from being sourced from any other areas. • ASBR Filter—For switches configured to support RIP and static route re-distribution into OSPF. use the following command: config ospf area <area_id> interarea-filter [<access_profile> | none] • External Filter—For switches configured to support multiple OSPF areas (an ABR function). an access profile can be applied to an OSPF area that filters a set of OSPF external routes from being advertised into that area.2. the additional access policy commands to build the access policy would be: create config config config access-profile nosales ipaddress access-profile nosales mode deny access-profile nosales add 10. To configure an external filter policy.Using Routing Access Policies In addition. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 117 .2.0/24 rip vlan backbone import-filter nosales This configuration results in the switch having no route back to the VLAN Sales. In this example.1.1.0/24 to the internal backbone. To configure an inter-area filter policy. use the following command: config ospf area <area_id> external-filter [<access_profile> | none] NOTE If any of the external routes specified in the filter have already been advertised. an access profile can be used to limit the routes that are advertised into OSPF for the switch as a whole.1. if the administrator wants to restrict any user belonging to the VLAN Engsvrs from reaching the VLAN Sales (IP address 10. To configure a direct filter policy. As a result. Routing Access Policies for OSPF Because OSPF is a link-state protocol. To configure an ASBR filter policy. link authentication and the use of IP address ranges). the switch can be configured to use an access profile to determine any of the following: • Inter-area Filter—For switches configured to support multiple OSPF areas (an ABR function).0/24). all routes to the Internet will be done through external routes. access to the Internet is accomplished by using the ASBR function on the switch labeled Internet.

0.0. the propagation of the change depends on the protocol and policy involved. All the commands that apply an access profile to form an access policy also have the option of choosing none as the access profile.12 / 24 10.1 10.1.0.1 / 24 Engsvrs area 0.0/24 ospf asbr-filter okinternet Making Changes to a Routing Access Policy You can change the routing access policy by changing the associated access profile. the commands would be as follows: create config config config access-profile okinternet ipaddress access-profile okinternet mode permit access-profile okinternet add 192.2. removes the access policy.0 10.1.11 / 24 10. Removing a Routing Access Policy To remove a routing access policy.0.0. NOTE Changes to profiles applied to OSPF typically require rebooting the switch. and.1 / 24 Sales area 0. or disabling and re-enabling OSPF on the switch.1.0.0.1.Access Policies Figure 22: OSPF access policy example Internet Switch being configured 10. you must remove the access profile from the routing protocol or VLAN.1. However. Propagation of changes applied to RIP access policies depends on the protocol timer to age-out entries.10 / 24 Backbone (OSPF) area 0. 118 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .2 LC24012 To configure the switch labeled Internet.0. Using the none option removes any access profile of that particular type from the protocol or VLAN.0.0.0.0. therefore.

Table 31: Routing Access Policy Configuration Commands Command config access-profile <access_profile> add {<seq_number>} {permit | deny} [ipaddress <ipaddress> <mask> {exact}] Description Adds an entry to the access profile. subnets within the address range do not match entry against entry. This router must be an ABR. the new entry is added to the end of the access-profile and is automatically assigned a value of 5 more than the sequence number of the last entry. Each entry must be added to the profile as either type permit or deny. If no sequence number is specified. deny—Denies the addresses that match the access profile description. then a exact match with address and mask is performed.Routing Access Policy Commands Routing Access Policy Commands Table 31 describes the commands used to configure routing access policies. The default setting is permit. {permit | deny}—Per-entry permit or deny specification. • • config access-profile <access_profile> delete Deletes an access profile entry using the <seq_number> sequence number. config access-profile <access_profile> mode [permit | deny | none] Configures the access profile to be one of the following: • • • permit—Allows the addresses that match the access profile description. the overall access profile type takes precedence. The explicit sequence number. Specify one of the following: • <seq-number>—The order of the entry within the access profile. Otherwise. none—Permits and denies access on a per-entry basis. <ipaddress> <mask>—An IP address and mask. config ospf area <area_id> external-filter [<access_profile> | none] Configures the router to use the access policy to determine which external routes are allowed to be exported into the area. The per-entry attribute only takes effect if the access-profile mode is none. and permit or deny attribute should be specified if the access profile mode is none. This router must be an ABR. Configures the router to use the access policy to limit the routes that are advertised into OSPF for the switch as a whole for switches configured to support RIP and static route re-distribution into OSPF. If the attribute “exact” is specified for an entry. config ospf area <area_id> interarea-filter [<access_profile> | none] config ospf asbr-filter [<access_profile> | none] Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 119 . Configures the router to use the access policy to determine which inter-area routes are allowed to be exported into the area.

120 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Specify the following: • delete access-profile <access_profile> show access-profile <access_profile> ipaddress—A list of IP address and mask pairs. Deletes an access profile. Displays access-profile related information for the switch. Configures RIP to suppress certain routes when performing route advertisements. and the profile can be used to control a specific routing protocol. one or more addresses can be added to it. Configures RIP to ignore certain routes received from its neighbor. config rip vlan [<name> | all ] export-filter [<access-profile> | none] config rip vlan [<name> | all] import-filter [<access_profile> | none] config rip vlan [<name> | all] trusted-gateway Configures RIP to use the access list to [<access_profile> | none] determine which RIP neighbor to receive (or reject) the routes. Once the access profile is created. create access-profile <access_profile> type [ipaddress] Creates an access profile.Access Policies Table 31: Routing Access Policy Configuration Commands (continued) Command config ospf direct-filter [<access_profile> | none] Description Configures the router to use the access policy to limit the routes that are advertised into OSPF for the switch as a whole for switches configured to support direct route re-distribution into OSPF.

typically public Internet IP addresses. Figure 23: NAT Overview Inside NAT switch Outside Private Network Outgoing Outgoing Internet Incoming Incoming EW_078 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 121 . to be converted to another set of IP addresses. This conversion is done transparently by having a NAT device rewrite the source IP address and Layer 4 port of the packets. typically private IP addresses.10 Network Address Translation (NAT) This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview on page 121 • Internet IP Addressing on page 122 • Configuring VLANs for NAT on page 122 • Configuring NAT on page 124 • Configuring NAT Rules on page 124 • Creating NAT Rules on page 125 • Displaying NAT Settings on page 127 • Disabling NAT on page 128 Overview NAT is a feature that allows one set of IP addresses.

NAT rules are associated with a single outside VLAN. Using IP addresses within these ranges prevents addressing conflicts with public Internet sites to which you want to connect.Network Address Translation (NAT) You can configure NAT to conserve IP address space by mapping a large number of inside (private) addresses to a much smaller number of outside (public) addresses. you must configure at least two separate VLANs involved. To configure a VLAN as an inside or outside VLAN. traffic from that VLAN destined for an outside VLAN is translated only if it has a matching NAT rule.0/16—Reserved Class C private address space Configuring VLANs for NAT You must configure each VLAN participating in NAT as either an inside or outside VLAN. NOTE The NAT modes in ExtremeWare support translating traffic initiating only from inside addresses. in combination with the IP addresses. form a unique identifier which allows hosts (as well as the NAT switch) to distinguish between separate conversations. assuming that you have created proper rules. it cannot run at line-rate.0.16. use the following command: config nat vlan <name> [inside | outside | none] When a VLAN is configured to be inside. These Layer 4 ports. Any number of inside VLANs can use a single outside VLAN.0/8—Reserved Class A private address space 172. and corresponds to the private IP addresses you would like to translate into other IP addresses.0. which corresponds to the public (probably Internet) IP addresses you want the inside addresses translated to. 122 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . The rules take effect in the order they are displayed using the show command. The mappings between inside and outside IP addresses are done via rules that specify the IP subnets involved and the algorithms used to translate the addresses.168.0/12—Reserved Class B private address space 192. Similarly. Internet IP Addressing When implementing NAT in an Internet environment. Any unmatched traffic will be routed normally and not be translated. it is strongly recommended that you use one of the reserved private IP address ranges for your inside IP addresses. One VLAN is configured as inside. The NAT switch maintains a connection table to map the return packets on the outside VLAN back into their corresponding inside sessions. In implementing NAT.0. Both TCP and UDP have Layer 4 port numbers ranging from 1 to 65535. assuming that the rules and routing are set up properly. NAT operates by replacing the inside IP packet’s source IP and Layer 4 port with an outside IP and Layer 4 port. The ranges are as follows: • • • 10.0. Because all traffic destined for an outside VLAN runs through the central processing unit (CPU). a single inside VLAN can use any number of different outside VLANs. The other type of VLAN is configured as outside. Multiple rules per outside VLAN are allowed. These ranges have been reserved specifically for networks not directly attached to the Internet.

Configuring VLANs for NAT When a VLAN is configured to be outside. one for each Layer 4 port range. Some systems reserve certain port ranges for specific types of traffic. so it is possible to map specific source Layer 4 port ranges on the inside to specific outside source ranges. The outside IP addresses are allocated on a first-come. Because this mode does not rely on Layer 4 ports. You must add a dynamic NAT rule for the same IP address range to allow for ICMP traffic. ICMP traffic is not translated in this mode. only the IP address is rewritten. this may cause a small performance penalty. In this case. When a VLAN is configured to be none. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 123 . each inside IP address uses a single outside IP address. Because this mode does not rely on Layer 4 ports. When the last session for a specific inside IP address closes. The limitation is based on the ratio of inside to outside IP addresses. Because the routed traffic runs through the CPU. ICMP traffic is translated and allowed to pass. But it is useful when you have a small number of hosts that need to have their IP addresses rewritten without conflicting with other hosts. The Layer 4 ports are not changed. Auto-constraining The auto-constraining algorithm for port-mapping limits the number of outside Layer 4 ports a single inside host can use simultaneously. all NAT functions are disabled and the VLAN operates normally. This guarantees that no single inside host can prevent other traffic from flowing through the NAT device. As each new connection is initiated from the inside. the NAT device uses ports off of the next outside IP address. • • • • Static mapping Dynamic mapping Port-mapping Auto-constraining Static Mapping When static mapping is used. you would need to make several rules using the same inside and outside IP addresses. The outside IP address and Layer 4 port space is evenly distributed to all possible inside hosts. Dynamic Mapping Dynamic mapping is similar to static mapping in that the Layer 4 ports are not rewritten during translation. first-serve basis to the inside IP addresses. Port-mapping Port-mapping gives you the most efficient use of the external address space. ICMP traffic is translated and allowed to pass. When all ports on a given IP address are in use. it does not make efficient use of the external address space. Dynamic mapping is different in that the number of inside hosts can be greater than the number of outside hosts. it routes all traffic destined for inside VLANs. NAT Modes There are four different modes used to determine how the outside IP addresses and Layer 4 ports are assigned. the NAT device picks the next available source Layer 4 port on the first available outside IP address. However. it cannot run at line-rate. Because this mode requires a 1-to-1 mapping of internal to external addresses. that outside IP address can be used by other hosts.

make sure that the outside IP addresses specified in the rule are part of the outside VLAN’s subnet range. The default setting for min is 1024. For most configurations. The options specified on the NAT rule determine the algorithm used to translate the inside IP addresses to the outside IP addresses.Network Address Translation (NAT) Because of the large number of simultaneous requests that can be made from a web browser. the first rule to match is processed. You must add a dynamic NAT rule for the same IP address range to allow for ICMP traffic.<number>}]} {destination <ipaddress>/<mask> {l4-port [any | <number> {. Use portmap to specify port translations and specify either TCP or UDP port translation.<ipaddress>] {[tcp | udp | both] [portmap {<min> . To enable NAT functionality. config nat delete vlan <outside_vlan> map source Deletes a NAT translation rule. use the following command: enable nat Configuring NAT Rules To configure NAT rules. use the commands listed in Table 32.<number>}]}} to <ipaddress> [/<mask> | <netmask> | . All rules are processed in order.<max>} | auto-constrain]} 124 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . All return packets must arrive on the same outside VLAN on which the session went out. The first IP address specifies private side IP addresses and the second IP address specifies the public side IP address. The range of number is 1 to 65535.<ipaddress>] {[tcp | udp | both] [portmap {<min> . or both. ICMP traffic is not translated in this mode. it is not recommended that this mode be used when a large number of inside hosts are being translated to a small number of outside IP addresses. so that the switch can proxy the address resolution protocol (ARP) for those addresses.<max>} | auto-constrain]} Description Adds a NAT translation rule that translates private IP addresses to public IP addresses on the outside VLAN. You must attach each rule to a specific VLAN. For outgoing (inside to outside) packets. Configuring NAT The behavior of NAT is determined by the rules you create to translate the IP addresses.<number>}]} {destination <ipaddress>/<mask> {l4-port [any | <number> {. [any | <ipaddress> [/<bits>| <netmask>]] {l4-port [any | <number> {. The default setting for max is 65535.<number>}]}} to <ipaddress> [/<mask> | <netmask> | . All following rules are ignored. Table 32: NAT Configuration Commands Command config nat add vlan <outside_vlan> map source [any | <ipaddress> [/<bits>| <netmask>]] {l4-port [any | <number> {.

52. use this command: config nat [add | delete] vlan <outside_vlan> map source [any | <ipaddress> [/<bits> | <netmask>]] to <ipaddress> [/<mask> | <netmask> | . the switch will use static NAT translation.8. Optionally. so a dynamic NAT rule must be specified after the portmap rule in order to allow ICMP packets through without interfering with the portmapping.8. If the netmask for both the source and NAT addresses is /32.8.2.168. For the outside IP addresses.31 Creating Portmap NAT Rules To configure portmap NAT rules.52.12/32 to 216.8. For information on how to use some of the more advanced rule matching features.52. which get translated to the outside IP address using the specified mode (static in this case).168. and auto-constrain). use this command: config nat [add | delete] vlan <outside_vlan> map source [any | <ipaddress> [/<bits> | <netmask>]] to <ip> [/<mask> | <netmask> | .168. You specify the outside vlan name.52. you can either specify an IP address and netmask or a starting and ending IP range to determine the IP addresses the switch will translate the inside IP addresses to. Remember that portmap mode will only translate TCP and/or UDP.32/32 Dynamic NAT Rule Example config nat add out_vlan_1 map source 192. you may specify the range of L4 ports the switch chooses on the translated IP addresses.<ipaddress>] {[tcp |udp | both] portmap {<min> . but there is a performance penalty for doing this.8.1.52.1.0/24 to 216. Static NAT Rule Example config nat add out_vlan_1 map source 192. dynamic.216.128/25 to 216. the switch will use dynamic NAT translation. portmap.<ipaddress>] This is the simplest NAT rule. In the examples in this section.64/28 tcp portmap 1024 . Portmap NAT Rule Example config nat add out_vlan_2 map source 192. advanced port and destination matching options have been removed.2.Creating NAT Rules Creating NAT Rules This section describes how to configure the various types of NAT (static. Creating Static and Dynamic NAT Rules To create static or dynamic NAT rules.8192 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 125 .<max>}} The addition of an L4 protocol name and the portmap keyword tells the switch to use portmap mode. refer to “Advanced Rule Matching” on page 126.0/25 to 216. and a subnet of inside IP addresses.168.32 /28 both portmap Portmap Min-Max Example config nat add out_vlan_2 map source 192. If the netmask for both the source and NAT addresses are not both /32.1 .

Most installations should use portmap mode.<ipaddress>] {[tcp | udp | both] auto-constrain} This rule uses auto-constrain NAT. use the following command: config nat [add | delete] vlan <outside_vlan> map source [any | <ipaddress> [/<bits> | <netmask>]] to <ip> [/<mask> | <netmask> | . If you use the L4-port command after the destination IP/mask. Using the L4-port and destination keywords. Both options may be used together to further limit the rule. the rule will match only if the port(s) specified are the destination L4-ports. 126 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . you can further limit the scope of the NAT rule so that it only applied to specific TCP/UDP Layer 4 port numbers. no other rules are processed.<ipaddress>] The addition of the destination optional keyword after the source IP address and mask allows the NAT rule to be applied to only packets with a specific destination IP address. or specific outside destination IP addresses. If you use the L4-port command after the source IP/mask.Network Address Translation (NAT) Creating Auto-Constrain NAT Rules To create auto-constrain NAT rules. Destination Specific NAT config nat [add | delete] vlan <outside_vlan> map source [any | <ipaddress> [/<bits> | <netmask>]] {destination <ipaddress/mask>} to <ipaddress> [/<mask> | <netmask> | . L4-Port Specific NAT The addition of the L4-port optional keyword after the source IP address and mask allows the NAT rule to be applied only to packets with a specific L4 source or destination port.3. NOTE Once a single rule is matched. Auto-Constrain Example config nat add out_vlan_3 map source 192.0/24 to 216. NAT rules only match connections based on the source IP address of the outgoing packets.8.64/32 both auto-constrain Advanced Rule Matching By default.52. Remember that each inside IP address will be restricted in the number of simultaneous connections. the rule will match only if the port(s) specified are the source L4-ports.168.

Depending on the type of traffic or the current TCP state. Table 33 describes the commands used to configure timeout periods. The default setting is 600 seconds. To display NAT traffic statistics. The default setting is 3 seconds. Configures the timeout for an entry with an unacknowledged TCP SYN state. a session table entry is created. Configures the timeout for a fully setup TCP SYN session. Configures the timeout for an UDP session. Configures the timeout for an ICMP packet. Rules are displayed in the order they are processed. The default setting is 120 seconds. Displays NAT timeout settings. the table entries timeout after the configured timeout expires. The default setting is 60 seconds. including source IP/Layer 4 port mappings from inside to outside.UDP or ICMP. The default setting is 120 seconds. use the following command: show nat connections This command displays the current NAT connection table.Displaying NAT Settings Configuring Timeouts When an inside host initiates a session. and includes: • The number of rules • The number of current connections • The number of translated packets on the inside and outside VLANs • Information on missed translations To display NAT connection information. Table 33: NAT Timeout Commands Command config nat finrst-timeout <seconds> Description Configures the timeout for a TCP session that has been torn down or reset. The default setting is 60 seconds. use the following command: show nat rules {vlan <outside_vlan>} This command displays the NAT rules for a specific VLAN. use the following command: show nat stats This command displays statistics for the NAT traffic. Configures the timeout for any IP packet that is not TCP. starting with the first one. config nat icmp-timeout <seconds> config nat syn-timeout <seconds> config nat tcp-timeout <seconds> config nat udp-timeout <seconds> config nat timeout <seconds> show nat timeout Displaying NAT Settings To display NAT rules. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 127 .

use the following command: disable nat 128 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .Network Address Translation (NAT) Disabling NAT To disable NAT.

Figure 24: Gigabit Ethernet fiber EAPS MAN ring Transit node Transit node Gigabit Ethernet Fiber EAPS MAN ring Transit node Transit node Master node EW_070 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 129 . such as a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) or large campuses (see Figure 24). and includes information on the following topics: • Overview of the EAPS Protocol on page 129 • Summit 200 Series Switches in Multi-ring Topologies on page 133 • Commands for Configuring and Monitoring EAPS on page 134 Overview of the EAPS Protocol The EAPS protocol provides fast protection switching to Layer 2 switches interconnected in an Ethernet ring topology.11 Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching This chapter describes the use of the Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching (EAPS™) protocol.

NOTE In order to use EAPS. EAPS operates by declaring an EAPS domain on a single ring. the master node logically blocks all data traffic in the transmit and receive directions on the secondary port to prevent a loop. One port of the master node is designated the master node’s primary port (P) to the ring. another port is designated as the master node’s secondary port (S) to the ring. NOTE Like the master node. refer to Chapter 6. like STP. 130 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching EAPS protection switching is similar to what can be achieved with the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Any VLAN that warrants fault protection is configured on all ring ports in the ring. For more information on EDP. Figure 25: EAPS operation S4 S3 S5 S2 P S1 Direction of health-check message S6 S Secondary port is logically blocked Master node EW_071 If the ring is complete. is designated the master node (see Figure 25). On that ring domain. thereby avoiding a loop in the ring. while all other nodes are designated as transit nodes. one switch. but offers the advantage of converging in less than a second when a link in the ring breaks. In normal operation. you must enable EDP on the switch. or node. Layer 2 switching and learning mechanisms operate per existing standards on this ring. If the master node detects a break in the ring. but the primary/secondary port distinction is ignored as long as the node is configured as a transit node. each transit node is also configured with a primary port and a secondary port on the ring. the master node blocks the secondary port for all non-control traffic belonging to this EAPS domain. and is then assigned to an EAPS domain. it unblocks its secondary port and allows data traffic to be transmitted and received through it.

If the master node does not receive the health-check packet before the fail-period timer expires.Overview of the EAPS Protocol Fault Detection and Recovery EAPS fault detection on a ring is based on a single control VLAN per EAPS domain. As long as the ring is complete. Messages sent on the control VLAN must be allowed into the switch for the master node to determine whether the ring is complete. NOTE The control VLAN is not blocked. If the ring is complete. it declares a “failed” state and opens its logically blocked secondary port on all the protected VLANs. Figure 26: EAPS fault detection and protection switching Break in ring S4 S4 sends "link down" message to master node S3 S3 sends "link down" message to master node S5 S2 P S1 S S6 Master node opens secondary port to allow traffic to pass Master node EW_072 A master node detects a ring fault in either of two ways: • Polling response • Trap message sent by a transit node Polling The master node transmits a health-check packet on the control VLAN at a user-configurable interval (see Figure 25). the protected VLANs carry the actual data traffic. The control VLAN is used only to send and receive EAPS messages. Now. the EAPS master node blocks the protected VLANs from accessing its secondary port. traffic can flow through the master’s secondary port. it resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation. This EAPS domain provides protection to one or more data-carrying VLANs called protected VLANs. When the master node receives the health-check packet. the master node will receive the health-check packet on its secondary port (the control VLAN is not blocked on the secondary port). The master node also flushes its forwarding Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 131 .

and sends a “flush FDB” message to its associated transit nodes. When the master node receives the “link down” message (see Figure 26). it unblocks its secondary port for access by the protected VLANs. and will once again declare the ring to be complete. When the broken link is restored. they perform these steps: 1 Flush their forwarding databases on the protected VLANs. When the master node receives its health-check packet back on its secondary port. To prevent the possibility of a such a temporary loop. the fail-period timer of the master node will continue to expire and the master node will remain in the failed state. and send a “flush FDB” message to its associated transit nodes. flush its FDB. it will perform these steps: 1 For the port that just came up. flushes its FDB. when the transit node detects that its failed link is up again. and detects that the ring is once again complete. 132 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . the master will receive its health-check packet back on its secondary port. Trap Message Sent by a Transit Node When any transit node detects a loss of link connectivity on any of its ring ports. 2 If the port state is set to Preforwarding. Restoration Operations The master node continues sending health-check packets out its primary port even when the master node is operating in the failed state. it sends a message to all its associated transit nodes to flush their forwarding databases. As long as there is a break in the ring. it immediately declares a “failed” state and performs the same steps described above. During the time between when the transit node detects that the link is operable again and when the master node detects that the ring is complete. 2 Remember which port has been temporarily blocked. 3 Set the state to Preforwarding.Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching database (FDB) and sends a message on the control VLAN to all of its associated transit nodes to flush their forwarding databases as well. so that all of the switches can learn the new paths to Layer 2 end stations on the reconfigured ring topology. It will logically block the protected VLANs on its secondary port. the secondary port on the master node is still open and data could start traversing the transit node port that just came up. When the transit nodes receive the message to flush their forwarding databases. unblock all the previously blocked protected VLANs for the port. it immediately sends a “link down” message on the control VLAN using its good link to the master node. put all the protected VLANs traversing that port into a temporary blocked state.

Summit 200 Series Switches in Multi-ring Topologies

Summit 200 Series Switches in Multi-ring Topologies
Figure 27 shows how a data VLAN could span two rings having two interconnecting switches in common. Figure 27: EAPS data VLAN spanning two rings.
S5 S4 S3
(STP root) 4 1 2 5 3

S6 S7

LHS ring
1 2 3 5

RHS ring

S2 P S1 Master node S

S8 S S9 Master node
LC24015

4

P

S 10

In this example, there is one EAPS domain with its own control VLAN running on the ring labeled LHS and another EAPS domain with its own control VLAN running on the ring labeled RHS. A data VLAN that spans both rings acts as a protected VLAN to both EAPS domains. Switches S 5 and S 10 will have two instances of EAPS domains running on them: one for each ring. Summit 200 series switches can be deployed in a multi-ring EAPS topology subject to these guidelines: • Summit 200 series switches can be used as any of the EAPS nodes in the ring except as a node that interconnects the two rings. For example, in the example shown in Figure 27, nodes S 5 and S 10 cannot be Summit 200 series switches. Summit 200 series switches support EAPS Version 1 (EAPSv1) and only support a single EAPS domain per switch. • Depending on the network topology and the versions of EAPS (EAPSv1 vs. EAPSv2) running on the other EAPS nodes, there might be a requirement to configure STP support for EAPSv1 to prevent super loops—in the event of a break in the common link between the nodes interconnecting the rings. For example, in the example shown in Figure 27, a break in the link between nodes S 5 and S 10 would result in a super loop. — Case 1: Summit 200 series switches on a single ring. In this case, EAPSv1 requires no STP support. — Case 2: Summit 200 series switches on a multi-ring network along with ring-connecting switches not running EAPSv2. In this case, the Summit 200 series switches still cannot be ring-connecting nodes, and this implementation requires configuring EAPSv1 plus STP support to prevent super loops. This configuration process is described in the EAPS chapter of the ExtremeWare Software User Guide, Version 7.0.0. — Case 3: Summit 200 series switches on a multi-ring network along with ring-connecting switches running EAPSv2. In this case, the Summit 200 series switches still cannot be ring-connecting nodes, but configuring EAPSv1 plus EAPSv2 means that the “EAPS awareness” of the ring-connecting switches would prevent problems with super-loops without requiring STP support. This configuration process is described in the EAPS chapter of the ExtremeWare Software User Guide, Version 7.1.0.

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

133

Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching

Commands for Configuring and Monitoring EAPS
Table 34 lists the ExtremeWare EAPS commands. Each command is described in detail in the sections that follow. Table 34: EAPS Commands
Command config eaps <name> mode [master | transit] Description Configures the switch as either the EAPS master node or as an EAPS transit node for the specified domain. Configures the values of the polling timers the master node uses for the EAPS health-check packet that is circulated around the ring for the specified EAPS domain. Configures a node port as the primary or secondary port for the specified EAPS domain. Adds the specified control VLAN to the specified EAPS domain, or deletes the specified control VLAN from the specified EAPS domain. Adds the specified protected VLAN to the specified EAPS domain, or deletes the specified protected VLAN from the specified EAPS domain. Creates an EAPS domain with the specified name. Only a singe domain is supported on this platform. Deletes the specified EAPS domain. Disables the EAPS function for an entire switch. Disables the EAPS domain with the specified name. Enables the EAPS function for an entire switch. Enables the EAPS domain with the specified name. Displays EAPS status information. Use the optional domain name parameter to display status information for a specific EAPS domain. Sets the specified port’s internal configuration state to INVALID, causing the port to appear in the state Idle with a port status of Unknown when you use the show eaps {<name>} detail command to display port status information.

config eaps <name> [hellotime <seconds> | failtime <seconds>]

config eaps <name> [primary | secondary] port <port number> config eaps <name> [add | delete] control vlan <name> config eaps <name> [add | delete] protect vlan <name>

config eaps <old_name> name <new_name> Renames an existing EAPS domain. create eaps <name>

delete eaps <name> disable eaps disable eaps <name> enable eaps enable eaps <name> show eaps {<name>} [detail]

unconfig eaps <name> [primary | secondary] port

134

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

Commands for Configuring and Monitoring EAPS

Creating and Deleting an EAPS Domain
Each EAPS domain is identified by a unique domain name. NOTE Only a single EAPS domain per switch is supported by Summit 200 series switches. To create an EAPS domain, use the following command:
create eaps <name>

The name parameter is a character string of up to 32 characters that identifies the EAPS domain to be created. EAPS domain names and VLAN names must be unique; Do not use the same name string to identify both an EAPS domain and a VLAN.The following command example creates EAPS domain eaps_1 on the switch:
create eaps eaps_1

To delete an EAPS domain, use the following command:
delete eaps <name>

The following command example deletes the EAPS domain eaps_1:
delete eaps eaps_1

Defining the EAPS Mode of the Switch
To configure the EAPS node type of the switch, use the following command:
config eaps <name> mode [master | transit]

One node on the ring must be configured as the master node for the specified domain; all other nodes on the ring are configured as transit nodes for the same domain. The following command example identifies this switch as the master node for the domain named eaps_1.
config eaps eaps_1 mode master

The following command example identifies this switch as a transit node for the domain named eaps_1.
config eaps eaps_1 mode transit

Configuring EAPS Polling Timers
To set the values of the polling timers the master node uses for the EAPS health-check packet that is circulated around the ring for an EAPS domain, use the following command:
config eaps <name> [hellotime <seconds> | failtime <seconds>]

NOTE This command applies only to the master node. If you configure the polling timers for a transit node, they will be ignored. If you later reconfigure that transit node as the master node, the polling timer values will be used as the current values.

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

135

Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching

Use the hellotime keyword and its associated seconds parameter to specify the amount of time the master node waits between transmissions of health-check packets on the control VLAN. seconds must be greater than 0 when you are configuring a master node. The default value is one second.

NOTE Increasing the hellotime value keeps the processor from sending and processing too many health-check packets. Increasing the hellotime value should not affect the network convergence time, because transit nodes are already sending “link down” notifications. Use the failtime keyword and its associated seconds parameter to specify the amount of time the master node waits before declaring a failed state and opens the logically blocked VLANs on the secondary port. seconds must be greater than the configured value for hellotime. The default value is three seconds.

NOTE Increasing the failtime value provides more protection against frequent “flapping” between the complete state and the failed state by waiting long enough to receive a health-check packet when the network is congested.

NOTE When the master node declares a failed state, it also flushes its forwarding database (FDB) and sends a “flush FDB” message to all the transit switches on the ring by way of the control VLAN. The reason for flushing the FDB is so that the switches can relearn the new directions to reach Layer 2 end stations via the reconfigured topology. The following command examples configure the hellotime value for the EAPS domain “eaps_1” to 2 seconds and the failtime value to 10 seconds.
config eaps eaps_1 hellotime 2 config eaps eaps_1 failtime 10

Configuring the Primary and Secondary Ports
Each node on the ring connects to the ring through two ring ports. As part of the protection switching scheme, one port must be configured as the primary port; the other must be configured as the secondary port. If the ring is complete, the master node prevents a loop by logically blocking all data traffic in the transmit and receive directions on its secondary port. If the master node subsequently detects a break in the ring, it unblocks its secondary port and allows data traffic to be transmitted and received through it. To configure a node port as primary or secondary, use the following command:
config eaps <name> [primary | secondary] port <port number>

The following command example adds port 2 of the switch to the EAPS domain “eaps_1” as the primary port.
config eaps eaps_1 primary port 2

136

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

Commands for Configuring and Monitoring EAPS

Configuring the EAPS Control VLAN
You must configure one control VLAN for each EAPS domain. The control VLAN is used only to send and receive EAPS messages. NOTE A control VLAN cannot belong to more than one EAPS domain. To configure the EAPS control VLAN for the domain, use the following command:
config eaps <name> add control vlan <name>

NOTE To avoid loops in the network, the control VLAN must NOT be configured with an IP address, and ONLY ring ports may be added to the VLAN.

NOTE When you configure the VLAN that will act as the control VLAN, that VLAN must be assigned a QoS profile of Qp8, and the ring ports of the control VLAN must be tagged. By assigning the control VLAN a QoS profile of Qp8, you ensure that EAPS control VLAN traffic is serviced before any other traffic and that control VLAN messages reach their intended destinations. For example, if the control VLAN is not assigned the highest priority and a broadcast storm occurs in the network, the control VLAN messages might be dropped at intermediate points. Assigning the control VLAN the highest priority prevents dropped control VLAN messages.

NOTE Because the QoS profiles Qp7 and Qp8 share the same hardware queue in the Summit 200 series switch, you must limit the amount of traffic that uses these profiles; otherwise, the Summit 200 series switch may drop EAPS control packets, preventing EAPS from operating reliably. The following command example adds the control VLAN “keys” to the EAPS domain “eaps_1.”
config eaps eaps_1 add control vlan keys

Configuring the EAPS Protected VLANs
You must configure one or more protected VLANs for each EAPS domain. The protected VLANs are the data-carrying VLANs. NOTE When you configure the VLAN that will act as a protected VLAN, the ring ports of the protected VLAN must be tagged (except in the case of the default VLAN).

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

137

138 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . To unconfigure an EAPS primary or secondary ring port for an EAPS domain. the command displays a summary of status information for all configured EAPS domains. You can use the detail keyword to display more detailed status information. use the following command: show eaps {<name>} [detail] If you enter the show eaps command without an argument or keyword. The following command example adds the protected VLAN “orchid” to the EAPS domain “eaps_1. use the following command: disable eaps Unconfiguring an EAPS Ring Port Unconfiguring an EAPS port sets its internal configuration state to INVALID. use the following command: enable eaps <name> To disable a specific EAPS domain. which causes the port to appear in the Idle state with a port status of Unknown when you use the show eaps {<name>} detail command to display the status information about the port. use the following command: config eaps <name> add protect vlan <name> NOTE As long as the ring is complete. use the following command: disable eaps <name> Enabling and Disabling EAPS To enable the EAPS function for the entire switch.Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching To configure an EAPS protected VLAN. the master node blocks the protected VLANs on its secondary port.” config eaps eaps_1 add protect vlan orchid Enabling and Disabling an EAPS Domain To enable a specific EAPS domain. use the following command: unconfig eaps <name> [primary | secondary] port The following command example unconfigures this node’s EAPS primary ring port on the domain eaps_1: unconfig eaps eaps_1 primary port Displaying EAPS Status Information To display EAPS status information. use the following command: enable eaps To disable the EAPS function for the entire switch.

The display for a transit node contains information fields that are not shown for a master node. * Summit200-24:39 # show eaps detail EAPS Enabled: Yes Number of EAPS instances: 1 EAPSD-Bridge links: 2 Name: "eaps1" (instance=0) State: Links-Up [Running: Yes] Enabled: Yes Mode: Transit Primary port: 13 Port status: Up Tag status: Tagged Secondary port: 14 Port status: Up Tag status: Tagged Hello Timer interval: 1 sec Fail Timer interval: 3 sec Preforwarding Timer interval: 3 sec Last update: From Master Id 00:E0:2B:81:20:00. The following example of the show eaps {<name>} detail command displays detailed EAPS information for a transit node. Table 35 describes the fields and values in the display. Table 35 describes significant fields and values in the display. some state values are different on a transit node than on a master node. Also. * Baker15:4 # show eaps2 detail Name: "eaps2" (instance=0) State: Complete [Running: Yes] Enabled: Yes Mode: Master Primary port: 14 Port status: Up Tag status: Tagged Secondary port: 13 Port status: Blocked Tag status: Tagged Hello Timer interval: 1 sec Fail Timer interval: 3 sec Eaps Domain has following Controller Vlan: Vlan Name VID "rhsc" 0020 EAPS Domain has following Protected Vlan(s): Vlan Name VID "blue" 1003 "traffic" 1001 Number of Protected Vlans: 2 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 139 . Sat Mar 17 17:03:37 2001 Eaps Domain has following Controller Vlan: Vlan Name VID "rhsc" 0020 EAPS Domain has following Protected Vlan(s): Vlan Name VID "traffic" 1001 Number of Protected Vlans: 1 The following example of the show eaps {<name>} detail command displays detailed EAPS information for a single EAPS domain named “eaps2” on the master node.Commands for Configuring and Monitoring EAPS NOTE The output displayed by this command depends on whether the node is a transit node or a master node.

Yes—EAPS is enabled on this domain. but one or both of its ports are down. but one of them is in a temporary BLOCKED state. Failed—There is a break in the ring for this EAPS domain. Name: (Instance= ) State: On a master node. Number of EAPS domains created. On the master node. 140 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Each time a VLAN is added to EAPS. The port numbers assigned as the EAPS primary and secondary ports. Yes—This EAPS domain is running. the command displays one of the following states: • • • [Running: …] Enabled: • • • • Mode: Primary/Secondary port: Idle—The EAPS domain has been enabled. this count increments by 1. There can only be one EAPS domain on this platform. the port distinction indicates which port is blocked to avoid a loop.Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching Table 35: show eaps Display Fields Field EAPS Enabled: Description Current state of EAPS on this switch: • • Number of EAPS instances: EAPSD-Bridge links: Yes—EAPS is enabled on the switch. The total number of EAPS bridge links in the system. Links-Down—This EAPS domain is running. Preforwarding—This EAPS domain is running. The configured EAPS mode for this switch: transit or master. no—EAPS is not enabled. The instance number is created internally by the system. No—This EAPS domain is not running. but the configuration is not complete. but the configuration is not complete. Indicates whether EAPS is enabled on this domain. Links-Up—This EAPS domain is running. the command displays one of the following states: • • • • Idle—The EAPS domain has been enabled. The configured name for this EAPS domain. The maximum count is 255. and both its ports are up and in the FORWARDING state. no—EAPS is not enabled. On a transit node. Complete—The ring is in the COMPLETE state for this EAPS domain. and both of its ports are up.

Tagged—The control VLAN has this port assigned to it. The configured value of the timer. 2. The count of protected VLANs configured on this EAPS domain. Displayed only for transit nodes. they are not displayed for a master node. Undetermined—Either a VLAN has not been added as the control VLAN to this EAPS domain or this port has not been added to the control VLAN. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 141 . so the port status has not yet been determined. but the port is untagged in the control VLAN. indicates the last time the transit node received a hello packet from the master node (identified by its MAC address). This list is displayed when you use the detail keyword in the show eaps command. Lists the assigned names and VLAN IDs of all the protected VLANs configured on this EAPS domain.Commands for Configuring and Monitoring EAPS Table 35: show eaps Display Fields (continued) Field Port status: Description • • • • Tag status: Unknown—This EAPS domain is not running. Untagged—The control VLAN has this port assigned to it. Lists the assigned name and ID of the control VLAN. The configured value of the timer. Blocked—The port is up. Up—The port is up and is forwarding data. and the port is tagged in the VLAN. Tagged status of the control VLAN: • • • Hello Timer interval: Fail Timer interval: Preforwarding Timer interval:1 Last update:1 The configured value of the timer. These fields apply only to transit nodes. This value is set internally by the EAPS software. Vlans:2 EAPS Domain has … Controller Vlans: EAPS Domain has … Protected Number of Protected Vlans: 1. but data is blocked from being forwarded. Down—The port is down.

Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching 142 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

you can specify the service level that a particular traffic type receives.1p and DiffServ) Traffic Groupings on page 148 — Physical and Logical Groupings on page 152 • Verifying Configuration and Performance on page 153 • Modifying a QoS Configuration on page 154 • Traffic Rate-Limiting on page 154 • Dynamic Link Context System on page 154 Policy-based Quality of Service (QoS) is a feature of ExtremeWare and the Extreme switch architecture that allows you to specify different service levels for traffic traversing the switch.12 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter covers the following topics: • Overview of Policy-Based Quality of Service on page 143 • Applications and Types of QoS on page 144 • Configuring QoS for a Port or VLAN on page 145 • Traffic Groupings on page 146 — MAC-Based Traffic Groupings on page 147 — Explicit Class of Service (802. For example. The bandwidth limitation and prioritization parameters that modify the forwarding behavior of the switch affect how the switch transmits traffic for a given hardware queue on a physical port. using QoS. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 143 . you can reserve sufficient bandwidth critical to this type of application. Each hardware queue can be programmed by ExtremeWare with bandwidth limitation and prioritization parameters. Using Policy-based QoS. Policy-based QoS is an effective control mechanism for networks that have heterogeneous traffic patterns. Summit 200 series switches support up to four physical queues per port. if voice-over-IP traffic requires a reserved amount of bandwidth to function properly. Other applications deemed less critical can be limited so as to not consume excessive bandwidth. Overview of Policy-Based Quality of Service Policy-based QoS allows you to protect bandwidth for important categories of applications or specifically limit the bandwidth associated with less critical traffic. The switch contains separate hardware queues on every physical port.

followed by priority. going from Gigabit Ethernet to Fast Ethernet). Applications and Types of QoS Different applications have different QoS requirements. For example. with the exception that bandwidth requirements are somewhat larger. typically do not demand significant bandwidth and are tolerant of delay. It is very important to understand the needs and behavior of the particular applications you wish to protect or limit. priority. Video Applications Video applications are similar in needs to voice applications. Behavioral aspects to consider include bandwidth needs.Quality of Service (QoS) NOTE As with all Extreme switch products. depending on the encoding. in the playback of stored video streams. such as those associated with ERP. and possibly buffering (depending upon the behavior of the application). The most important QoS parameter to establish for voice applications is minimum bandwidth.” with the expectation that the end-stations will buffer significant amounts of video-stream data. The following applications are ones that you will most commonly encounter and need to prioritize: • Voice applications • Video applications • Critical database applications • Web browsing applications • File server applications General guidelines for each traffic type are given below and summarized in Table 36. the bandwidth must be constant and predictable because voice applications are typically sensitive to latency (inter-packet delay) and jitter (variation in inter-packet delay). 144 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . QoS has no impact on switch performance. Using even the most complex traffic groupings has no cost in terms of switch performance. because it must be capable of buffering the transmitted spikes where there are speed differences (for example. some applications can transmit large amounts of data for multiple streams in one “spike. Consider them as general guidelines and not strict recommendations. However. Key QoS parameters for video applications include minimum bandwidth. Critical Database Applications Database applications. Once QoS parameters are set. you can monitor the performance of the application to determine if the actual behavior of the applications matches your expectations. You can establish a minimum bandwidth using a priority less than that of delay-sensitive applications. sensitivity to latency and jitter. This can present a problem to the network infrastructure. Voice Applications Voice applications typically demand small amounts of bandwidth. and sensitivity and impact of packet loss. It is important to understand the behavior of the video application being used.

RED Minimum bandwidth Configuring QoS for a Port or VLAN Table 37 lists the commands used to configure QoS. Traffic groupings can typically be distinguished from each other by their server source and destinations. priority Minimum bandwidth. The relevant parameter for protecting browser applications is minimum bandwidth. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 145 . large dataflows from the server to the browser client). ERP applications that use a browser front-end may be more important than retrieving daily news information. Most browser-based applications are distinguished by the dataflow being asymmetric (small dataflows from the browser client. In addition. depending on the network operating system and the use of TCP or UDP. jitter. although file server applications are very tolerant of latency. Table 36 summarizes QoS guidelines for the different types of network traffic. Allows you to configure a VLAN to use a particular QoS profile. however small packet-loss may have a large impact on perceived performance due to the nature of TCP. RED can be used to reduce session loss if the queue that floods Web traffic becomes over-subscribed. Web-based applications are generally tolerant of latency. File Server Applications With some dependencies on the network operating system. jitter. file serving typically poses the greatest demand on bandwidth.Configuring QoS for a Port or VLAN Web Browsing Applications QoS needs for Web browsing applications cannot be generalized into a single category. Table 36: Traffic Type and QoS Guidelines Traffic Type Voice Video Database Web browsing File server Key QoS Parameters Minimum bandwidth. In addition. For example. buffering (varies) Minimum bandwidth Minimum bandwidth for critical applications. priority. The relevant parameter for preventing non-critical browser applications from overwhelming the network is maximum bandwidth. NOTE Full-duplex links should be used when deploying policy-based QoS. maximum bandwidth for non-critical applications. Table 37: QoS Configuration Commands Command config ports <portlist> qosprofile <qosprofile> config vlan <name> qosprofile <qosprofile> Description Configures one or more ports to use a particular QoS profile. and some packet loss. Half-duplex operation on links can make delivery of guaranteed minimum bandwidth impossible. An exception to this may be created by some Java™ -based applications. and some packet loss.

Traffic groupings are separated into the following categories for discussion: • Access list based information (IP source/destination. By supplying a named QoS profile at the end of the access list command syntax. TCP/UDP port information. and VLANid) • Destination MAC (MAC QoS groupings) • Explicit packet class of service information. Access lists are discussed in detail in Chapter 9. In general. Table 38: Traffic Groupings by Precedence IP Information (Access Lists) Grouping • Access list precedence determined by user configuration Explicit Packet Class of Service Groupings • • DiffServ (IP TOS) 802. By default. you assign traffic a grouping to the profile. 146 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .1p or DiffServ (IP TOS) • Physical/logical configuration (physical source port or VLAN association) In the event that a given packet matches two or more grouping criteria.Quality of Service (QoS) Traffic Groupings Once a QoS profile is modified for bandwidth and priority. all traffic groupings are placed in the QoS profile Qp1.1P Destination Address MAC-Based Groupings • • • Permanent Dynamic Blackhole Physical/Logical Groupings • • Source port VLAN Access List Based Traffic Groupings Access list based traffic groupings are based on any combination of the following items: • IP source or destination address • TCP/UDP or other layer 4 protocol • TCP/UDP port information • MAC source or destination address • VLANid Access list based traffic groupings are defined using access lists. The four types of traffic groupings are described in detail on the following pages. The supported traffic groupings are listed in Table 38. A traffic grouping is a classification of traffic that has one or more attributes in common. The groupings are listed in order of precedence (highest to lowest). such as 802. there is a predetermined precedence for which traffic grouping will apply. Traffic is typically grouped based on the applications discussed starting on page 144. the more specific traffic grouping takes precedence. This level of packet filtering has no impact on performance. you can prescribe the bandwidth management and priority handling for that traffic grouping.

If a client's location moves. For example: create fdbentry 00:11:22:33:44:55 vlan default dynamic qosprofile qp3 The QoS profile is assigned when the MAC address is learned. the port is assigned the specified QoS profile. defined below. For example: create fdbentry 00:11:22:33:44:55 vlan default port 4 qosprofile qp2 Dynamic MAC Addresses Dynamic MAC addresses can be assigned a QoS profile whenever traffic is destined to the MAC address. you can clear the forwarding database so that the QoS profile can be applied when the entry is added again. If the MAC address entry already exists in the FDB. are as follows: • Permanent • Dynamic • Blackhole Permanent MAC addresses Permanent MAC addresses can be assigned a QoS profile whenever traffic is destined to the MAC address. use either the command show fdb permanent or the command show qosprofile <qosprofile> Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 147 . The blackhole option is configured using the following command: create fdbentry 00:11:22:33:44:55 vlan default blackhole Verifying MAC-Based QoS Settings To verify any of the MAC-based QoS settings. For any port on which the specified MAC address is learned in the specified VLAN. the assigned QoS profile moves with the device. This can be done when you create a permanent FDB entry. MAC-based traffic groupings are configured using the following command: create fdbentry <mac_address> vlan <name> [blackhole | port <portlist> | dynamic] qosprofile <qosprofile> The MAC address options.Traffic Groupings MAC-Based Traffic Groupings QoS profiles can be assigned to destination MAC addresses. Use the following command to clear the FDB: clear fdb Blackhole MAC Address Using the blackhole option configures the switch to not forward any packets to the destination MAC address on any ports for the VLAN specified.

for more information.1p priority bits that are part of a tagged Ethernet packet.1p and DiffServ) Traffic Groupings This category of traffic groupings describes what is sometimes referred to as explicit packet marking. and refers to information contained within a packet intended to explicitly determine a class of service.1Q type 8100 802. and preceding the 802.1Q VLAN ID. That information includes: • IP DiffServ code points. Configuring 802. as shown in Figure 28. When a packet arrives at the switch.1p priority field is located directly following the 802.1p information can be preserved across a routed switch boundary and DiffServ code points can be observed or overwritten across a layer 2 switch boundary.1p priority field maps it to a specific hardware queue when subsequently transmitting the packet. 802. The Summit 200 series switch 148 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .1p Information When ingress traffic that contains 802. The Summit 200 series switch has the capability of observing and manipulating packet marking information with no performance penalty. Figure 28: Ethernet Packet Encapsulation 802. formerly known as IP TOS bits • Prioritization bits used in IEEE 802. For example. The documented capabilities for 802.1p bits can be used to prioritize the packet. the traffic is mapped to various hardware queues on the egress port of the switch. and assign it to a particular QoS profile. See Chapter 9. the switch examines the 802.1Q VLAN ID Destination address Source address IP packet CRC EW_024 Observing 802.1p prioritization information is detected by the switch. The 802.1p priority markings or DiffServ capabilities are not impacted by the switching or routing configuration of the switch.Quality of Service (QoS) Explicit Class of Service (802.1p priority 802.1p packets An advantage of explicit packet marking is that the class of service information can be carried throughout the network infrastructure. without repeating what can be complex traffic grouping policies at each switch location.1p Priority Extreme switches support the standard 802. “Access Policies”.1Q type field. Another advantage is that end stations can perform their own packet marking on an application-specific basis. NOTE Re-marking DiffServ code points is supported through access lists. The 802.

1p Configuration Commands Command config vlan <name> priority <number> Description Configures the 802. and the information observed on ingress is preserved when transmitting the packet. Table 40: 802. This is explained in more detail in the following paragraphs. The default mapping of each 802.1p prioritization values to hardware queues. Configuring 802.1p prioritization values can be mapped to a QoS profile.1p value.1p Commands Table 40 shows the command used to configure 802. You can configure the priority to be a number between 0 and 7.1p priority field that is placed in the 802.1p priority. the switch is capable of replacing the 802.1p Priority Information By default. The value for priority is an integer between 0 and 7. This behavior is not affected by the switching or routing configuration of the switch. using the following command: config vlan <name> priority <number> Replacing 802. 802.1p priority value for 802.1p Priority Value-to-QoS Profile to Hardware Queue Default Mapping Priority Value QoS Profile 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Qp1 Qp2 Qp3 Qp4 Qp5 Qp6 Qp7 Qp8 Hardware Queue Priority Value 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 802. See Chapter 9. you will use an access list to set the 802.1p priority information. The transmitting hardware queue determines the bandwidth management and priority characteristics used when transmitting packets.1p priority information is not replaced or manipulated. You will use the set dot1p <dot1p_value> parameter of the create access list command to replace the value.Traffic Groupings supports four hardware queues. To replace 802. “Access Policies”.1Q tag.1p Priority When a packet is transmitted by the switch.1p priority value to QoS profile is shown in Table 39.1p priority information. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 149 . you can configure the 802. for more information on using access lists. However. To control the mapping of 802. 802.1p value. The packet is then placed on the queue that corresponds to the new 802.1Q VLAN tags. Table 39: 802.

Some of the commands are described in more detail in the following paragraphs. called the code point. The TOS field is used by the switch to determine the type of service provided to the packet. now also called the DiffServ field.Quality of Service (QoS) Configuring DiffServ Contained in the header of every IP packet is a field for IP Type of Service (TOS). enable diffserv examination ports [<portlist> | Enables the diffserv field of an ingress IP packet all] to be examined by the switch in order to select a QoS profile. Observing DiffServ Information When a packet arrives at the switch on an ingress port. Figure 29 shows the encapsulation of an IP packet header. Figure 29: IP packet header encapsulation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DiffServ code point 0 Version bits IHL Type-of-service Flags Protocol Source address Destination address Options (+ padding) Data (variable) EW_023 31 Total length Fragment offset Identification Time-to-live Header checksum Table 41 lists the commands used to configure DiffServ. Table 41: DiffServ Configuration Commands Command Description disable diffserv examination ports [<portlist> | Disables the examination of the diffserv field in all] an IP packet. 150 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . the switch examines the first six of eight TOS bits. The default setting is disabled. The QoS profile controls a hardware queue used when transmitting the packet out of the switch. Observing DiffServ code points as a traffic grouping mechanism for defining QoS policies and overwriting the Diffserv code point fields are supported in the Summit 200 series switch. The switch can assign the QoS profile used to subsequently transmit the packet based on the code point. and determines the forwarding characteristics of a particular code point.

use the following command: show ports <portlist> info {detail} NOTE The show ports command displays only the default code point mapping. “Access Policies”. Changing DiffServ Code point assignments in the QoS Profile The DiffServ code point has 64 possible values (26 = 64). the values are grouped and assigned to the default QoS profiles listed in Table 42. DiffServ Examples For information on the access list and access mask commands in the following examples. By default. for more information on using access lists. by default it is disabled. See Chapter 9. See “Maximum Entries” on page 105 for more information. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 151 . you will use an access list to set the new code point value. To view DiffServ information. for more information. see Chapter 9. “Access Policies”. Replacing DiffServ Code Points An access list can be used to change the DiffServ code point in the packet prior to the packet being transmitted by the switch. “Access Policies”. To replace the DiffServ code point. use the following command: enable diffserv examination ports [<portlist> | all] NOTE DiffServ examination requires one access mask while it is enabled. See Chapter 9. You will use the set code-point parameter of the create access list command to replace the value.Traffic Groupings Viewing DiffServ information can be enabled or disabled. This is done with no impact on switch performance. Table 42: Default Code Point-to-QoS Profile Mapping Code Point 0-7 8-15 16-23 24-31 32-39 40-47 48-55 56-63 QoS Profile Qp1 Qp2 Qp3 Qp4 Qp5 Qp6 Qp7 Qp8 You can change the QoS profile assignment for a code point by using an access list. To display the DiffServ configuration.

use the following command: config vlan <name> qosprofile <qosprofile> For example. The command to configure this example is as follows: config vlan servnet qosprofile qp4 Verifying Physical and Logical Groupings To verify settings on ports or VLANs. To configure a VLAN traffic grouping. use the following command: show qosprofile <qosprofile> The same information is also available for ports or VLANs using one of the following commands: show ports <portlist> info {detail} or show vlan 152 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . all the traffic from network 10. all devices on VLAN servnet require use of the QoS profile qp4.2.x is assigned the DiffServe code point 23 and the 802. To configure a source port traffic grouping.Quality of Service (QoS) Use the following command to use the DiffServe code point value to assign traffic to the hardware queues: enable diffserv examination ports all In the following example. all traffic sourced from port 7 uses the QoS profile named qp3 when being transmitted.0/24 permit qp3 set code-point 23 set dot1p 2 Physical and Logical Groupings Two traffic groupings exist in this category: • Source port • VLAN Source port A source port traffic grouping implies that any traffic sourced from this physical port uses the indicated QoS profile when the traffic is transmitted out to any other port.1.1p value of 2: create access-mask SriIpMask source-ip/24 create access-list TenOneTwo access-mask SrcIpMask source-ip 10.2. config ports 7 qosprofile qp3 VLAN A VLAN traffic grouping indicates that all intra-VLAN switched traffic and all routed traffic sourced from the named VLAN uses the indicated QoS profile. use the following command: config ports <portlist> qosprofile <qosprofile> In the following modular switch example.1.

The QoS monitor keeps track of the number of frames and the frames per second. To display QoS information on the switch. use the following command: show ports {<portlist>} qosmonitor The QoS monitor rate screen (packets per second). The real-time display corresponds to the 802. NOTE The QoS monitor requires one access mask until it exits. it is updated each second. Displaying QoS Profile Information The QoS monitor can also be used to verify the QoS configuration and monitor the use of the QoS policies that are in place. NOTE The QoS monitor can display up to four ports at a time. use the following command: show qosprofile <qosprofile> Displayed information includes: • QoS profile name • Minimum bandwidth • Maximum bandwidth Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 153 . sorted by 802.1p value. See “Maximum Entries” on page 105 for more information. QoS Monitor The QoS monitor is a utility that monitors the incoming packets on a port or ports.Verifying Configuration and Performance Verifying Configuration and Performance Once you have created QoS policies that manage the traffic through the switch. You can choose screens for packet count and packets per second. Any priority changes within the switch are not reflected in the display.1p values of the incoming packets. Once the rate is displayed. you can use the QoS monitor to determine whether the application performance meets your expectations. The view real-time switch per-port performance. Real-Time Performance Monitoring The real-time display scrolls through the given portlist to provide statistics. does not display any results for at least five seconds. on each monitored port. NOTE The QoS monitor displays the statistics of incoming packets.

Traffic Rate-Limiting The Summit 200 series switch rate-limiting method is based on creating a rate limit. • show vlan—Displays the QoS profile assignments to the VLAN. QoS information can be displayed from the traffic grouping perspective by using one or more of the following commands: • show fdb permanent—Displays destination MAC entries and their QoS profiles. Traffic that matches a rate limit is constrained to the limit set in the access control list.Quality of Service (QoS) • Priority • A list of all traffic groups to which the QoS profile is applied Additionally. This command should also be issued after a configuration is implemented. and dynamically maps the end station name to the current IP address and switch/port. a specific type of access control list. You can also save and reboot the switch. Rate limits are discussed in Chapter 9. You can also save and reboot the switch. • show switch—Displays information including PACE enable/disable information. the IP address or MAC address. and the switch/port. This information is available for use by ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager (EEM) version 2. as documented. Refer to the ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager or ExtremeWare EPICenter documentation for more information. For permanent destination MAC-based grouping. This feature should only be used in conjunction with the EEM Policy System or ExtremeWare EPICenter Policy System. Modifying a QoS Configuration If you make a change to the parameters of a QoS profile after implementing your configuration. 154 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . • show ports <portlist> info {detail}—Displays information including QoS information for the port. DLCS provides you with valuable information on a user’s location and associated network attributes. The following rules apply: • For destination MAC-based grouping (other than permanent). clear the MAC FDB using the command clear fdb. the user or end station must allow for automatic DLCS updates.1 or later or ExtremeWare EPICenter in setting policies that can be applied to users and can dynamically follow a user's location. as documented. Based on the information in the packet. the timing of the configuration change depends on the traffic grouping involved. re-apply the QoS profile to the source port or VLAN. DLCS can detect when an end station boots up or a user logs in or out. • For physical and logical groupings of a source port or VLAN. re-apply the QoS profile to the static FDB entry. For DLCS to operate within ExtremeWare. “Access Policies”. as the configuration must be in place before an entry is made in the MAC FDB. Dynamic Link Context System The Dynamic Link Context System (DLCS) is a feature that snoops WINS NetBIOS packets and creates a mapping between a user name.

or when an end-station is shutdown. • An IP-address can be learned on only one port in the network at a given time. Table 43: DLCS Configuration Commands Command clear dlcs disable dlcs disable dlcs ports <port-number> enable dlcs enable dlcs ports <port-number> show dlcs Description Clears learned DLCS data. You must delete the mapping of the host-to-IP address through the EEM Policy Manager or ExtremeWare EPICenter Policy Manager. • When the IP address of a host is changed. DLCS Commands The DLCS commands are described in Table 43. • When the host is moved from one port to another port on a switch. and there are IPQoS rules defined for that server. along with the data that has been learned. Enables port on which DLCS packets are snooped. This information is still stored in the policy-server. Disables port on which DLCS packets are snooped. you must explicitly delete configuration parameters from the EEM or ExtremeWare EPICenter Policy Applet user interface. the information is lost. Enables snooping of DLCS packets. • DLCS information is dynamic. the command to add the WINS server is rejected. To delete the information from the policy system. As a workaround. • DLCS mapping is flushed when a user logs in or logs out. the old host-to-IP address mapping is never deleted. This is because the WINS server does not send NETBIOS packets on the network (these packets are address to itself). if the switch is rebooted. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 155 . • A user can be logged into many workstations simultaneously. therefore. Displays ports which are snooping WINS packets. • IPQoS is not supported to a WINS server that is serving more than one VLAN. • Multiple IP-addresses can be learned on the same port.Dynamic Link Context System DLCS Guidelines Follow these guidelines when using DLCS: • Only one user is allowed on one workstation at a given time. and re-add the switch to the Inventory Manager. DLCS Limitations Consider the following limitations concerning data received from WINS snooping: • DLCS does not work for the WINS server. Disables snooping of DLCS packets. and the host is not immediately rebooted. • DLCS is not supported on hosts that have multiple NIC cards. you can delete the switch that was rebooted from the list of managed devices in the EEM or EPICenter Inventory Applet. If you attempt to add a WINS server to serve more than one VLAN. the old entry does not age out unless the host is rebooted or a user login operation is performed after the host is moved.

Quality of Service (QoS) 156 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

you will see trends emerging and notice problems arising before they cause major network faults. statistics can help you get the best out of your network. see the appropriate chapter in this guide.13 Status Monitoring and Statistics This chapter describes the following topics: • Status Monitoring on page 157 • Port Statistics on page 159 • Port Errors on page 159 • Port Monitoring Display Keys on page 160 • Setting the System Recovery Level on page 161 • Logging on page 161 • RMON on page 165 Viewing statistics on a regular basis allows you to see how well your network is performing. In this way. ExtremeWare includes many show commands that display information about different switch functions and facilities. This information may be useful for your technical support representative if you have a problem. Status Monitoring The status monitoring facility provides information about the switch. If you keep simple daily records. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 157 . NOTE For more information about show commands for a specific ExtremeWare feature.

the priority level of messages being logged locally. including: • • • • • • show tech-support • • • • • • • • • • • • sysName. system uptime. and the priority level of messages being sent to the syslog host. Specify the detail option to view task-specific memory usage. show version Displays the hardware and software versions currently running on the switch. info. error. Displays the current system memory information. Displays the log configuration. Table 44: Status Monitoring Commands Command show diag show log {<priority>} Description Displays software diagnostics. and debug. alert. Displays the current snapshot of the log. warning. sysContact MAC address Current time and time. notice. and time zone Operating environment (fans) NVRAM configuration information Scheduled reboot information show version show switch show config show diag show gdb show iparp show ipfdb show ipstats show iproute show igmp snooping detail show memory detail show log show log config show memory {detail} show switch Displays the output for the following commands: It also displays the output from internal debug commands.Status Monitoring and Statistics Table 44 describes commands that are used to monitor the status of the switch. emergency. This command disables the CLI paging feature. including the syslog host IP address. 158 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Priorities include critical. sysLocation. Displays the current switch information. If not specified. Specify the priority option to filter the log to display message with the selected priority or higher (more critical). all messages are displayed.

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 159 . Options are: — Ready (the port is ready to accept a link). use the following command: show ports <portlist> stats The following port statistic information is collected by the switch: • Link Status—The current status of the link. • Received Multicast (RX Mcast)—The total number of frames received by the port that are addressed to a multicast address. • Transmitted Packet Count (Tx Pkt Count)—The number of packets that have been successfully transmitted by the port. • Transmit Late Collisions (TX Late Coll)—The total number of collisions that have occurred after the port’s transmit window has expired. Values are displayed to nine digits of accuracy. and it is refreshed approximately every 2 seconds. • Transmit Collisions (TX Coll)—The total number of collisions seen by the port. — Active (the link is present at this port). use the following command: show ports <portlist> txerrors The following port transmit error information is collected by the system: • Port Number • Link Status—The current status of the link. • Transmitted Byte Count (Tx Byte Count)—The total number of data bytes successfully transmitted by the port. but excludes bytes in the preamble. — Active (the link is present at this port). — Chassis (the link is connected to a Summit Virtual Chassis). Port Errors The switch keeps track of errors for each port. This number includes bytes contained in the Frame Check Sequence (FCS). The summary information lists values for the current counter against each port on each operational module in the system. including bad or lost frames. • Received Byte Count (RX Byte Count)—The total number of bytes that were received by the port. To view port transmit errors. regardless of whether a device connected to the port participated in any of the collisions. • Received Broadcast (RX Bcast)—The total number of frames received by the port that are addressed to a broadcast address.Port Statistics Port Statistics ExtremeWare provides a facility for viewing port statistic information. To view port statistics. • Received Packet Count (Rx Pkt Count)—The total number of good packets that have been received by the port. Options are: — Ready (the port is ready to accept a link).

but contained a bad FCS value. Port Monitoring Display Keys Table 45 describes the keys used to control the displays that appear when you issue any of the show port commands. • Receive Jabber Frames (RX Jab)—The total number of frames received by the port that was of greater than the support maximum length and had a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) error. • Receive Undersize Frames (RX Under)—The total number of frames received by the port that were less than 64 bytes long. Table 45: Port Monitoring Display Keys Key(s) U D [Esc] or [Return] 0 [Space] Description Displays the previous page of ports.522 bytes. • Transmit Errored Frames (TX Error)—The total number of frames that were not completely transmitted by the port because of network errors (such as late collisions or excessive collisions). • Receive Fragmented Frames (RX Frag)—The total number of frames received by the port were of incorrect length and contained a bad FCS value. 160 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . use the following command: show ports <portlist> rxerrors The following port receive error information is collected by the switch: • Receive Bad CRC Frames (RX CRC)—The total number of frames received by the port that were of the correct length. To view port receive errors. Cycles through the following screens: • • • Packets per second Bytes per second Percentage of bandwidth Available using the show port utilization command only. • Receive Oversize Frames (RX Over)—The total number of good frames received by the port greater than the supported maximum length of 1. • Receive Alignment Errors (RX Align)—The total number of frames received by the port that occurs if a frame has a CRC error and does not contain an integral number of octets. • Receive Frames Lost (RX Lost)—The total number of frames received by the port that were lost because of buffer overflow in the switch. • Transmit Parity Frames (TX Parity)—The bit summation has a parity mismatch.Status Monitoring and Statistics • Transmit Deferred Frames (TX Deferred)—The total number of frames that were transmitted by the port after the first transmission attempt was deferred by other network traffic. Clears all counters. Displays the next page of ports. Exits from the screen.

Configures ExtremeWare to log an error into the syslog and automatically reboot the system after a critical exception. This allows ExtremeWare to log an error to the syslog and automatically reboot the system after a critical exception. and seconds) in the form HH:MM:SS. Configures ExtremeWare to log an error into the syslog and automatically reboot the system after any exception. The switch may need to be reset.Setting the System Recovery Level Setting the System Recovery Level You can configure the system to automatically reboot after a software task exception. Information that is useful when performing detailed troubleshooting procedures. along with the time (hours. Actions and events that are consistent with expected behavior. log entries that are assigned a critical or warning level remain in the log after a switch reboot. Table 47 describes the subsystems. Logging The switch log tracks all configuration and fault information pertaining to the device. NOTE Extreme Networks recommends that you set the system recovery level to critical. By default. minutes. Each entry in the log contains the following information: • Timestamp—The timestamp records the month and day of the event. A noncritical error that may lead to a function failure. The default setting is none. Issuing a clear log command does not remove these static entries. using the following command: config sys-recovery-level [none | critical | all] where: none critical all Configures the level to recovery without a system reboot. Table 46: Fault Levels Assigned by the Switch Level Critical Warning Informational Debug Description A desired switch function is inoperable. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 161 . If the event was caused by a user. • Fault level—Table 46 describes the three levels of importance that the system can assign to a fault. use the following command: clear log static • Subsystem—The subsystem refers to the specific functional area to which the error refers. To remove log entries of all levels (including warning or critical). the user name is also provided.

power supply. Examples include memory. To turn on the log display. and configuration mode. Examples include port statistics and errors. alert. notice. Bridge-related functionality. info.Status Monitoring and Statistics Table 47: Fault Log Subsystems Subsystem Syst Description General system-related information. STP Brdg SNMP Telnet VLAN Port • Message—The message contains the log information with text that is specific to the problem. If you enable the log display on a terminal connected to the console port. You must restart the log display by using the enable log display command. STP information. all messages are displayed. Port management-related configuration. Priorities include (in order) critical. fan failure.000 messages in its internal log. When using a Telnet connection. error. if your Telnet session is disconnected (because of the inactivity timer. you can configure the system to maintain a running real-time display of log messages on the console. only messages of critical priority are displayed. Real-Time Display In addition to viewing a snapshot of the log. Examples include low table space and queue overflow. emergency. Examples include community string violations. VLAN-related configuration information. use the following command: config log display {<priority>} If priority is not specified. You can display a snapshot of the log at any time by using the following command: show log {<priority>} where: priority Filters the log to display message with the selected priority or higher (more critical). and debug. Examples include an STP state change. SNMP information. If not specified. 162 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . your settings will remain in effect even after your console session is ended (unless you explicitly disable the log display). Information related to Telnet login and configuration performed by way of a Telnet session. the log display is automatically halted. use the following command: enable log display To configure the log display. or for other reasons). overheat condition. warning. security violations. Local Logging The switch maintains 1.

Specifies the syslog facility level for local use. Each log entry includes the user account name that performed the change and the source IP address of the client (if Telnet was used). NOTE Refer to your UNIX documentation for more information about the syslog host facility. Logging Configuration Changes ExtremeWare allows you to record all configuration changes and their sources that are made using the CLI by way of Telnet or the local console. use the following command: disable cli-config-logging CLI configuration logging is enabled by default. info. warning. only critical priority messages are sent to the syslog host. error. and debug. the switch supports remote logging by way of the UNIX syslog host facility. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 163 . Configuration logging applies only to commands that result in a configuration change. 2 Enable remote logging by using the following command: enable syslog 3 Configure remote logging by using the following command: config syslog {add} <ipaddress> <facility> {<priority>} where: ipaddress facility priority Specifies the IP address of the syslog host. The changes are logged to the system log. To enable remote logging. use the following command: enable cli-config-logging To disable configuration logging. Filters the log to display message with the selected priority or higher (more critical). follow these steps: 1 Configure the syslog host to accept and log messages.Logging Remote Logging In addition to maintaining an internal log. If not specified. To enable configuration logging. Priorities include (in order) critical. notice. emergency. Options include local0 through local7. alert.

info. alert. and debug. only critical priority messages and are sent to the syslog host. error. If not specified.local7). alert. Table 48: Logging Commands Command clear counters clear log {static} config log display {<priority>} Description Clears all switch statistics and port counters. Disables logging to a remote syslog host.local7). error. error. Specify the priority option to filter the log to display messages with the selected priority or higher (more critical). Priorities include critical. Configures the real-time log display. Enables logging to a remote syslog host. Priorities include critical. • • disable cli-config-logging disable log display disable syslog enable cli-config-logging Disables configuration logging. the critical log messages are also cleared. info. enable log display enable syslog 164 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Clears the log. emergency. Enables the logging of CLI configuration commands to the Syslog for auditing purposes. emergency. info. emergency. notice. If not specified. priority—Filters the log to display messages with the selected priority or higher (more critical). only critical priority messages and are sent to the syslog host. notice. warning. facility—The syslog facility level for local use (local0 . and debug. Priorities include critical. If static is specified. The default setting is enabled. or to display or clear the log. config syslog {add} <host name/ip> <facility> {<priority>} config syslog delete <host name/ip> <facility> {<priority> Deletes a syslog host address. priority—Filters the log to display messages with the selected priority or higher (more critical). and debug. If not specified. facility—The syslog facility level for local use (local0 . Disables the log display. informational priority messages and higher are displayed. Options include: • • • host name/ip—The IP address or name of the syslog host. Configures the syslog host address and filters messages sent to the syslog host. alert. warning. warning.Status Monitoring and Statistics Logging Commands Use the commands described in Table 48 to configure or reset logging options. notice. Enables the log display. Up to 4 syslog servers can be configured.

and debug. remotely controlled device or software agent that continually collects statistics about a LAN segment or VLAN. notice. RMON Features of the Switch Of the nine groups of IETF Ethernet RMON statistics. Specify the priority option to filter the log to display message with the selected priority or higher (more critical). The following sections explain more about the RMON concept and the RMON features supported by the switch. all messages are displayed. including the syslog host IP address. error. A typical RMON setup consists of the following two components: • RMON probe—An intelligent. emergency. the switch supports these four groups: • Statistics • History • Alarms • Events This section describes these groups and discusses how they can be used. and the priority level of messages being sent to the syslog host. Displays the log configuration. and can manage the probe by in-band or out-of-band connections. and have enabled RMON on the switch. The workstation does not have to be on the same network as the probe. • Management workstation—Communicates with the RMON probe and collects the statistics from it. NOTE You can only use the RMON features of the system if you have an RMON management application. info. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 165 . show log config RMON Using the Remote Monitoring (RMON) capabilities of the switch allows network administrators to improve system efficiency and reduce the load on the network.RMON Table 48: Logging Commands (continued) Command show log {<priority>} Description Displays the current snapshot of the log. The probe transfers the information to a management workstation on request. warning. or when a predefined threshold is crossed. Priorities include critical. alert. If not specified. which allows you to monitor LANs remotely. About RMON RMON is the common abbreviation for the Remote Monitoring Management Information Base (MIB) system defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) documents RFC 1271 and RFC 1757. the priority level of messages being logged locally.

In addition. Also. bytes. History The History group provides historical views of network performance by taking periodic samples of the counters supplied by the Statistics group. statistics can be related to individual ports. Rather than having to watch real-time graphs for important occurrences. This allows RMON to be widely deployed around the network without costing more than traditional network management. broadcasts. or to both log and send a trap. you can depend on the Event group for notification. The switch accurately maintains RMON statistics at the maximum line rate of all of its ports. alarm thresholds can be autocalibrated or set manually. and errors on a LAN segment or VLAN.Status Monitoring and Statistics Statistics The RMON Ethernet Statistics group provides traffic and error statistics showing packets. The RMON traps are defined in RFC 1757 for rising and falling thresholds. to send an SNMP trap to the receivers listed in the trap receiver table. Through the SNMP traps. and thresholds can be on the absolute value of a variable or its delta value. Effective use of the Events group saves you time. The group is useful for analysis of traffic patterns and trends on a LAN segment or VLAN. which provides a mechanism for an automated response to certain occurrences. Both rising and falling thresholds are supported. because a probe must be able to see all traffic. An event is triggered by an RMON alarm. to log the event. For example. Therefore. Information from the Statistics group is used to detect changes in traffic and error patterns in critical areas of the network. Implementing RMON in the switch means that all ports can have security features enabled. The action taken can be configured to ignore it. and to establish baseline information indicating normal operating parameters. To enable or disable the collection of RMON statistics on the switch. The group features user-defined sample intervals and bucket counters for complete customization of trend analysis. a stand-alone probe must be attached to a nonsecure port. general mechanism for setting threshold and sampling intervals to generate events on any RMON variable. Events The Events group creates entries in an event log and/or sends SNMP traps to the management workstation. events can trigger other actions. Extreme’s approach has been to build an inexpensive RMON probe into the agent of each system. use the following command: [enable | disable] rmon 166 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . and standalone RMON probes traditionally have been expensive. Alarms The Alarms group provides a versatile. Configuring RMON RMON requires one probe per LAN segment. Alarms inform you of a network performance problem and can trigger automated action responses through the Events group. multicasts.

However. Table 49: Event Actions Action No action Notify only Notify and log Send trap to all trap receivers. “Managing the Switch”. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 167 . place entry in RMON log. RMON is disabled. as described in Chapter 5. Send trap. Event Actions The actions that you can define for each alarm are shown in Table 49. even in the disabled state. you must configure one or more trap receivers. By enabling RMON. the switch begins the processes necessary for collecting switch statistics. the switch response to RMON queries and sets for alarms and events. High Threshold To be notified of events using SNMP traps.RMON By default.

Status Monitoring and Statistics 168 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

then all those VLANs must belong to the same STPD. If a port is a member of multiple VLANs. Spanning Tree Domains The switch can be partitioned into multiple virtual bridges. and ensure that: • Redundant paths are disabled when the main paths are operational. Overview of the Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a bridge-based mechanism for providing fault tolerance on networks.1D specification. To explain STP in terms used by the 802. one or more VLANs can be assigned to it. Each Spanning Tree instance is called a Spanning Tree Domain (STPD). Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 169 . the switch will be referred to as a bridge.14 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) This chapter describes the following topics: • Overview of the Spanning Tree Protocol on page 169 • Spanning Tree Domains on page 169 • STP Configurations on page 170 • Configuring STP on the Switch on page 172 • Displaying STP Settings on page 175 • Disabling and Resetting STP on page 175 Using the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) functionality of the switch makes your network more fault tolerant. Each STPD has its own root bridge and active path. A port can belong to only one STPD. Each virtual bridge can run an independent Spanning Tree instance. NOTE STP is a part of the 802. The following sections explain more about STP and the STP features supported by ExtremeWare. • Redundant paths are enabled if the main path fails. STP allows you to implement parallel paths for network traffic.1D bridge specification defined by the IEEE Computer Society. Once the STPD is created.

switch B. STPD BPDU Tunneling You can configure ExtremeWare to allow a BDPU to traverse a VLAN without being processed by STP. another external bridge is used to connect VLANs belonging to separate STPDs. STP Configurations When you assign VLANs to an STPD. even if STP is enabled on the port. switch Y. pay careful attention to the STP configuration and its effect on the forwarding of VLAN traffic. The default VLAN is a member of STPD s0. This could happen if. for example. and switch M. • Marketing is defined on all switches (switch A. and switch M). all VLANs belonging to it use the same spanning tree NOTE Ensure that multiple STPD instances within a single switch do not see each other in the same broadcast domain. use this feature to keep the root bridge within your network. 170 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . This is known as BPDU tunneling. The example network shown in Figure 30 uses VLAN tagging for trunk connections. as appropriate. You must remove all VLANs associated with the STP before deleting the STPD. The following four VLANs have been defined: • Sales is defined on switch A.1D values. and switch M. switch Z. switch B. To enable and disable BPDU tunneling on a VLAN. and switch M.Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The key points to remember when configuring VLANs and STP are: • Each VLAN forms an independent broadcast domain • STP blocks paths to create a loop-free environment • When STP blocks a path. • Manufacturing is defined on switch Y. the VLANs that were members of that STPD are also deleted. • Personnel is defined on switch A. and switch M. switch Z. All STP parameters default to the IEEE 802. Defaults The default device configuration contains a single STPD called s0. switch B. switch Z. • Engineering is defined on switch Y. use the following command: [enable | disable] ignore-bpdu vlan <name> If you have a known topology and have switches outside of your network within your STPD. If you delete an STPD. no data can be transmitted or received on the blocked port • Within any given STPD.

Marketing Switch A Switch Y Switch B Switch M Switch Z STPD 1 STPD 2 Sales. In Figure 30. STP could configure the topology in a number of ways to make it loop-free. Engineering. After STP converges. Figure 31 illustrates a network that has been incorrectly set up using a single STPD so that the STP configuration disables the ability of the switches to forward VLAN traffic. because STP has already blocked the port connection between switch A and switch B. Marketing LC24013 When the switches in this configuration start up. Marketing Manufacturing. you must be extra careful when configuring your VLANs. The topology has no loops. The VLAN Marketing. Personnel.STP Configurations Two STPDs are defined: • STPD1 contains VLANs Sales and Personnel. Manufacturing. • STPD2 contains VLANs Manufacturing and Engineering. the connection between switch A and switch B is put into blocking state. and between switch Y and switch Z. The VLAN Marketing is a member of the default STPD. and the connection between switch Y and switch Z is put into blocking state. Engineering. which has not been assigned to either STPD1 or STPD2. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 171 . Within a single STPD. STP configures each STPD such that there are no active loops in the topology. and all bridging loops are prevented. Personnel. all the VLANs can communicate. but not assigned to either STPD1 or STPD2. Figure 30: Multiple Spanning Tree Domains Sales. communicates using all five switches.

• Switch 3 contains VLAN Marketing.Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Figure 31: Tag-based STP configuration Marketing & Sales Marketing. VLAN Engineering. • Switch 2 contains VLAN Engineering and VLAN Sales. follow these steps: 1 Create one or more STP domains using the following command: create stpd <stpd_name> NOTE STPD. and QoS profile names must all be unique. VLAN. • All VLANs in each switch are members of the same STPD. Therefore. a name used to identify a VLAN cannot be used when you create an STPD or a QoS profile. Sales & Engineering Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Sales & Engineering LC24014 The tag-based network in Figure 31 has the following configuration: • Switch 1 contains VLAN Marketing and VLAN Sales. if the trunk for VLAN marketing on switches 1 and 3 is blocked. the traffic for VLAN marketing will not be able to traverse the switches. STP can block traffic between switch 1 and switch 3 by disabling the trunk ports for that connection on each switch. • The tagged trunk connections for three switches form a triangular loop that is not permitted in an STP topology. Switch 2 has no ports assigned to VLAN marketing. For example. and VLAN Sales. Configuring STP on the Switch To configure STP. 2 Add one or more VLANs to the STPD using the following command: config stpd <stpd_name> add vlan <name> 172 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

Specifies the time (in seconds) that the ports in this STPD spend in the listening and learning states when the switch is the Root Bridge. The default STP parameters are adequate for most networks. The range is 4 through 30. config stpd <stpd_name> hellotime <value> Specifies the time delay (in seconds) between the transmission of BPDUs from this STPD when it is the Root Bridge. If you do not want to run STP on a VLAN. Table 50 shows the commands used to configure STP. The default setting is 2 seconds. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 173 . The following parameters can be configured on each STPD: • Hello time • Forward delay • Max age • Bridge priority The following parameters can be configured on each port: • Path cost • Port priority NOTE The device supports the RFC 1493 Bridge MIB.Configuring STP on the Switch 3 Enable STP for one or more STP domains using the following command: enable stpd {<stpd_name>} NOTE All VLANs belong to a STPD. Table 50: STP Configuration Commands Command config stpd <stpd_name> add vlan <name> config stpd <stpd_name> forwarddelay <value> Description Adds a VLAN to the STPD. you can optionally configure STP parameters for the STPD. CAUTION You should not configure any STP parameters unless you have considerable knowledge and experience with STP. Parameters of only the s0 default STPD are accessible through this MIB. The default setting is 15 seconds. Once you have created the STPD. you must add the VLAN to a STPD that is disabled. The range is 1 through 10.

Enables the STP protocol on one or more ports.535. create stpd <stpd_name> Creates an STPD. the default cost is 100. config stpd <stpd_name> priority <value> Specifies the priority of the STPD. which prevents ports in the VLAN from becoming part of an STPD. you can make it more or less likely to become the root bridge.768 Hello time—2 seconds Forward delay—15 seconds enable ignore-bpdu vlan <name> Configures the switch to ignore STP BPDUs. This command is useful when you have a known topology with switches outside your network. an STPD has the following default parameters: • • • Bridge priority—32. you can make it more or less likely to become the root port. The range is 0 through 31. config stpd <stpd_name> ports cost <value> <portlist> Specifies the path cost of the port in this STPD. The switch automatically assigns a default path cost based on the speed of the port. or equal to 2 * (Hello Time + 1) and less than. For a 100 Mbps port. Specifies the priority of the port in this STPD. The range is 0 through 65.535. where 0 indicates the highest priority. The default setting is 20 seconds. The default setting is disabled. or equal to 2 * (Forward Delay –1). Note that the time must be greater than. If STPD is enabled for a port. The default setting is 16. the default cost is 19. The default setting is disabled. The default setting is 32. When created. By changing the priority of the port. The default setting is enabled. as follows: • • config stpd <stpd_name> ports priority <value> <portlist> For a 10 Mbps port. and wish to keep the root bridge within your network. This command is useful when multiple VLANs share the same physical ports. Configures the switch to ignore the STP protocol.768. enable ignore-stp vlan <vlan name> enable stpd {<stpd_name>} enable stpd ports {<portlist>} 174 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . By changing the priority of the STPD. The default setting is disabled. where 0 indicates the lowest priority. bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) will be generated on that port if STP is enabled for the associated STPD. The range is 1 through 65. The range is 6 through 40. but only some of the VLANs require STP protection.Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Table 50: STP Configuration Commands (continued) Command config stpd <stpd_name> maxage <value> Description Specifies the maximum age of a BPDU in this STPD. and not block traffic for the VLAN(s). Enables the STP protocol for one or all STPDs.

It disables STP on ports 1 through 7 and port 12. Table 51: Commands to Disable or Reset STP Command delete stpd <stpd_name> Description Removes an STPD. It assigns the Manufacturing VLAN to the STPD. Disabling STP on one or more ports puts those ports in forwarding state.12 Displaying STP Settings To display STP settings. s0.Displaying STP Settings STP Configuration Example The following Summit 200 series switch example creates and enables an STPD named Backbone_st. Disables STP on one or more ports. and so on) • STPD port state (forwarding. Disables the STP mechanism on a particular STPD. Allows a VLAN to use STP port information. disable ignore-bpdu vlan <name> disable ignore-stp vlan <name> disable stpd [<stpd_name> | all] disable stpd ports <portlist> unconfig stpd {<stpd_name>} Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 175 . all BPDUs received on those ports will be disregarded. use the following command: show stpd {<stpd_name>} This command displays the following information: • STPD name • Bridge ID • STPD configuration information To display the STP state of a port. cannot be deleted. and so on) Disabling and Resetting STP To disable STP or return STP settings to their defaults. use the following command: show stpd <stpd_name> port <portlist> This command displays the following information: • STPD port configuration • STPD state (root bridge. Restores default STP values to a particular STPD or to all STPDs. use the commands listed in Table 51. or for all STPDs. blocking. create stpd backbone_st config stpd backbone_st add vlan manufacturing enable stpd backbone_st disable stpd backbone_st port 1-7. Allows the switch to recognize STP BPDUs. The default STPD. An STPD can only be removed if all VLANs have been deleted from it.

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 176 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

refer to Chapter 16. The switch dynamically builds and maintains a routing table. In addition. IP unicast routing. Each host using the IP unicast routing functionality of the switch must have a unique IP address assigned. and determines the best path for each of its routes. If not.15 IP Unicast Routing This chapter describes the following topics: • Overview of IP Unicast Routing on page 177 • Proxy ARP on page 180 • Relative Route Priorities on page 181 • Configuring IP Unicast Routing on page 182 • IP Commands on page 183 • Routing Configuration Example on page 187 • Displaying Router Settings on page 188 • Resetting and Disabling Router Settings on page 189 • Configuring DHCP/BOOTP Relay on page 190 • UDP-Forwarding on page 190 This chapter assumes that you are already familiar with IP unicast routing. Overview of IP Unicast Routing The switch provides full layer 3. refer to the following publications for additional information: • RFC 1256—ICMP Router Discovery Messages • RFC 1812—Requirements for IP Version 4 Routers NOTE For more information on interior gateway protocols. It exchanges routing information with other routers on the network using either the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) or the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 177 . the default gateway assigned to the host must be the IP address of the router interface.

0.IP Unicast Routing Router Interfaces The routing software and hardware routes IP traffic between router interfaces.207.207. a switch is depicted with two VLANs defined. Both the VLAN switching and IP routing function occur within the switch.35.1.1.14 EW_090 178 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .35. In Figure 32. ports 3 and 5 are assigned to Personnel.206.207.207.35.207.36.35.207. its router interface is assigned IP address 192.207.0 Finance 192.36.207. Ports 2 and 4 are assigned to Finance. As you create VLANs with IP addresses belonging to different IP subnets.207.36.13 192. Personnel belongs to the IP network 192.207. Traffic between the two VLANs is routed using the IP addresses. Finance belongs to the IP network 192.11 192.1 192. A router interface is simply a VLAN that has an IP address assigned to it.207. Figure 32: Routing between VLANs 192.36. Traffic within each VLAN is switched using the Ethernet MAC addresses. You cannot configure the same IP address and subnet on different VLANs.36. you can also choose to route between the VLANs.0 Personnel 2 3 4 5 192.35.12 192.0.36.1 192. Finance and Personnel. the router interface for Finance is assigned the IP address 192.35. NOTE Each IP address and mask assigned to a VLAN must represent a unique IP subnet.

If these are still equal. The table is populated from the following sources: • Dynamically. Routers that use RIP or OSPF exchange information in their routing tables in the form of advertisements. the router picks the route using the following criteria (in the order specified): • Directly attached network interfaces • ICMP redirects (refer to Table 55. by way of interface addresses assigned to the system — By other static routes. Static routes are never aged out of the routing table. Static routes are used to reach networks not advertised by routers. Static routes can also be used for security reasons. to control which routes you want advertised by the router. as determined by the routing protocol. the router picks the route with the longest matching network mask. Dynamic routes are aged out of the table when an update for the network is not received for a period of time. the invalid default route entry remains. as configured by the administrator NOTE If you define a default route and then delete the VLAN on the subnet associated with the default route. Static Routes Static routes are manually entered into the routing table. the static route entries using that subnet must be deleted manually. If the VLAN is subsequently deleted. the routing table contains only networks that are reachable. conflicting choices of a route to a particular destination. Using dynamic routes. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 179 . Multiple Routes When there are multiple. using one of the following commands: [enable | disable] rip export static [enable | disable] ospf export static The default setting is disabled.Overview of IP Unicast Routing Populating the Routing Table The switch maintains an IP routing table for both network routes and host routes. by way of routes entered by the administrator: — Default routes. A static route must be associated with a valid IP subnet. configured by the administrator — Locally. later in this chapter) • Static routes • Directly attached network interfaces that are not active. by way of routing protocol packets or by ICMP redirects exchanged with other routers. You must manually delete the configured default route. Dynamic Routes Dynamic routes are typically learned by way of RIP or OSPF. • Statically. You can decide if you want all static routes to be advertised. An IP subnet is associated with a single VLAN by its IP address and subnet mask.

The latter option allows you to improve CPU forwarding performance by having upper layers. To use IP route sharing. use the following command: enable iproute sharing Next. To enable or disable hardware forwarding. the system picks one of the routes. You can also configure the VLAN router interface to either forward and process all subnet-directed broadcast packets. if the packets have IP-options configured).IP Unicast Routing NOTE If you define multiple default routes. You can also configure blackhole routes. In OSPF. use the following command: [enable | disable] ipforwarding fast-direct-broadcast [vlan <vlan_name>] The entries are added to the IP forwarding table as standard entries and you can view them using the show ipfdb command. ExtremeWare supports unlimited route sharing across static routes and up to eight ECMP routes for OSPF. Route sharing is useful only in instances where you are constrained for bandwidth. To enable or disable broadcast packet processing. ignore broadcast packet processing (for example. Using route sharing makes router troubleshooting more difficult because of the complexity in predicting the path over which the traffic will travel. or to simply forward these packets after they have been added to the IP forwarding database. Traffic to these destinations is silently dropped. 180 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Subnet-Directed Broadcast Forwarding You can enable or disable the hardware forwarding of subnet-directed broadcast IP packets. Proxy ARP can also be used to achieve router redundancy and simplify IP client configuration. The switch supports proxy ARP for this type of network configuration. If multiple default routes have the same lowest metric. IP Route Sharing IP route sharing allows multiple equal-cost routes to be used concurrently. IP route sharing can be used with static routes or with OSPF routes. This is typically not the case using Extreme switches. configure static routes and/or OSPF as you would normally. such as UDP and TCP. this capability is referred to as equal cost multipath (ECMP) routing. This allows the switch to forward subnet-directed broadcast packets at wire-speed. the route that has the lowest metric is used. The section describes some example of how to use proxy ARP with the switch. use the following command: [enable | disable] ipforwarding ignore-broadcast vlan <vlan_name> Proxy ARP Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) was first invented so that ARP-capable devices could respond to ARP Request packets on behalf of ARP-incapable devices.

103 are sent to the switch. CAUTION Although these priorities can be changed.255.45. Once all the proxy ARP conditions are met. the system responds to ARP Requests on behalf of the device as long as the following conditions are satisfied: • The valid IP ARP Request is received on a router interface.0.255.255. Relative Route Priorities Table 52 lists the relative priorities assigned to routes depending upon the learned source of the route.67.67. you must configure the IP address and MAC address of the ARP-incapable device using the use the following command: config iparp add proxy <ipaddress> {<mask>} <mac_address> {always} Once configured. it is desirable to configure the IP host with a wider subnet than the actual subnet mask of the segment.67.101. an IP host is configured with a class B address of 100. the host communicates as if all devices are local. The switch is also configured with a proxy ARP entry of IP address 100. and the switch routes the packets to 100. the IP hosts communicates as if the two hosts are on the same subnet.0. Proxy ARP can be used so that the router answers ARP Requests for devices outside of the subnet.101. All subsequent data packets from 100.101.0. In reality.Relative Route Priorities ARP-Incapable Devices To configure the switch to respond to ARP Requests on behalf of devices that are incapable of doing so.255.45. communication with devices outside of the subnet are proxied by the router. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 181 . When the IP host tries to communicate with the host at address 100.0.101. • The proxy ARP table entry indicates that the system should always answer this ARP Request.0. For example. • The target IP address matches the IP address configured in the proxy ARP table. do not attempt any manipulation unless you are expertly familiar with the possible consequences.102.101. regardless of the ingress VLAN (the always parameter must be applied). As a result.101.103 and a mask of 255. without the always parameter.1 and a mask of 255. the switch formulates an ARP Response using the configured MAC address in the packet.0 and mask 255.45.0. The switch is configured with the IP address 100.102. using its own MAC address.102. and sends out an IP ARP Request.101. The switch answers on behalf of the device at address 100. Proxy ARP Between Subnets In some networks.

and for each VLAN. 4 Turn on IP routing for one or all VLANs using the following command: enable ipforwarding {vlan <name>} 5 Turn on RIP or OSPF using one of the following commands: enable rip enable ospf Verifying the IP Unicast Routing Configuration Use the show iproute command to display the current configuration of IP unicast routing for the switch. The show iproute command displays the currently configured routes. 182 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . follow these steps: 1 Create and configure two or more VLANs. 2 Assign each VLAN that will be using routing an IP address using the following command: config vlan <name> ipaddress <ipaddress> {<mask>} Ensure that each VLAN has a unique IP address. To configure routing. and includes how each route was learned. use the following command: config iproute priority [rip | bootp | icmp | static | ospf-intra | ospf-inter | ospf-as-external | ospf-extern1 | ospf-extern2] <priority> Configuring IP Unicast Routing This section describes the commands associated with configuring IP unicast routing on the switch.IP Unicast Routing Table 52: Relative Route Priorities Route Origin Direct BlackHole Static ICMP OSPFIntra OSPFInter RIP OSPFExtern1 OSPFExtern2 BOOTP Priority 10 50 1100 1200 2200 2300 2400 3200 3300 5000 To change the relative route priority. 3 Configure a default route using the following command: config iproute add default <gateway> {<metric>} Default routes are used when the router has no other dynamic or static route to the requested destination.

Disables the generation and processing of BOOTP packets. the switch answers ARP Requests without filtering requests that belong to the same subnet of the receiving router interface. config iparp add proxy <ipaddress> {<mask>} {<mac_address>} {always} config iparp delete <ipaddress> config iparp delete proxy [<ipaddress> {<mask>} | all] config iparp timeout <minutes> disable bootp vlan [<name> | all] disable bootprelay disable ipforwarding {vlan <name>} Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 183 .255. Table 53: Basic IP Commands Command clear iparp {<ipaddress> <mask> | vlan <vlan>} Description Removes dynamic entries in the IP ARP table. IP Commands Table 53 describes the commands used to configure basic IP settings. Deletes an entry from the ARP table. Disables routing for one or all VLANs.255 is assumed. and the port and VLAN for each host. Specify the IP address of the entry. Configures the IP ARP timeout period. If no options are specified. • show ipfdb—Displays the hosts that have been transmitting or receiving packets. A setting of 0 disables ARP aging. clear ipfdb {<ipaddress> <netmask> | vlan <name>} Removes the dynamic entries in the IP forwarding database. an address with the mask 255. When mac_address is not specified. Disables the forwarding of BOOTP requests. the MAC address of the switch is used in the ARP Response. Configures proxy ARP entries.767 minutes. The default setting is 20 minutes. Specify the IP address and MAC address of the entry. Removes one or all IP destination addresses for forwarding BOOTP packets. config bootprelay add <ipaddress> config bootprelay delete [<ipaddress> | all] config iparp add <ipaddress> <mac_address> Adds the IP destination address to forward BOOTP packets. Permanent IP ARP entries are not affected. Deletes one or all proxy ARP entries. When mask is not specified. The maximum aging time is 32. • show ipconfig—Displays configuration information for one or more VLANs. When always is specified. all dynamic IP FDB entries are removed.255. Adds a permanent entry to the ARP table.IP Commands Additional verification commands include: • show iparp—Displays the IP ARP table of the system.

The default setting is enabled for all VLANs. enable bootprelay enable ipforwarding {vlan <name>} enable ipforwarding broadcast {vlan <name>} enable loopback-mode vlan [<name> | all] Table 54 describes the commands used to configure the IP route table. even if no ports are defined in the VLAN. Enables the forwarding of BOOTP and Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) requests. Use a value of 255. and no Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) message is generated. All traffic destined for the configured IP address is dropped. ipforwarding must be enabled on the VLAN. Table 54: Route Table Configuration Commands Command config iproute add <ipaddress> <mask> <gateway> <metric> config iproute add blackhole <ipaddress> <mask> Description Adds a static address to the routing table. The default setting for ipforwarding is disabled. Enables the generation and processing of BOOTP packets on a VLAN to obtain an IP address for the VLAN from a BOOTP server. To enable. As a result. Enables IP routing for one or all VLANs. A default gateway must be located on a configured IP interface. Enables a loopback mode on an interface.255. the default metric of 1 is used. Use the unicast-only or multicast-only options to specify a particular traffic type. If loopback is enabled. enables routing for all VLANs that have been configured with an IP address. the router interface remains in the UP state. If no metric is specified. Disables loopback-mode on an interface. If no argument is provided.255. If no argument is provided.IP Unicast Routing Table 53: Basic IP Commands (continued) Command disable ipforwarding broadcast {vlan <name>} disable loopback-mode vlan [<name> | all] enable bootp vlan [<name> | all] Description Disables routing of broadcasts to other networks. the subnet is always advertised as one of the available routes. config iproute add default <gateway> {<metric>} 184 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Enables forwarding IP broadcast traffic for one or all VLANs. Adds a blackhole address to the routing table. If not specified. The default setting is disabled.255 for mask to indicate a host entry. enables broadcast forwarding for all VLANs. Adds a default gateway to the routing table. both unicast and multicast traffic uses the default route.

config irdp <mininterval> <maxinterval> <lifetime> <preference> • • • disable icmp parameter-problem {vlan <name>} Disables the generation of ICMP messages for the parameter problem packet type. lifetime—The default setting is 1. Disables the record route IP option. The default setting is 0. disable ip-option loose-source-route disable ip-option record-route disable ip-option record-timestamp disable ip-option strict-source-route Disables the loose source route IP option. Change this setting to encourage or discourage the use of this router. Table 55: ICMP Configuration Commands Command config irdp [multicast | broadcast] Description Configures the destination address of the router advertisement messages. rtlookup [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] Table 55 describes the commands used to configure IP options and the ICMP protocol. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 185 . The default setting is 600 seconds. Disables load sharing for multiple routes. Disables the strict source route IP option. The default setting is multicast. maxinterval—The maximum time between router advertisements. Deletes a default gateway from the routing table. Only paths with the same lowest cost are shared.IP Commands Table 54: Route Table Configuration Commands (continued) Command config iproute delete <ipaddress> <mask> <gateway> config iproute delete blackhole <ipaddress> <mask> config iproute delete default <gateway> config iproute priority [rip | bootp | icmp | static | ospf-intra | ospf-inter | ospf-as-external | ospf-extern1 | ospf-extern2] <priority> disable iproute sharing enable iproute sharing Description Deletes a static address from the routing table. The default setting is disabled. Enables load sharing if multiple routes to the same destination are available.800 seconds. Deletes a blackhole address from the routing table. The default setting is 450 seconds. using seconds. Changes the priority for all routes from a particular route origin. Specify: • mininterval—The minimum amount of time between router advertisements. Performs a look-up in the route table to determine the best route to reach an IP address. Configures the router advertisement message timers. Disables the record timestamp IP option. preference—The preference level of the router. An ICMP Router Discover Protocol (IRDP) client always uses the router with the highest preference level.

If a VLAN is not specified. Enables the record timestamp IP option. and host unreachable messages (type 3. The default setting is enabled. and no application is waiting for the request. The default setting is enabled. code 0) when an ICMP timestamp request is received. the command applies to all IP interfaces. enable icmp parameter-problem {vlan <name>} Enables the generation of an ICMP parameter-problem message (type 12) when the switch cannot properly process the IP header or IP option information. the command applies to all IP interfaces. Enables the generation of ICMP network unreachable messages (type 3.The default setting is enabled. the command applies to all IP interfaces. The default setting is enabled. code 3) when a TPC or UDP request is made to the switch. This option applies to the switch when it is not configured for routing. Enables the generation of an ICMP address-mask reply (type 18. the command applies to all IP interfaces. IP multicast packets do not trigger ICMP time exceeded messages. If a VLAN is not specified. Enables the generation of an ICMP redirect message (type 5) when a packet must be forwarded out on the ingress port. the command applies to all IP interfaces. ICMP packet processing on one or all VLANs. If a VLAN is not specified. Enables the record route IP option. If a VLAN is not specified. The default setting is disabled. If a VLAN is not specified. code 1) when a packet cannot be forwarded to the destination because of unreachable route or host. Enables the generation of an ICMP time exceeded message (type 11) when the TTL field expires during forwarding. the command applies to all IP interfaces. Enables the generation of an ICMP timestamp response (type 14. Enables the loose source route IP option. Enables the modification of route table information when an ICMP redirect message is received. The default setting is enabled. The default setting is enabled. enable icmp redirects {vlan <name>} enable icmp time-exceeded {vlan <name>} enable icmp timestamp {vlan <name>} enable icmp unreachables {vlan <name>} enable icmp useredirects enable ip-option loose-source-route enable ip-option record-route enable ip-option record-timestamp 186 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . If a VLAN is not specified. The default setting is enabled. the command applies to all IP interfaces. code 0) when an ICMP address mask request is received. If a VLAN is not specified.IP Unicast Routing Table 55: ICMP Configuration Commands (continued) Command disable ip-option use-router-alert enable icmp address-mask {vlan <name>} Description Disables the generation of the router alert IP option. enable icmp port-unreachables {vlan <name>} Enables the generation of ICMP port unreachable messages (type 3. code 0). or access policy denies the request.

— IP address 192. Figure 33: Unicast routing configuration example 192. — IP address 192. • Personnel — Contains ports 3 and 5.1.36.35. Resets all ICMP settings to the default values.207.207. unconfig icmp unconfig irdp Routing Configuration Example Figure 33 illustrates a switch that has two VLANs defined as follows: • Finance — Contains ports 2 and 4.36.0 Personnel 2 3 4 5 192.13 192.207.12 192.207.0 Finance 192. Enables the switch to generate the router alert IP option with routing protocol packets.207.1 192.35.207.14 EW_090 In this configuration.35. all IP traffic from stations connected to ports 2 and 4 have access to the router by way of the VLAN Finance.36.207. The default setting is enabled.207.207.Routing Configuration Example Table 55: ICMP Configuration Commands (continued) Command enable ip-option strict-source-route enable ip-option use-router-alert enable irdp {vlan <name>} Description Enables the strict source route IP option.207. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 187 .36.1.11 192. Enables the generation of ICMP router advertisement messages on one or all VLANs.1 192.35.35. Resets all router advertisement settings to the default values. Ports 3 and 5 reach the router by way of the VLAN Personnel.36.

1 config rip add vlan Finance config rip add vlan Personnel enable ipforwarding enable rip Displaying Router Settings To display settings for various IP routing components.5 config Finance ipaddress 192. You can filter the display by IP address. all IP FDB entries are displayed. Displays the contents of the IP routing table or the route origin priority. Displays IP statistics for the CPU of the system. Displays the contents of the IP forwarding database (FDB) table. If no option is specified. Displays IP configuration settings. Displays the proxy ARP table. use the commands listed in Table 56.4 config Personnel add port 3. Table 56: Router Show Commands Command show iparp {<ipaddress | vlan <name> | permanent} show iparp proxy {<ipaddress> {<mask>}} show ipconfig {vlan <name>} show ipconfig {vlan <name>} {detail} show ipfdb {<ipaddress> <netmask> | vlan <name> } show iproute {priority | vlan <vlan> | permanent | <ipaddress> <netmask> | origin [direct | static | blackhole | rip | bootp | icmp | ospf-intra | ospf-inter | ospf-as-external | ospf-extern1 | ospf-extern2]} {sorted} show ipstats {vlan <name>} Description Displays the IP Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table. VLAN. 188 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .36. Displays configuration information for one or all VLANs.207. or permanent entries.207.35.1 config Personnel ipaddress 192.IP Unicast Routing The example in Figure 33 is configured as follows: create vlan Finance create vlan Personnel config Finance add port 2.

Permanent IP ARP entries are not affected. the command applies to all IP interfaces. If no options are specified. If a VLAN is not specified. Disables the generation of ICMP time exceeded messages. the command applies to all IP interfaces. disable icmp parameter-problem {vlan <name>} disable icmp port-unreachables {vlan <name>} disable icmp redirects {vlan <name>} disable icmp time-exceeded {vlan <name>} disable icmp timestamp {vlan <name>} disable icmp unreachables {vlan <name>} disable icmp useredirects disable ipforwarding {vlan <name>} disable ipforwarding broadcast {vlan <name>} disable irdp {vlan <name>} unconfig icmp unconfig irdp Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 189 . Resets all router advertisement settings to the default values. If a VLAN is not specified. the command applies to all IP interfaces. Disables the generation of router advertisement messages on one or all VLANs. Disables the generation of ICMP redirect messages. Disables routing of broadcasts to other networks. If a VLAN is not specified. Disables routing for one or all VLANs. Disables the generation and processing of BOOTP packets. the command applies to all IP interfaces. If a VLAN is not specified. the command applies to all IP interfaces. Disables the generation of ICMP parameter-problem messages. use the commands listed in Table 57 Table 57: Router Reset and Disable Commands Command clear iparp {<ipaddress> | vlan <name>} clear ipfdb {<ipaddress> <netmask> | vlan <name>] disable bootp vlan [<name> | all] disable bootprelay disable icmp address-mask {vlan <name>} Description Removes dynamic entries in the IP ARP table. Disables the changing of routing table information when an ICMP redirect message is received. Disables the generation of ICMP network unreachable messages and host unreachable messages. If a VLAN is not specified. Disables the generation of an ICMP address-mask reply messages. all IP FDB entries are removed. Removes the dynamic entries in the IP forwarding database. the command applies to all IP interfaces. the command applies to all IP interfaces. Disables the generation of ICMP timestamp response messages. Disables the generation of ICMP port unreachable messages. If a VLAN is not specified. Disables the forwarding of BOOTP requests. If a VLAN is not specified. Resets all ICMP settings to the default values.Resetting and Disabling Router Settings Resetting and Disabling Router Settings To return router settings to their defaults and disable routing functions.

do not configure or use the existing bootprelay function.IP Unicast Routing Configuring DHCP/BOOTP Relay Once IP unicast routing is configured. if the previous bootprelay functions are adequate. If the UDP-forwarding is used for BOOTP or DHCP forwarding purposes. such as multiple DHCP relay services from differing sets of VLANs. NOTE UDP-forwarding only works across a layer 3 boundary. including DHCP services between Windows NT servers and clients running Windows 95. UDP-Forwarding UDP-forwarding is a flexible and generalized routing utility for handling the directed forwarding of broadcast UDP packets. To configure the relay function. it is handled according to guidelines in RFC 1542. using the following command: enable bootprelay 3 Configure the addresses to which DHCP or BOOTP requests should be directed. follow these steps: 1 Configure VLANs and IP unicast routing. and the addresses that are currently configured. to be directed to different DHCP servers. you may continue to use them. using the following command: config bootprelay add <ipaddress> To delete an entry. However. and changes are made to the IP and UDP checksums and decrements to the TTL field. use the following command: config bootprelay delete {<ipaddress> | all} Verifying the DHCP/BOOTP Relay Configuration To verify the DHCP/BOOTP relay configuration. 2 Enable the DHCP or BOOTP relay function. The following rules apply to UDP broadcast packets handled by this feature: • If the UDP profile includes BOOTP or DHCP. This feature can be used in various applications. UDP-forwarding allows applications. 190 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . you can configure the switch to forward Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or BOOTP requests coming from clients on subnets being serviced by the switch and going to hosts on different subnets. these packets have the IP destination address modified as configured. • If the UDP profile includes other types of traffic. as appropriate. use the following command: show ipconfig This command displays the configuration of the BOOTP relay service.

1) and a backup server (with IP address 10. Additionally. and destination IP address or VLAN. Each named profile may contain a maximum of eight “rules” defining the UDP port. the first thing you must do is create a UDP-forward destination profile. You must give the profile a unique name. host. time-exceeded. and address-mask requests.1. Access lists are described in Chapter 9.1 backbonedhcp add 67 ipaddress 10. protocol filter.2).2 labdhcp add 67 vlan labsvrs marketing udp-profile backbonedhcp operations udp-profile backbonedhcp labuser udp-profile labdhcp ICMP Packet Processing As ICMP packets are routed or generated.1. you can assert control on a per-type. in the same manner as a VLAN. you can apply access lists to restrict forwarding behavior. the VLAN Marketing and the VLAN Operations are pointed toward a specific backbone DHCP server (with IP address 10. configure a VLAN to make use of the UDP-forwarding profile. The profile describes the types of UDP packets (by port number) that are used. You would alter the default settings for security reasons: to restrict the success of tools that can be used to find an important application. Next. As a result. The controls include the disabling of transmitting ICMP messages associated with unreachables. port-unreachables. UDP-Forwarding Example In this example.1. A maximum of ten UDP-forwarding profiles can be defined. For ICMP packets typically generated or observed as part of the routing function.1. the VLAN LabUser is configured to use any responding DHCP server on a separate VLAN called LabSvrs. or Spanning Tree Domain. A VLAN can make use of a single UDP-forwarding profile.1. For ICMP packets that are typically routed.UDP-Forwarding Configuring UDP-Forwarding To configure UDP-forwarding. parameter-problems.1. all incoming traffic from the VLAN that matches the UDP profile is handled as specified in the UDP-forwarding profile. you can take various actions to control distribution. The commands for this configuration are as follows: create create config config config config config config udp-profile backbonedhcp udp-profile labdhcp backbonedhcp add 67 ipaddress 10. per-VLAN basis. and where they are to be forwarded. UDP packets directed toward a VLAN use an all-ones broadcast on that VLAN. time-stamp.1. redirects. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 191 .1. or topology information.

Creates a UDP-forwarding profile. Deletes a forwarding entry from the specified udp-profile name. Assigns a UDP-forwarding profile to the source VLAN. Displays the profile names. If the UDP port is the DHCP/BOOTP port number. destination IP address. Deletes a UDP-forwarding profile.IP Unicast Routing UDP-Forwarding Commands Table 58 describes the commands used to configure UDP-forwarding. All broadcast packets sent to <udp_port> are forwarded to either the destination IP address (unicast or subnet directed broadcast) or to the specified VLAN as an all-ones broadcast. config udp-profile <profile_name> delete <udp_port> [vlan <name> | ipaddress <dest_ipaddress>] config vlan <name> udp-profile <profile_name> create udp-profile <profile_name> delete udp-profile <profile_name> show udp-profile {<profile_name>} unconfig udp-profile vlan [<name> | all] 192 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . You must use a unique name for the UDP-forwarding profile. or VLAN and the source VLANs to which the profile is applied. Once the UDP profile is associated with the VLAN. and forwards those packets to the user-defined destination. appropriate DHCP/BOOTP proxy functions are invoked. the switch picks up any broadcast UDP packets that matches with the user configured UDP port number. Table 58: UDP-Forwarding Commands Command config udp-profile <profile_name> add <udp_port> [vlan <name> | ipaddress <dest_ipaddress>] Description Adds a forwarding entry to the specified UDP-forwarding profile name. input rules of UDP port. Removes the UDP-forwarding profile configuration for one or all VLANs.

based on the Bellman-Ford (or distance-vector) algorithm. RIP is a distance-vector protocol. the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol for IP unicast routing. The distance-vector algorithm has been in use for many years. If not. refer to the following publications for additional information: • RFC 1058—Routing Information Protocol (RIP) • RFC 1723—RIP Version 2 • RFC 2328—OSPF Version 2 • Interconnections: Bridges and Routers by Radia Perlman ISBN 0-201-56332-0 Published by Addison-Wesley Publishing Company Overview The switch supports the use of two interior gateway protocols (IGPs). and is widely deployed and understood.16 Interior Gateway Routing Protocols This chapter describes the following topics: • Overview on page 193 • Overview of RIP on page 194 • Overview of OSPF on page 196 • Route Re-Distribution on page 201 • Configuring RIP on page 203 • RIP Configuration Example on page 205 • Displaying RIP Settings on page 206 • Resetting and Disabling RIP on page 206 • Configuring OSPF on page 206 • Displaying OSPF Settings on page 212 • Resetting and Disabling OSPF Settings on page 213 This chapter assumes that you are already familiar with IP unicast routing. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 193 .

Using a distance-vector protocol. • Support for hierarchical topologies where the network is divided into areas. no concept of areas or boundaries.Interior Gateway Routing Protocols OSPF is a link-state protocol. The biggest advantage of using RIP is that it is relatively simple to understand and implement. • Routing decisions based on hop count. every router maintains an identical routing table created from information obtained from all routers in the autonomous system. Overview of RIP RIP is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) first used in computer routing in the Advanced Research Projects Agency Network (ARPAnet) as early as 1969. RIP Versus OSPF The distinction between RIP and OSPF lies in the fundamental differences between distance-vector protocols and link-state protocols. • Support for load balancing to multiple routers based on the actual cost of the link. • Flat networks. The details of RIP and OSPF are explained later in this chapter. including: • A limit of 15 hops between the source and destination networks. To determine the best path to a distant network. verifying that all routers have a consistent network map. NOTE Both RIP and OSPF can be enabled on a single VLAN. • Faster convergence. • Route updates multicast only when changes occur. OSPF offers many advantages over RIP. It is primarily intended for use in homogeneous networks of moderate size. based on the Dijkstra link-state algorithm. The link-state protocol ensures that updates sent to neighboring routers are acknowledged by the neighbors. including: • No limitation on hop count. Each router builds a shortest path tree. Using a link-state protocol. a router using RIP always selects the path that has the least number of hops. • A large amount of bandwidth taken up by periodic broadcasts of the entire routing table. RIP has a number of limitations that can cause problems in large networks. Each router that data must traverse is considered to be one hop. using itself as the root. and it has been the de facto routing standard for many years. OSPF is a newer Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP). no concept of link costs or delay. each router creates a unique routing table from summarized information obtained from neighboring routers. and solves a number of problems associated with using RIP on today’s complex networks. 194 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . • Slow convergence.

Poison Reverse Like split horizon. do not have their subnets advertised by RIP. Each routing table entry contains the following information: • IP address of the destination network • Metric (hop count) to the destination network • IP address of the next router • Timer that tracks the amount of time since the entry was last updated The router exchanges an update message with each neighbor every 30 seconds (default value). but the route uses a hop count of 16.Overview of RIP Routing Table The routing table in a router using RIP contains an entry for every known destination network. Triggered Updates Triggered updates occur whenever a router changes the metric for a route. poison reverse is a scheme for eliminating the possibility of loops in the routed topology. reducing the load on hosts that do not support routing protocols. • Support for next-hop addresses. defining it as unreachable. called RIP version 2. and it is required to send an update message immediately. expands the functionality of RIP version 1 to include: • Variable-Length Subnet Masks (VLSMs). In this case. but may also result in more RIP-related traffic. RIP version 2 packets can be multicast instead of being broadcast. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 195 . If a router does not receive an update message from its neighbor within the route timeout period (180 seconds by default). Split horizon omits routes learned from a neighbor in updates sent to that neighbor. RIP Version 1 Versus RIP Version 2 A new version of RIP. This will generally result in faster convergence. Split Horizon Split horizon is a scheme for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was learned. Only those VLANs that are configured with an IP address and are configured to route IP and run RIP have their subnets advertised. or if there is a change to the overall routed topology (also called triggered updates). • Multicasting. a router advertises a route over the same interface that supplied the route. Route Advertisement of VLANs VLANs that are configured with an IP address. even if it is not yet time for a regular update message to be sent. the router assumes the connection between it and its neighbor is no longer available. which allows for optimization of routes in certain environments. but are configured to not route IP or are not configured to run RIP.

From the link-state database (LSDB). also known as an autonomous system (AS). Link-State Database Upon initialization. using itself as the root. In a link-state routing protocol. the router uses the LSDB to calculate the best routes for use in the IP routing table. Any change in routing information is sent to all of the routers in the network. LSAs are collected by each router and entered into the LSDB of each router. The cost of a route is described by a single metric. and cannot be a designated or a backup designated router. each router maintains a database describing the topology of the autonomous system. traffic can be distributed among them. When several equal-cost routes to a destination exist. In addition.Interior Gateway Routing Protocols NOTE If you are using RIP with supernetting/Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR). Overview of OSPF OSPF is a link-state protocol that distributes routing information between routers belonging to a single IP domain. RIP route aggregation must be turned off. each router transmits a link-state advertisement (LSA) on each of its interfaces. The shortest path tree provides the route to each destination in the autonomous system. NOTE A Summit 200 series switch can support up to two non-passive OSPF interfaces. All routers within an area have the exact same LSDB. you must use RIPv2 only. Table 59: LSA Type Numbers Type Number 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 10 11 Description Router LSA Network LSA Summary LSA AS summary LSA AS external LSA NSSA external LSA Link local Area scoping AS scoping 196 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . OSPF uses flooding to distribute LSAs between routers. Each participating router has an identical database maintained from the perspective of that router. Once all LSAs are received. each router constructs a tree of shortest paths. Table 59 describes LSA type numbers.

A limit value of zero disables the functionality. OSPF database overflow flushes the same LSAs from all the routers. At minimum a well-interconnected subsection of your OSPF network needs to support opaque LSAs to maintain reliability of their transmission. which maintains consistency. • Ensuring that all routers have identical LSAs. you can disable opaque LSAs across the entire system using the following command: disable ospf capability opaque-lsa To re-enable opaque LSAs across the entire system. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 197 . in seconds. To configure OSPF database overflow. and reduces the computations needed to maintain the LSDB. which ensures that all routers have a consistent view of the network. we recommend that all routers on your OSPF network support opaque LSAs. use the following command: enable ospf capability opaque-lsa If your network uses opaque LSAs. after which the system ceases to be in overflow state. Areas OSPF allows parts of a network to be grouped together into areas. support for opaque LSAs is auto-negotiated between OSPF neighbors. timeout Specifies the timeout. Opaque LSAs Opaque LSAs are a generic OSPF mechanism used to carry auxiliary information in the OSPF database. The topology within an area is hidden from the rest of the autonomous system. Normally. In the event that you experience interoperability problems. use the following command: config ospf ase-limit <number> {timeout <seconds>} where: number Specifies the number of external LSAs (excluding the default LSAs) that the system supports before it goes into overflow state. Opaque LSAs are most commonly used to support OSPF traffic engineering. When the LSDB size limit is reached. A timeout value of zero leaves the system in overflow state until OSPF is disabled and re-enabled. Routers that do not support opaque LSAs do not store or flood them. OSPF database overflow flushes LSAs from the LSDB. Routing within the area is determined only by the topology of the area.Overview of OSPF Database Overflow The OSPF database overflow feature allows you to limit the size of the LSDB and to maintain a consistent LSDB across all the routers in the domain. Hiding this information enables a significant reduction in LSA traffic. Consistency is achieved by: • Limiting the number of external LSAs in the database of each router.

also called the backbone. All areas in an autonomous system must be connected to the backbone.0. you must configure the area for the VLAN. When designing networks. and then expand into other areas. or other autonomous systems.0. • Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR)—An ASBR acts as a gateway between OSPF and other routing protocols.0. and adding in the backbone distance to each advertising router.0. You can create a maximum of 7 non-zero areas. • Area Border Router (ABR)—An ABR has interfaces in multiple areas. A stub area is connected to only one other area.0. including the backbone area.0. Every ABR hears the area summaries from all other ABRs.Interior Gateway Routing Protocols The three types of routers defined by OSPF are as follows: • Internal Router (IR)—An internal router has all of its interfaces within the same area. The backbone allows summary information to be exchanged between ABRs. The CLI command to control the NSSA function is similar to the command used for configuring a stub area. Stub areas are used to reduce memory consumption and computation requirements on OSPF routers.0. It is responsible for exchanging summary advertisements with other ABRs. The ABR then forms a picture of the distance to all networks outside of its area by examining the collected advertisements. The area that connects to a stub area can be the backbone area. you must create the area first using the following command: create ospf area <areaid> Stub Areas OSPF allows certain areas to be configured as stub areas. use the following command: config ospf vlan <name> area <areaid> If this is the first instance of the OSPF area being used.0.0) Any OSPF network that contains more than one area is required to have an area configured as area 0. Not-So-Stubby-Areas (NSSA) NSSAs are similar to the existing OSPF stub area configuration option. but have the following two additional capabilities: • External routes originating from an ASBR connected to the NSSA can be advertised within the NSSA. If you want to configure the VLAN to be part of a different OSPF area. When a VLAN is configured to run OSPF. you should start with area 0. • External routes originating from the NSSA can be propagated to other areas. Backbone Area (Area 0. External route information is not distributed into stub areas. as follows: config ospf area <area_id> nssa {summary | nosummary} stub-default-cost <cost> {translate} 198 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 199 . The option should not be used on NSSA internal routers. the connection using ABR2 provides redundancy so that the discontiguous area can continue to communicate with the backbone using the virtual link. if the connection between ABR1 and the backbone fails. with one ABR connected to the backbone. External routes can be distributed into normal areas. Doing so inhibits correct operation of the election algorithm. A virtual link provides a logical path between the ABR of the disconnected area and the ABR of the normal area that connects to the backbone. a virtual link is used.Overview of OSPF The translate option determines whether type 7 LSAs are translated into type 5 LSAs. one of the ABRs for that NSSA is elected to perform translation (as indicated in the NSSA specification). Virtual Links In the situation when a new area is introduced that does not have a direct physical attachment to the backbone. Figure 34 illustrates a virtual link. If translate is not used on any NSSA border router in a NSSA. in Figure 35. A virtual link must be established between two ABRs that have a common area. Normal Area A normal area is an area that is not: • Area 0. where translation is to be enforced. NOTE Virtual links can not be configured through a stub or NSSA area. the translate should only be used on NSSA border routers. For example. Virtual links can be configured through normal areas. Figure 34: Virtual link using Area 1 as a transit area Virtual link ABR ABR Area 2 Area 1 Area 0 EW_016 Virtual links are also used to repair a discontiguous backbone area. When configuring an OSPF area as an NSSA. • Stub area. • NSSA.

Table 60: OSPF Link Types Link Type Auto Number of Routers Description Varies ExtremeWare automatically determines the OSPF link type based on the interface type. Table 60 describes the link types.Interior Gateway Routing Protocols Figure 35: Virtual link providing redundancy Virtual link Area 2 ABR 2 ABR 1 Area 1 Area 0 Area 3 EW_017 Point-to-Point Support You can manually configure the OSPF link type for a VLAN. Does not operate with more than two routers on the same VLAN. Ethernet is an example of a broadcast link. Broadcast Any Point-to-point Up to 2 NOTE The number of routers in an OSPF point-to-point link is determined per-VLAN. Routers must elect a designated router (DR) and a backup designated router (BDR) during synchronization. This is the default setting. NOTE All routers in the VLAN must have the same OSPF link type. not per-link. PPP is an example of a point-to-point link. If you have three or more routers on the VLAN. OSPF will fail to synchronize if the neighbor is not configured. An OSPF point-to-point link supports only zero to two OSPF routers and does not elect a DR or BDR. but may not be reliable. OSPF attempts to operate. 200 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Synchronizes faster than a broadcast link because routers do not elect a DR or BDR. If there is a mismatch.

including static routes.3. Figure 36: Route re-distribution OSPF AS Backbone Area 0. Then you can configure the routes to export from OSPF to RIP and the routes to export from RIP to OSPF. and from RIP to OSPF. you must first configure both protocols and then verify the independent operation of each.0 ABR Area 121. Route re-distribution allows the switch to exchange routes.Route Re-Distribution Route Re-Distribution Both RIP and OSPF can be enabled simultaneously on the switch. are discreet configuration functions.4 ASBR ASBR RIP AS EW_019 Configuring Route Re-Distribution Exporting routes from OSPF to RIP. Figure 36 is an example of route re-distribution between an OSPF autonomous system and a RIP autonomous system.2.0. between the two routing protocols.0. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 201 . To run OSPF and RIP simultaneously.

and OSPF-learned routes into the RIP domain. direct. The default setting is disabled. or route maps can be sued for selective insertion. or you can simply choose ospf. The tag value is used only by special routing applications. The tag value in this instance has no relationship with 802. If you add more VLANs to the area. The same cost.Interior Gateway Routing Protocols Re-Distributing Routes into OSPF Enable or disable the exporting of RIP. cost-type. static. static. which will inject all learned OSPF routes regardless of type. OSPF Timers and Authentication Configuring OSPF timers and authentication on a per-area basis is a shorthand for applying the timers and authentication to each VLAN in the area at the time of configuration. and tag values can be inserted for all the export routes. direct. Use 0 if you do not have specific requirements for using a tag. the cost is inserted from the route. You can choose which types of OSPF routes are injected. and direct routes by way of LSA to other OSPF routers as AS-external type 1 or type 2 routes. The default setting is disabled. and direct (interface) routes to OSPF using the following commands: enable ospf export [static | rip | direct] [cost <metric> [ase-type-1 | ase-type-2] {tag <number>}] disable ospf export [static | rip | direct] These commands enable or disable the exporting of RIP.1Q VLAN tagging. static. and direct routes injected into OSPF. If the cost metric is set to 0. 202 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . The cost metric is inserted for all RIP-learned. and OSPF-learned routes into the RIP domain using the following commands: enable rip export [static | direct | ospf | ospf-intra | ospf-inter | ospf-extern1 | ospf-extern2] cost <metric> tag <number> disable rip export [static | direct | ospf | ospf-intra | ospf-inter | ospf-extern1 | ospf-extern2] These commands enable or disable the exporting of static. you must configure the timers and authentication for the new VLANs explicitly. Verify the configuration using the command: show ospf Re-Distributing Routes into RIP Enable or disable the exporting of static.

The default setting is 180 seconds. config rip updatetime {<seconds>} config rip vlan [<name> | all] cost <number> enable rip Changes the periodic RIP update timer. Configures the RIP garbage time. When RIP is disabled on the interface. Specify: • • • • none—Do not transmit any packets on this interface. If no VLAN is specified. per-interface RIP configuration is disabled by default. Specify: • • • • none—Drop all received RIP packets. config rip delete vlan [<name> | all] config rip garbagetime {<seconds>} config rip routetimeout {<seconds>} config rip rxmode [none | v1only | v2only | any] Changes the RIP receive mode for one or all {vlan <name>} VLANs. Table 61: RIP Configuration Commands Command config rip add vlan [<name> | all] Description Configures RIP on an IP interface. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 203 . the setting is applied to all VLANs. If no VLAN is specified. any—Accept both RIP v1 and v2 packets. v1only—Accept only RIP v1 format packets.Configuring RIP Configuring RIP Table 61 describes the commands used to configure RIP. Enables RIP. the setting is applied to all VLANs. v2only—Accept only RIP v2 format packets. The default setting is 30 seconds. Configures the cost (metric) of the interface. The default setting is 120 seconds. v1comp—Transmit RIP v2 format packets to the broadcast address. The default setting is disabled. When an IP interface is created. the parameters are not reset to their defaults. The timer granularity is 10 seconds. The default setting is v2only. v2only—Transmit RIP v2 format packets to the RIP multicast address. The default setting is 1. The default setting is any. v1only—Transmit RIP v1 format packets to the broadcast address. config rip txmode [none | v1only | v1comp | v2only] {vlan <name>} Changes the RIP transmission mode for one or all VLANs. Disables RIP on an IP interface. Configures the route timeout.

Default setting is enabled. no routes are aggregated. Triggered updates are a mechanism for immediately notifying a router’s neighbors when the router adds or deletes routes. The default setting is enabled. enable rip originate-default {always} cost <metric> {tag <number>} Configures a default route to be advertised by RIP if no other default route is advertised. enable rip export [static | direct | ospf | ospf-intra | ospf-inter | ospf-extern1 | ospf-extern2] metric <metric> {tag <number>} Enables RIP to redistribute routes from other routing functions. subnet routes are never aggregated. RIP adds a default route if there is a reachable default route in the route table. Enables the split horizon with poison-reverse algorithm for RIP. If aggregation is enabled. Within a class boundary. • • • The default setting is disabled. poison reverse takes precedence. Enables the split horizon algorithm for RIP. If you enable poison reverse and split horizon. If always is specified. The switch summarizes subnet routes to the nearest class network route. If aggregation is disabled. The default setting is enabled. Enables triggered updates. or changes the metric of a route. Specify one of the following: • • static—Static routes direct—Interface routes (only interfaces that have IP forwarding enabled are exported) ospf—All OSPF routes ospf-intra—OSPF intra-area routes ospf-inter—OSPF inter-area routes ospf-extern1—OSPF AS-external route type 1 ospf-extern2—OSPF AS-external route type 2 • • • • • The metric range is 0–15. RIP always advertises the default route to its neighbors. even when crossing a class boundary.Interior Gateway Routing Protocols Table 61: RIP Configuration Commands (continued) Command enable rip aggregation Description Enables aggregation of subnet information on interfaces configured to send RIP v2 or RIP v2-compatible traffic. the behavior is the same as in RIP v1. If set to 0. RIP uses the route metric obtained from the route origin. The following rules apply when using RIP aggregation: • Subnet routes are aggregated to the nearest class network route when crossing a class boundary. If always is not specified. enable rip poisonreverse enable rip splithorizon enable rip triggerupdates 204 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

RIP Configuration Example

RIP Configuration Example
Figure 37 illustrates a switch that has two VLANs defined as follows: • Finance, which contains ports 2 and 4 and has the IP address 192.207.35.1 • Personnel, which contains ports 3 and 5 and has the IP address 192.207.36.1 Figure 37: RIP configuration example

192.207.35.1 192.207.35.0 Finance

192.207.36.1 192.207.36.0 Personnel

2

3

4

5

192.207.35.11 192.207.36.12

192.207.35.13 192.207.36.14
EW_090

In this configuration, all IP traffic from stations connected to ports 2 and 4 have access to the router by way of the VLAN Finance. Ports 3 and 5 reach the router by way of the VLAN Personnel. The example in Figure 37 is configured as follows:
create vlan Finance create vlan Personnel config Finance add port 2,4 config Personnel add port 3,5 config Finance ipaddress 192.207.35.1 config Personnel ipaddress 192.207.36.1 enable ipforwarding config rip add vlan all enable rip

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

205

Interior Gateway Routing Protocols

Displaying RIP Settings
To display settings for RIP, use the commands listed in Table 62. Table 62: RIP Show Commands
Command show rip {detail} show rip stat {detail} show rip stat vlan <name> show rip vlan <name> Description Displays RIP configuration and statistics for all VLANs. Displays RIP-specific statistics for all VLANs. Displays RIP-specific statistics for a VLAN. Displays RIP configuration and statistics for a VLAN.

Resetting and Disabling RIP
To return RIP settings to their defaults, or to disable RIP, use the commands listed in Table 63. Table 63: RIP Reset and Disable Commands
Command config rip delete [vlan <name> | all] Description Disables RIP on an IP interface. When RIP is disabled on the interface, the parameters are not reset to their defaults. Disables RIP. Disables the RIP aggregation of subnet information on a RIP v2 interface. Disables the distribution of non-RIP routes into the RIP domain.

disable rip disable rip aggregation disable rip export [static | direct | ospf | ospf-intra | ospf-inter | ospf-extern1 | ospf-extern2] metric <metric> {tag <number>} disable rip originate-default disable rip poisonreverse disable rip splithorizon disable rip triggerupdates unconfig rip {vlan <name>}

Disables the advertisement of a default route. Disables poison reverse. Disables split horizon. Disables triggered updates. Resets all RIP parameters to match the default VLAN. Does not change the enable/disable state of the RIP settings. If no VLAN is specified, all VLANs are reset.

Configuring OSPF
Each switch that is configured to run OSPF must have a unique router ID. It is recommended that you manually set the router ID of the switches participating in OSPF, instead of having the switch automatically choose its router ID based on the highest interface IP address. Not performing this configuration in larger, dynamic environments could result in an older link state database remaining in use.

206

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

Configuring OSPF

Table 64 describes the commands used to configure OSPF.

Table 64: OSPF Configuration Commands
Command config ospf add vlan <name> area <areaid> link-type [auto | broadcast | point-to-point] {passive} Description Configures the OSPF link type. Specify one of the following: • auto—ExtremeWare automatically determines the OSPF link type based on the interface type. broadcast—Broadcast link, such as Ethernet. Routers must elect a DR and a BDR during synchronization. point-to-point—Point-to-point link type, such as PPP.

The default setting is auto. The passive parameter indicates that the interface does not send or receive OSPF packets. config ospf vlan <name> neighbor add <ipaddress> config ospf vlan <name> neighbor delete <ipaddress> Configures the IP address of a point-to-point neighbor. Deletes the IP address of a point-to-point neighbor.

config ospf [area <areaid> | vlan [<name> | all]] Configures the cost metric of one or all cost [automatic | <number>] VLAN(s). If an area is specified, the cost metric is applied to all VLANs currently within that area. When automatic is specified, the advertised cost is determined from the OSPF metric table and corresponds to the active highest bandwidth port in the VLAN. config ospf [vlan <name> | area <areaid> | virtual-link <routerid> <areaid>] authentication [simple-password <password> | md5 <md5_key_id> <md5_key>| none | encrypted [simple-password <password> | md5 <md5_key_id> <md5_key>] Specifies the authentication password (up to eight characters) or Message Digest 5 (MD5) key for one or all interfaces (VLANs) in an area. The md5_key is a numeric value with the range 0 to 65,536. When the OSPF area is specified, authentication information is applied to all OSPF interfaces within the area.

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

207

Interior Gateway Routing Protocols

Table 64: OSPF Configuration Commands (continued)
Command config ospf [vlan <name> | area <areaid> | virtual-link <routerid> <areaid>] timer <retransmission_interval> <transmission_delay> <hello_interval> <dead_interval> Description Configures the timers for one interface or all interfaces in the same OSPF area. The following default, minimum, and maximum values (in seconds) are used: • retransmission_interval Default: 5 Minimum: 0 Maximum: 3,600 • transmission_delay Default: 1 Minimum: 0 Maximum: 3,600 • hello _interval Default: 10 Minimum: 1 Maximum: 65,535 • dead_interval Default: 40 Minimum: 1 Maximum: 2,147,483,647 config ospf add virtual-link <routerid> <areaid> Adds a virtual link to another ABR. Specify the following: • • config ospf add vlan <name> area <areaid> {passive} routerid—Far-end router interface number. areaid—Transit area used for connecting the two end-points.

Enables OSPF on one or all VLANs (router interfaces). The <areaid> specifies the area to which the VLAN is assigned. The passive parameter indicates that the interface does not send or receive OSPF packets. Configures a range of IP addresses in an OSPF area. If advertised, the range is exported as a single LSA by the ABR. Deletes a range of IP addresses in an OSPF area. Configures an OSFP area as a normal area. The default setting is normal. Configures an OSPF area as a NSSA.

config ospf area <areaid> add range <ipaddress> <mask> [advertise | noadvertise] [type 3 | type 7] config ospf area <areaid> delete range <ipaddress> <mask> config ospf area <areaid> normal config ospf area <areaid> nssa [summary | nosummary] stub-default-cost <cost> {translate} config ospf area <areaid> stub [summary | nosummary] stub-default-cost <cost>

Configures an OSPF area as a stub area.

config ospf asbr-filter [<access_profile> | none] Configures a route filter for non-OSPF routes exported into OSPF. If none is specified, no RIP and static routes are filtered. config ospf ase-limit <number> {timeout <seconds>} config ospf ase-summary add <ipaddress> <mask> cost <cost> {<tag_number>} Configures OSPF database overflow. Configures an aggregated OSPF external route using the IP addresses specified.

208

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

Configuring OSPF

Table 64: OSPF Configuration Commands (continued)
Command config ospf ase-summary delete <ipaddress> <mask> config ospf delete virtual-link <routerid> <areaid> config ospf delete vlan [<name> | all] config ospf direct-filter [<access_profile> | none] config ospf lsa-batching-timer <timer_value> Description Deletes an aggregated OSPF external route. Removes a virtual link. Disables OSPF on one or all VLANs (router interfaces). Configures a route filter for direct routes. If none is specified, all direct routes are exported if ospf export direct is enabled. Configures the OSPF LSA batching timer value. The range is between 0 (disabled) and 600 seconds, using multiples of 5 seconds. The LSAs added to the LSDB during the interval are batched together for refresh or timeout. The default setting is 30 seconds. Configures the automatic interface costs for 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1 Gbps interfaces. The default cost for 10 Mbps is 10, for 100 Mbps is 5, and for 4 Gbps is 1. Configures the OSPF router ID. If automatic is specified, the switch uses the largest IP interface address as the OSPF router ID. The default setting is automatic. Configures the minimum number of seconds between Shortest Path First (SPF) recalculations. The default setting is 3 seconds. Changes the area ID of an OSPF interface (VLAN).

config ospf metric-table <10M_cost> <100M_cost> <1G_cost>

config ospf routerid [automatic | <routerid>]

config ospf spf-hold-time {<seconds>}

config ospf vlan <name> area <areaid>

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

209

but also increase network traffic. It exists by default. hellointerval—The interval at which routers send hello packets. The default setting is disabled. Enables OSPF opaque LSA support. Under some circumstances. the OSPF router is considered to be an ASBR. The transit delay must be greater than 0. unnecessary retransmissions will result. The default tag number is 0. transitdelay—The length of time it takes to transmit an LSA packet over the interface. This interval should be a multiple of the hello interval. The default setting is disabled. Interface routes which correspond to the interface that has OSPF enabled are ignored. This value should not be set to less than the hellointerval. The default value is 5 seconds. The default value is 40 seconds. the OSPF router is considered to be an ASBR. Disables OSPF opaque LSA support. Smaller times allow routers to discover each other more quickly. waitinterval—The interval between the interface coming up and the election of the DR and BDR. The default tag number is 0. The default value is equal to the routerdeadinterval. • • • • create ospf area <areaid> disable ospf capability opaque-lsa enable ospf enable ospf capability opaque-lsa enable ospf export direct [cost <metric> [ase-type-1 | ase-type-2] {tag <number>}] Creates an OSPF area. Enables OSPF process for the router. routerdeadinterval—The interval after which a neighboring router is declared down due to the fact that hello packets are no longer received from the neighbor. If you set an interval that is too short. setting the waitinterval to smaller values can help OSPF routers on a broadcast network to synchronize more quickly at the expense of possibly electing an incorrect DR or BDR. The default value is 10 seconds. enable ospf export rip [cost <metric> [ase-type-1 | ase-type-2] {tag <number>}] 210 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . Enables the distribution of local interface (direct) routes into the OSPF domain. Enables the distribution of RIP routes into the OSPF domain. Once enabled. Specify the following: • rxmtinterval—The length of time that the router waits before retransmitting an LSA that is not acknowledged.Interior Gateway Routing Protocols Table 64: OSPF Configuration Commands (continued) Command config ospf vlan <vlan> timer <rxmtinterval> <transitdelay> <hellointerval> <routerdeadinterval> [<waitinterval>] Description Configures the OSPF wait interval. This interval is required by the OSPF standard to be equal to the routerdeadinterval. Once enabled. Area 0 does not need to be created.

If always is specified. but might not elect the correct DR or BDR.Configuring OSPF Table 64: OSPF Configuration Commands (continued) Command enable ospf export static [cost <metric> [ase-type-1 | ase-type-2] {tag <number>}] Description Enables the distribution of static routes into the OSPF domain. • Router wait interval (WaitInterval)—The interval between the interface coming up and the election of the DR and BDR. • Hello interval (HelloInterval)—The interval at which routers send hello packets. Non-standard settings might not be reliable under all circumstances. The default value is equal to the dead router wait interval. unnecessary retransmissions will result. OSPF always advertises the default route. This interval should be greater than the hello interval. The default tag number is 0. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 211 . Smaller times allow routers to discover each other more quickly. If it is close to the hello interval. Once enabled. CAUTION Do not configure OSPF timers unless you are comfortable exceeding OSPF specifications. The default value is 40 seconds. If always is not specified. but also increase network traffic. The transit delay must be greater than 0. enable ospf originate-default {always} cost <metric> [ase-type-1 | ase-type-2] {tag <number>} Configuring OSPF Wait Interval ExtremeWare allows you to configure the OSPF wait interval. The default value is 5 seconds. The default value is 10 seconds. OSPF adds the default LSA if there is a reachable default route in the route table. rather than using the router dead interval. the OSPF router is considered to be an ASBR. if no other default route is originated by OSPF by way of RIP and static route re-distribution. Configures a default external LSA to be generated by OSPF. • Transit delay (TransitDelay)—The length of time it takes to transmit an LSA packet over the interface. If you set an interval that is too short. the network synchronizes very quickly. This interval should be a multiple of the hello interval. To specify the timer intervals. NOTE The OSPF standard specifies that wait times are equal to the dead router wait interval. The default setting is disabled. • Dead router wait interval (RouterDeadInterval)—The interval after which a neighboring router is declared down due to the fact that hello packets are no longer received from the neighbor. use the following command: config ospf vlan <vlan> timer <rxmtinterval> <transitdelay> <hellointerval> <routerdeadinterval> [<waitinterval>] You can configure the following parameters: • Retransmit interval (RxmtInterval)—The length of time that the router waits before retransmitting an LSA that is not acknowledged.

Displays a table of the current LSDB. To display the current link-state database. show ospf virtual-link {<areaid> <routerid> } OSPF LSD Display ExtremeWare provides several filtering criteria for the show ospf lsdb command. 212 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . the default is to display in the summary format. Displays information about a particular OSPF area. Displays information about all OSPF areas. This allows you to control the displayed entries in large routing tables. The summary option displays several important fields of matching LSAs. resulting in the following shortened form: show ospf lsdb The shortened form displays all areas and all types in a summary format. The default setting is all with no detail. use the following command: show ospf lsdb [detail | summary | stats] area [all | <areaid>[/<len>]] lstype [all | as-external | external-type7 | network | router | summary-asb | summary-net] [lsid <id>[/<len>]] [routerid <id>[/<len>]] The detail option displays all fields of matching LSAs in a multi-line format. If not specified. Displays information about all OSPF interfaces. You can specify multiple search criteria and only results matching all of the criteria are displayed. use the commands listed in Table 65. You can filter the display using the area ID and LSA type. Displays the OSPF external route aggregation configuration. The stats option displays the number of matching LSAs. Displays information about one or all OSPF interfaces. Table 65: OSPF Show Commands Command show ospf show ospf area {detail} show ospf area <areaid> show ospf ase-summary show ospf interfaces {detail} show ospf interfaces {vlan <name> | area <areaid>} show ospf lsdb {detail} area [<areaid> | all] [router | network | summary-net | summary-asb | as-external | external-type7 |all] Description Displays global OSPF information. A common use of this command is to omit all optional parameters. but not any of their contents.Interior Gateway Routing Protocols Displaying OSPF Settings To display settings for OSPF. one line per LSA. each entry includes complete LSA information. Displays virtual link information about a particular router or all routers. If detail is specified.

Table 66: OSPF Reset and Disable Commands Command delete ospf area [<areaid> | all] Description Deletes an OSPF area. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 213 . disable ospf disable ospf export direct disable ospf export rip disable ospf export static unconfig ospf {vlan <name> | area <areaid>} Resets one or all OSPF interfaces to the default settings. Disables OSPF process in the router. use the commands listed in Table 66.Resetting and Disabling OSPF Settings Resetting and Disabling OSPF Settings To return OSPF settings to their defaults. The backbone area cannot be deleted. Disables exporting of local interface (direct) routes into the OSPF domain. A non-empty area cannot be deleted. Disables exporting of statically configured routes into the OSPF domain. Once an OSPF area is removed. Disables exporting of RIP routes in the OSPF domain. the associated OSPF area and OSPF interface information is removed.

Interior Gateway Routing Protocols 214 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

all IGMP and IP multicast traffic floods within a given VLAN. IGMP query should be enabled when the switch is configured to perform IP unicast routing. IGMP is a protocol used by an IP host to register its IP multicast group membership with a router. When configured to use IGMP snooping. a Summit 200 series switch “snoops” on IGMP transmissions to keep track of multicast groups and member ports. Without an IGMP querier.x). and group registration is maintained. If the group is still active. However. If IGMP snooping is disabled. and is enabled by default. the switch can be configured to disable the generation of period IGMP query packets. IGMP snooping is a layer 2 function of the switch. see the following publications: • RFC 1112—Host Extension for IP Multicasting • RFC 2236—Internet Group Management Protocol.0. It does not require multicast routing to be enabled. IGMP snooping expects at least one device in the network to generate periodic IGMP query messages. When a port sends an IGMP leave message.17 IP Multicast Groups and IGMP Snooping This chapter describes the following topics: • Overview on page 215 • Configuring IGMP and IGMP Snooping on page 216 • Displaying IGMP Snooping Configuration Information on page 217 • Clearing. the switch removes the IGMP snooping entry after 10 seconds. The switch does not reduce any IP multicast traffic in the local multicast domain (224. Disabling. a single IP host responds to the query. IGMP is enabled by default on the switch. IGMP snooping optimizes the usage of network bandwidth and prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to parts of the network that do not need it. If Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 215 . configure Summit 200 series switch interfaces to use Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to interfaces associated with IP multicast entities. Version 2 Overview To constrain the flooding of multicast traffic. the router queries the multicast group to see if the group is still in use.0. and Resetting IGMP Functions on page 217 For more information on IP multicast groups and IGMP snooping. Periodically. The switch sends a query to determine which ports want to remain in the multicast group. the switch stops forwarding IP multicast packets to any port.

Specify the following: • query_interval—The amount of time. Timers are based on RFC 2236.647 seconds (68 years). The range is 1 to 25 seconds. between the last IGMP group report message from the host and the current time.147. The range is 10 to 2. The default setting is 125 seconds. The default setting is 260 seconds.147. the router does not receive any responses to the query.647 seconds (68 years). • • config igmp snooping <router_timeout> <host_timeout> Configures the IGMP snooping timers. Timers should be set to approximately 2. If no VLAN is specified. in seconds. in seconds. The default setting is 1 second. Table 67: IGMP and IGMP Snooping Commands Command config igmp <query_interval> <query_response_interval> <last_member_query_interval> Description Configures the IGMP timers. the router ignores the leave message. The range is 10 to 2. in seconds. Configuring IGMP and IGMP Snooping Table 67 describes the commands used to configure IGMP and IGMP snooping on the Summit 200 series switches. • enable igmp {vlan <name>} Enables IGMP on a router interface.647 seconds (68 years). The default setting is 260 seconds. between the last time the router was discovered and the current time. The range is 1 to 2. If the last port within a VLAN sends an IGMP leave message. 216 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . host_timeout—The interval.147. The default setting is 10 seconds.483.483.IP Multicast Groups and IGMP Snooping other members of the VLAN want to remain in the multicast group. Specify the following: • router_timeout—The interval. query_response_interval—The maximum response time inserted into the periodic General Queries. The range is 1 to 25 seconds. last_member_query_interval—The maximum response time inserted into a Group-Specific Query sent in response to a Leave group message.483. and the router immediately removes the VLAN from the multicast group.5 times the router query interval in use on the network. but the port that requests removal is removed from the IGMP snooping table. the system waits between sending out General Queries. The default setting is enabled. IGMP is enabled on all router interfaces.

and Resetting IGMP Functions To clear IGMP snooping entries.Displaying IGMP Snooping Configuration Information Table 67: IGMP and IGMP Snooping Commands (continued) Command enable igmp snooping {forward-mcrouter-only} {with-proxy} Description Enables IGMP snooping on the switch. otherwise. IGMP is disabled on all router interfaces. No IGMP query is generated. use the commands listed in Table 68. If no VLAN is specified. use the following command: show igmp snooping {vlan <name>} {detail} Clearing. disable IGMP or IGMP snooping. Specify the with-proxy option to enable the IGMP snooping proxy. disable igmp snooping unconfig igmp Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 217 . Table 68: IGMP Disable and Reset Commands Command clear igmp snooping {vlan <name>} disable igmp {vlan <name>} Description Removes one or all IGMP snooping entries. Disabling. The proxy also suppresses superfluous IGMP “leave” messages so that they are forwarded only when the last member leaves the group. Displaying IGMP Snooping Configuration Information To display IGMP snooping registration information and a summary of all IGMP timers and states. Resets all IGMP settings to their default values and clears the IGMP group table. This command is useful for troubleshooting purposes. enabling the proxy also enables snooping. the switch forwards all multicast traffic to any IP router. or return IGMP settings to their defaults. If snooping is not enabled. The default setting is enabled. Disabling IGMP snooping allows all IGMP and IP multicast traffic to flood within a given VLAN. Disables the router-side IGMP processing on a router interface. Disables IGMP snooping. Specify the forward-mcrouter-only option to have the switch forward all multicast traffic to the multicast router only. Enabling the proxy allows the switch to suppress duplicate “join” requests on a group to prevent forwarding to the connected layer 3 switch. but the switch continues to respond to IGMP queries received from other devices.

IP Multicast Groups and IGMP Snooping 218 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

• The unit must be connected to a grounded outlet to comply with European safety standards. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 219 . Power The Summit 200 series switch has one power input on the switch. and removal of the unit and components must be done by qualified service personnel only.and humidity-controlled indoor area free or airborne materials that can conduct electricity. Do not connect the power supply unit to an AC outlet without a ground connection. Too little humidity can produce electrical shock and fire. maintenance. removal of parts. You can only remove power from the unit by disconnecting the power cord from the outlet. Failure to follow this safety information can lead to personal injury or damage to the equipment. • The socket outlet must be near the unit and easily accessible. NOTE For more information about the temperature and humidity ranges for the Summit 200 series switches. see Appendix B. Installation. Install the unit only in a temperature.A Safety Information Important Safety Information WARNING! Read the following safety information thoroughly before installing your Extreme Networks switch. Service personnel are people having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of the hazards to which they are exposed when performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other people. • The unit must be grounded. Too much humidity can cause a fire.

Connections Fiber Optic ports—Optical Safety. Type SVT or SJT. with the secondary connection point labeled Neutral. Use only with the appropriate connector. Never look at the transmit LED/laser through a magnifying device while it is powered on. — The AC attachment plug must be an Earth-grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (10 A. This is a Class 1 laser device. 125 V) configuration.5 mm2). 18 AWG (1. property damage. 3-conductor. Lithium Battery The battery in the bq4830/DS1644 device is encapsulated and not user-replaceable. • The appliance coupler (the connector to the unit and not the wall plug) must have a configuration for mating with an EN60320/IEC320 appliance inlet. If your supplies are of IT type. — The cord set must have a rated current capacity of at least the amount rated for each specific product. The conditions are only maintained if the equipment to which it is connected also operates under SELV conditions. Never look directly at the fiber port or fiber cable ends when they are powered on. • France and Peru only—This unit cannot be powered from IT† supplies. 220 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . or personal injury. When not in use. • Switzerland—The supply plug must comply with SEV/ASE 1011. this unit must be powered by 230 V (2P+T) via an isolation transformer ratio 1:1. Using this module in ways other than those described in this manual can result in intense heat that can cause fire. WARNING! Use only for data communications applications that require optical fiber. replace the lithium battery with the same or equivalent type. as recommended by the manufacturer.Safety Information • This unit operates under Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) conditions according to IEC 950. • Denmark—The supply plug must comply with section 107-2-D1. Power Cord The power cord must be approved for the country where it is used: • USA and Canada — The cord set must be UL-listed and CSA-certified. — The minimum specification for the flexible cord is No. standard DK2-1a or DK2-5a. • Argentina—The supply plug must comply with Argentinian standards. replace dust cover. connected directly to ground. If service personnel disregard the instructions and attempt to replace the bq4830/DS1644.

• Disposal requirements vary by country and by state. • Two types of batteries are used interchangeably: — CR chemistry uses manganese dioxide as the cathode material.035 grams. contact a local waste-management service. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. — BR chemistry uses poly-carbonmonofluoride as the cathode material. they can typically be disposed of as normal waste.Important Safety Information WARNING! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. • Lithium batteries are not listed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) as a hazardous waste. • No hazardous compounds are used within the battery module. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 221 . • If you are disposing of large quantities. • The weight of the lithium contained in each coin cell is approximately 0. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Therefore.

Safety Information 222 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

not Rev.0/1. auto-ranging Current Rating: 100-120/200-240 VAC 2.44 cm) Width: 17.1 inches (20. Rev.0 A 24.72 lbs (2. C1: 70° to 75° C (158° to 167° F) Power-One supplies.57 cm) Weight: 5.6 kg) Operating Temperature: 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F) Storage Temperature: –40° to 70 ° C (–40° to 158° F) Operating Humidity: 10% to 95% relative humidity.75 inches (4. C1: Not drifting: 65° to 70° C (149° to 158° F) Drifting: 50° C (122° F) Digital supplies. OL and earlier: 60° to 65° C (140° to 149° F) Power-One supplies. Rev. OM and later: 75° C (167° F) Weight Temperature and Humidity Power Heat Dissipation.3 inches (43.1 W (Listed by supply type) Digital supplies.B Technical Specifications This appendix provides technical specifications for the following Summit 200 series switches: • Summit 200-24 Switch on page 223 • Summit 200-48 Switch on page 226 Summit 200-24 Switch Physical and Environmental Dimensions Height: 1. noncondensing Standards: EN60068 to Extreme IEC68 schedule AC Line Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz Input Voltage Options: 90 VAC to 264 VAC. Watts/BTU Temperature switch power-off Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 223 .94 cm) Depth: 8. Rev.

2 No. Emissions) International Country Specific Certification Marks CE (European Community) TUV/GS (German Notified Body) TUV/S (Argentina) 224 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . -3 (Europe Harmonics and Flicker) IEC/CISPR 22:1997 Class A (International Emissions) IEC/CISPR 24:1998 (International Immunity) IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Transient Bursts IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Power Dips and Interruptions Japan Class A (VCCI Registration Emissions) Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS 3548 (ACA DoC.Technical Specifications Safety Certifications North America Europe UL 60950 3rd Edition. 60950-00 (Canadian Safety) Low Voltage Directive (LVD) TUV-R GS Mark by German Notified Body EN60950:2000 (European Safety) CB Scheme IEC60950:2000 with all country deviations (International Safety) Mexico NOM/NYCE (Product Safety and EMC Approval) Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS 3260 (ACA DoC. Emissions) Korean MIC Mark (MIC Approval. Emissions and Immunity) Mexico NOM/NYCE (Product Safety and EMC Approval) GOST (Russia) Taiwan CNS 13438:1997 Class A (BSMI Approval. 3. Safety of ITE) Argentina S-Mark GOST (Russia) FCC 21 CFR subpart (J) (Safety of Laser Products) CDRH Letter of Approval (US FDA Approval) EN60825-2 (European Safety of Lasers) International Country Specific Laser Safety North America Europe Electromagnetic Compatibility North America Europe FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A (US Emissions) ICES-003 Class A (Canada Emissions) 89/336/EEC EMC Directive ETSI/EN 300 386:2001 (EU Telecommunications Emissions and Immunity) EN55022:1998 Class A (European Emissions) EN55024:1998 includes IEC/EN 61000-2. listed (US Safety) CAN/CSA-C22. 6. 4. 11 (European Immunity) EN 61000-3-2. 5.

Summit 200-24 Switch GOST (Russian Federation) ACN 090 029 066 C-Tick (Australian Communication Authority) Underwriters Laboratories (USA and Canada) MIC (South Korea) BSMI. Electronic Certification and Normalization) Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 225 . Republic of Taiwan NOM (Mexican Official Normalization.

00 cm) Weight: 9. Safety of ITE) Argentina S-Mark GOST (Russia) FCC 21 CFR subpart (J) (Safety of Laser Products) CDRH Letter of Approval (US FDA Approval) EN60825-2 (European Safety of Lasers) Weight Temperature and Humidity Power Heat Dissipation. auto-ranging Current Rating: 100-120/200-240 VAC 2.0/1.44 cm) Width: 17. Rev. 60950-00 (Canadian Safety) Low Voltage Directive (LVD) TUV-R GS Mark by German Notified Body EN60950:2000 (European Safety) CB Scheme IEC60950:2000 with all country deviations (International Safety) Mexico NOM/NYCE (Product Safety and EMC Approval) Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS 3260 (ACA DoC.75 inches (4.Technical Specifications Summit 200-48 Switch Physical and Environmental Dimensions Height: 1.2 No. C1: Not drifting: 65° to 70° C (149° to 158° F) Drifting: 50° C (122° F) Digital supplies. not Rev.7 lbs (4. Rev. listed (US Safety) CAN/CSA-C22.94 cm) Depth: 12. Rev. Watts/BTU Temperature switch power-off International Country Specific Laser Safety North America Europe 226 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .0 A 48. OM and later: 75° C (167° F) Safety Certifications North America Europe UL 60950 3rd Edition.2 inches (31.0 W (Listed by supply type) Digital supplies. OL and earlier: 60° to 65° C (140° to 149° F) Power-One supplies. C1: 70° to 75° C (158° to 167° F) Power-One supplies. noncondensing Standards: EN60068 to Extreme IEC68 schedule AC Line Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz Input Voltage Options: 90 VAC to 264 VAC.4 kg) Operating Temperature: 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F) Storage Temperature: –40° to 70 ° C (–40° to 158° F) Operating Humidity: 10% to 95% relative humidity.3 inches (43.

Emissions and Immunity) Mexico NOM/NYCE (Product Safety and EMC Approval) GOST (Russia) Taiwan CNS 13438:1997 Class A (BSMI Approval.Summit 200-48 Switch Electromagnetic Compatibility North America Europe FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A (US Emissions) ICES-003 Class A (Canada Emissions) 89/336/EEC EMC Directive ETSI/EN 300 386:2001 (EU Telecommunications Emissions and Immunity) EN55022:1998 Class A (European Emissions) EN55024:1998 includes IEC/EN 61000-2. Emissions) Korean MIC Mark (MIC Approval. 4. Electronic Certification and Normalization) Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 227 . Emissions) International Country Specific Certification Marks CE (European Community) TUV/GS (German Notified Body) TUV/S (Argentina) GOST (Russian Federation) ACN 090 029 066 C-Tick (Australian Communication Authority) Underwriters Laboratories (USA and Canada) MIC (South Korea) BSMI. 3. 6. Republic of Taiwan NOM (Mexican Official Normalization. 5. -3 (Europe Harmonics and Flicker) IEC/CISPR 22:1997 Class A (International Emissions) IEC/CISPR 24:1998 (International Immunity) IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Transient Bursts IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-6 Conducted Immunity IEC/EN 61000-4-11 Power Dips and Interruptions Japan Class A (VCCI Registration Emissions) Australia/New Zealand AS/NZS 3548 (ACA DoC. 11 (European Immunity) EN 61000-3-2.

Technical Specifications 228 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

1p) Packet priority IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagging RFC 2474 DiffServ Precedence RFC 783 TFTP RFC 1542 BootP RFC 854 Telnet RFC 768 UDP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 793 TCP RFC 826 ARP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 2131 BootP/DHCP relay RFC 2030 Simple Network Time Protocol RFC 1256 Router discovery protocol RFC 1812 IP router requirement RFC 1519 CIDR Management and Security RFC 1157 SNMP v1/v2c RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 1354 IP forwarding table MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2037 Entity MIB RFC 1573 Evolution of Interface RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 1757 Four groups of RMON ExtremeWare VLAN Configuration private MIB RFC 2021 RMON probe configuration RFC 2239 802. MD-5) RFC 1587 NSSA option RFC 1765 OSPF Database Overflow RFC 2370 OSPF Opaque LSA Option RFC 1122 Host requirements IEEE 802.3 MAU MIB RFC 1724 RIP v2 MIB RFC 1850 OSPF v2 MIIB ExtremeWare Enterprise MIB HTML and Telnet management RFC 2138 RADIUS RFC 2925 Ping MIB RFC 2233 Interface MIB RFC 2096 IP Forwarding Table MIB 999 local messages.C Supported Standards ExtremeWare supports the following standards for the Summit 200 series switch. MD5 authentication) RFC 2154 OSPF with Digital Signatures (password.1D-1998 (802. criticals stored across reboots Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 229 . Standards and Protocols RFC 1058 RIP RFC 1723 RIP v2 RFC 1112 IGMP RFC 2236 IGMP v2 RFC 2328 OSPF v2 (incl.

Supported Standards 230 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

• Download the new image to the switch using the download image command: To download the image. use the following command: download image [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] <filename> {primary | secondary} where: ipaddress hostname filename primary secondary Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. Specifies the secondary image.D Software Upgrade and Boot Options This appendix describes the following topics: • Downloading a New Image on page 231 • Saving Configuration Changes on page 232 • Using TFTP to Upload the Configuration on page 233 • Using TFTP to Download the Configuration on page 234 • Upgrading and Accessing BootROM on page 235 • Boot Option Commands on page 236 Downloading a New Image The image file contains the executable code that runs on the switch. Specifies the hostname of the TFTP server. (You must enable DNS to use this option.) Specifies the filename of the new image. As new versions of the image are released. Specifies the primary image. Downloading a new image involves the following steps: • Load the new image onto a TFTP server on your network (if you will be using TFTP). Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 231 . you should upgrade the software running on your system. The image is upgraded by using a download procedure from either a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server on the network. It comes preinstalled from the factory.

When you download a new image. Saving Configuration Changes The configuration is the customized set of parameters that you have selected to run on the switch. If you have made a mistake. you can select into which configuration area you want the changes saved. the new settings are stored in run-time memory. use the following command: save {configuration} {primary | secondary} To use the configuration. you can tell the switch to use the secondary configuration on the next reboot. The configuration that is not in the process of being saved is unaffected. If you do select not an image space. Rebooting the Switch To reboot the switch. The time is entered in the format hh:mm:ss. the reboot occurs immediately following the command.Software Upgrade and Boot Options The switch can store up to two images: a primary and a secondary. If you do not specify a reboot time. To cancel a previously scheduled reboot. If you do not specify the configuration area. Settings that are stored in run-time memory are not retained by the switch when the switch is rebooted. and have them load when you reboot the switch. you must save the configuration to nonvolatile storage. or you must revert to the configuration as it was before you started making changes. using a 24-hour clock. when the switch will be rebooted. use the cancel option. NOTE If the switch is rebooted while in the middle of a configuration save. To save the configuration. When you save configuration changes. The switch can store two different configurations: a primary and a secondary. and any previously scheduled reboots are cancelled. you must select into which image space (primary or secondary) the new image should be placed. Specifies the time of day. the switch boots to factory default settings. As you make configuration changes. the changes are saved to the configuration area currently in use. the system uses the primary image space. To retain the settings. use the following command: reboot {time <date> <time> | cancel} where: date time Specifies the date when the switch will be rebooted The date is entered in the format mm/dd/yyyy. use the following command: use configuration [primary | secondary] The configuration takes effect on the next reboot. 232 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

and later download a copy of the file to the same switch. or special characters. the configured file stored in the TFTP server is overwritten every day. commas. so that the TFTP server can archive the configuration on a daily basis.Using TFTP to Upload the Configuration Returning to Factory Defaults To return the switch configuration to factory defaults. If not specified. Specifies the time of day you want the configuration automatically uploaded on a daily basis.) Specifies the name of the ASCII file. or to one or more different switches. every <time> To cancel a previously scheduled configuration upload. The uploaded ASCII file retains the command-line interface (CLI) format. and cannot include any spaces. To erase the currently selected configuration image and reset all switch parameters. To upload the configuration. use the following command: upload configuration cancel Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 233 . quotation marks. and the date and time. Because the filename is not changed. Specifies the hostname of the TFTP server. use the following command: unconfig switch all Using TFTP to Upload the Configuration You can upload the current configuration to a TFTP server on your network. use the following command: upload configuration [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] <filename> {every <time>} where: ipaddress hostname filename Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server. the current configuration is immediately uploaded to the TFTP server. (You must enable DNS to use this option. use the following command: unconfig switch This command resets the entire configuration. • Automatically upload the configuration file every day. • Send a copy of the configuration file to the Extreme Networks Technical Support department for problem-solving purposes. with the exception of user accounts and passwords that have been configured. The filename can be up to 255 characters long. This allows you to: • Modify the configuration using a text editor.

You could use this feature to update the configuration of the switch regularly from a centrally administered TFTP server. use the following command: download configuration [<hostname> | <ipaddress>] <filename> {incremental} Scheduled Incremental Configuration Download You can schedule the switch to download a partial or incremental configuration on a regular basis. but the command executes normally.Software Upgrade and Boot Options Using TFTP to Download the Configuration You can download ASCII files that contain CLI commands to the switch to modify the switch configuration. it treats the downloaded configuration file as a script of CLI commands. which generates a complete switch configuration in an ASCII format. the switch is automatically rebooted. you can optionally configuration a backup TFTP server. You typically use this type of download in conjunction with the upload config command. To download an incremental configuration. your connection is terminated when the switch reboots. The downloaded configuration file is stored in current switch memory during the rebooting process. When the switch completes booting. Downloading an Incremental Configuration A partial or incremental change to the switch configuration may be accomplished by downloaded ASCII files that contain CLI commands. and automatically executes the commands. As part of the scheduled incremental download. use the following command: config download server [primary | secondary] [<hostname> | <ipaddress>] <filename> To enable scheduled incremental downloads. you are prompted to reboot the switch. use the following command: download configuration every <hour (0-23)> 234 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . use the following command: download configuration [<hostname> | <ipaddress>] <filename> After the ASCII configuration is downloaded by way of TFTP. without requiring a reboot of the switch. These commands are interpreted as a script of CLI commands. To download a complete configuration. As part of the complete configuration download. If your CLI connection is through a Telnet connection (and not the console port). Three types of configuration scenarios that can be downloaded: • Complete configuration • Incremental configuration • Scheduled incremental configuration Downloading a Complete Configuration Downloading a complete configuration replicates or restores the entire configuration to the switch. and is not retained if the switch has a power failure. and take effect at the time of the download. To configure the primary and/or secondary TFTP server and filename.

Upgrading and Accessing BootROM

To display scheduled download information, use the following command:
show switch

To cancel scheduled incremental downloads, use the following command:
download configuration cancel

Remember to Save
Regardless of which download option is used, configurations are downloaded into switch runtime memory, only. The configuration is saved only when the save command is issued, or if the configuration file, itself, contains the save command. If the configuration currently running in the switch does not match the configuration that the switch used when it originally booted, an asterisk (*) appears before the command line prompt when using the CLI.

Upgrading and Accessing BootROM
The BootROM of the switch initializes certain important switch variables during the boot process. If necessary, BootROM can be upgraded, after the switch has booted, using TFTP. In the event the switch does not boot properly, some boot option functions can be accessed through a special BootROM menu.

Upgrading BootROM
Upgrading BootROM is done using TFTP (from the CLI), after the switch has booted. Upgrade the BootROM only when asked to do so by an Extreme Networks technical representative. To upgrade the BootROM, use the following command:
download bootrom [<hostname> | <ipaddress>] <filename>]

Accessing the BootROM menu
Interaction with the BootROM menu is only required under special circumstances, and should be done only under the direction of Extreme Networks Customer Support. The necessity of using these functions implies a non-standard problem which requires the assistance of Extreme Networks Customer Support. To access the BootROM menu, follow these steps: 1 Attach a serial cable to the console port of the switch. 2 Attach the other end of the serial cable to a properly configured terminal or terminal emulator, power cycle the switch while depressing the spacebar on the keyboard of the terminal. As soon as you see the BootROM-> prompt, release the spacebar. You can see a simple help menu by pressing h. Options in the menu include — Selecting the image to boot from — Booting to factory default configuration

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

235

Software Upgrade and Boot Options

For example, to change the image that the switch boots from in flash memory, press 1 for the image stored in primary or 2 for the image stored in secondary. Then, press the f key to boot from newly selected on-board flash memory. To boot to factory default configuration, press the d key for default and the f key to boot from the configured on-board flash.

Boot Option Commands
Table 69 lists the CLI commands associated with switch boot options. Table 69: Boot Option Commands
Command config download server [primary | secondary] [<hostname> | <ipaddress>] <filename> Description Configures the TFTP server(s) used by a scheduled incremental configuration download.

download bootrom [<hostname> | <ipaddress>] Downloads a BOOT ROM image from a TFTP <filename> server. The downloaded image replaces the BOOT ROM in the onboard FLASH memory.

NOTE If this command does not complete successfully, it could prevent the switch from booting.
download configuration [<hostname> | <ipaddress>] <filename> {incremental} download configuration cancel download configuration every <hour> Downloads a complete configuration. Use the incremental keyword to specify an incremental configuration download. Cancels a previously scheduled configuration download. Schedules a configuration download. Specify the hour using a 24-hour clock, where the range is 0 to 23. Downloads a new image from a TFTP server over the network. If no parameters are specified, the image is saved to the current image. Reboots the switch at the date and time specified. If you do not specify a reboot time, the reboot happens immediately following the command, and any previously scheduled reboots are cancelled. To cancel a previously scheduled reboot, use the cancel option. Saves the current configuration to nonvolatile storage. You can specify the primary or secondary configuration area. If not specified, the configuration is saved to the primary configuration area. Displays the current configuration to the terminal. You can then capture the output and store it as a file.

download image [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] <filename> {primary | secondary}

reboot {time <date> <time> | cancel}

save {configuration} {primary | secondary}

show configuration

236

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

Boot Option Commands

Table 69: Boot Option Commands (continued)
Command upload configuration [<ipaddress> | <hostname>] <filename> {every <time>} Description Uploads the current run-time configuration to the specified TFTP server. If every <time> is specified, the switch automatically saves the configuration to the server once per day, at the specified time. If the time option is not specified, the current configuration is immediately uploaded. Cancels a previously schedule configuration upload. Configures the switch to use a particular configuration on the next reboot. Options include the primary configuration area or the secondary configuration area. Configures the switch to use a particular image on the next reboot.

upload configuration cancel use configuration [primary | secondary]

use image [primary | secondary]

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

237

Software Upgrade and Boot Options

238

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

E Troubleshooting

If you encounter problems when using the switch, this appendix might be helpful. If you have a problem not listed here or in the release notes, contact your local technical support representative.

LEDs
Power LED does not light: Check that the power cable is firmly connected to the device and to the supply outlet. On powering-up, the MGMT LED lights amber: The device has failed its Power On Self Test (POST) and you should contact your supplier for advice. A link is connected, but the Port Status LED does not light: Check that: • All connections are secure. • Cables are free from damage. • The devices at both ends of the link are powered-up. • Both ends of the Gigabit link are set to the same autonegotiation state. Both sides of the Gigabit link must be enabled or disabled. It the two are different, typically the side with autonegotiation disabled will have the link LED lit, and the side with autonegotiation enabled will not be lit. The default configuration for a Gigabit port is autonegotiation enabled. This can be verified by entering the following command:
show port config

Switch does not power up: All products manufactured by Extreme Networks use digital power supplies with surge protection. In the event of a power surge, the protection circuits shut down the power supply. To reset, unplug the switch for 1 minute, plug it back in, and attempt to power up the switch. If this does not work, try using a different power source (different power strip/outlet) and power cord.

Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide

233

A network problem may be preventing you accessing the device over the network. 234 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . no parity. Check that Telnet access was not disabled for the switch. Try accessing the device through a different port. Check that the community strings configured for the system and Network Manager are the same. Ensure that you enter the IP address of the switch correctly when invoking the Telnet facility. Check the settings on your terminal or terminal emulator. and that the IP address of the Trap Receiver is configured properly on the system. If you attempt to log in and the maximum number of Telnet sessions are being used. and that the device has been reset. For console port access. Check that the port through which you are trying to access the device is in a correctly configured VLAN.Troubleshooting Using the Command-Line Interface The initial welcome prompt does not display: Check that your terminal or terminal emulator is correctly configured. The SNMP Network Manager or Telnet workstation can no longer access the device: Check that Telnet access or SNMP access is enabled. you may need to press [Return] several times before the welcome prompt appears. The SNMP Network Manager cannot access the device: Check that the device IP address. The settings are 9600 baud. and that the device has been reset. Check that SNMP access was not disabled for the system. Try accessing the device through the console port. subnet mask. a problem with the original port is indicated. Check that the port through which you are trying to access the device has not been disabled. 1 stop bit. Check that SNMP access was not disabled for the system. 8 data bits. If it is enabled. subnet mask and default router are correctly configured. check the connections and network cabling at the port. Re-examine the connections and cabling. no flow control. and default router are correctly configured. Traps are not received by the SNMP Network Manager: Check that the SNMP Network Manager's IP address and community string are correctly configured. Check that the community strings configured for the device and the Network Manager are the same. The Telnet workstation cannot access the device: Check that the device IP address. Check that the device IP address is correctly recorded by the SNMP Network Manager (refer to the user documentation for the Network Manager). you should receive an error message indicating so. If you can now access the device.

but in half duplex mode. This is a CAT5 cable that has pins 1 and 2 on one end connected to pins 3 and 6 on the other end. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 235 .Using the Command-Line Interface Permanent entries remain in the FDB: If you have made a permanent entry in the FDB (which requires you to specify the VLAN to which it belongs and then delete the VLAN). The only way to establish a full duplex link is to either force it at both sides. Therefore. This is characteristic of a duplex mismatch between devices. This will return all configuration information (including passwords) to the initial values. another user having administrator access level can log in and initialize the device. Alternatively. Port Configuration No link light on 10/100 Base port: If patching from a hub or switch to another hub or switch. You should manually delete the routes if no VLAN IP address is capable of using them. Though causing no harm. the Extreme switch links at the correct speed. contact your supplier. In the case where no one knows a password for an administrator level user. Viewing statistics using the show port rx command on the Extreme switch may display a constant increment of CRC errors. The Extreme switch 10/100 physical interface uses a method called parallel detection to bring up the link. You forget your password and cannot log in: If you are not an administrator. Excessive RX CRC errors: When a device that has auto-negotiation disabled is connected to an Extreme switch that has auto-negotiation enabled. the switch establishes the link in half duplex mode using the correct speed. Default and Static Routes: If you have defined static or default routes. those routes will remain in the configuration independent of whether the VLAN and VLAN IP address that used them remains. the FDB entry will remain. This is NOT a problem with the Extreme switch. Always verify that the Extreme switch and the network device match in configuration for speed and duplex. NOTE A mismatch of duplex mode between the Extreme switch and another network device will cause poor network performance. and create a new user name for you. with a new password. and not the duplex mode. parallel detection on the Extreme switch is only able to sense 10 Mbps versus 100 Mbps speed. or run auto-negotiation on both sides (using full duplex as an advertised capability. Because the other network device is not participating in auto-negotiation (and does not advertise its capabilities). delete your user name. ensure that you are using a CAT5 cross-over cable. you must manually delete the entry from the FDB if you want to remove it. another user having administrator access level can log in. which is the default setting on the Extreme switch).

The system first tries the default route with the lowest cost metric. you must use quotation marks whenever referring to the VLAN name. They cannot contain whitespaces and cannot start with a numeric value unless you use quotation marks around the name. VLANs. If this were the “default” VLAN. VLANs You cannot add a port to a VLAN: If you attempt to add a port to the “default” VLAN and get an error message similar to Summit200-24:28 # config vlan default add port 1 ERROR: There is a protocol conflict with adding port 1 untagged to VLAN default you already have a VLAN using untagged traffic on this port. All gigabit fiber cables are of the cross-over type. ping) through that VLAN or route IP traffic. or contains non-alphabetical characters. 236 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . the command would be Summit200-24:30 # config vlan default del port 1 which should now allow you to re-enter the previous command without error as follows: Summit200-24:31 # config vlan red add port 1 VLAN names: There are restrictions on VLAN names. VLAN configuration can be verified by using the following command: show vlan <name> The solution for this error is to remove port 1 from the VLAN currently using untagged traffic on the port. It is necessary to have an IP address associated with a VLAN if you intend to manage (Telnet. starts with a number. Ensure that you are using multi-mode fiber (MMF) when using a 1000BASE-SX Mini-GBIC. The Extreme switch has auto-negotiation set to on by default for gigabit ports. and vice-versa. If a name contains whitespaces. 1000BASE-SX does not work with single-mode fiber (SMF). IP Addresses and default routes: The system can have an IP address for each configured VLAN. SNMP. Only one VLAN using untagged traffic can be configured on a single physical port. These ports need to be set to auto off (using the command config port <port #> auto off) if you are connecting it to devices that do not support auto-negotiation.Troubleshooting No link light on Gigabit fiber port: Check to ensure that the transmit fiber goes to the receive fiber side of the other device. You can also configure multiple default routes for the system.

extremenetworks. You can contact technical support by phone at: • (800) 998-2408 • (408) 579-2826 or by email at: • support@extremenetworks. The switch keeps aging out endstation entries in the switch Forwarding Database (FDB): Reduce the number of topology changes by disabling STP on those systems that do not use redundant paths. and the endstation is booting before the STP initialization process is complete. contact Extreme Networks technical support. or turn off STP for the switch ports of the endstation and devices to which it is attempting to connect.Debug Tracing STP You have connected an endstation directly to the switch and the endstation fails to boot correctly: The switch has STP enabled. The show debug-tracing command can be applied to one or all VLANs.com/extreme/support/techsupport.asp to download software updates (requires a service contract) and documentation. TOP Command The top command is a utility that indicates CPU utilization by process.com You can also visit the support website at: • http://www. Contacting Extreme Technical Support If you have a network issue that you are unable to resolve. Extreme Networks maintains several Technical Assistance Centers (TACs) around the world to answer networking questions and resolve network problems. Specify that STP has been disabled for that VLAN. and then reboot the endstation. as follows: show debug-tracing {vlan <name>} The debug commands should only be used under the guidance of Extreme Networks technical personnel. Debug Tracing ExtremeWare includes a debug-tracing facility for the switch. Specify that the endstation entries are static or permanent. Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 237 .

Troubleshooting 238 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

description access profiles. description of responding to ARP requests table. RMON area 0. accessing prompt upgrading BPDU tunneling 198 98 236 190 190 54 235 235 235 170 C cable types and distances certification marks Summit 200-24 switch Summit 200-48 switch CLI command history command shortcuts line-editing keys named components numerical ranges. Summit 200 series switch symbols syntax helper using command history shortcuts syntax. displaying 105 107 106 101 110 113 110 104 106 46 105 106 101 115 48 49 49 105 105 105 47 38 97 167 166 198 197 189 181 181 181 181 180 181 183 B backbone area.1p configuration commands (table) 149 autonegotiation autopolarity detection feature. OSPF ARP clearing entries communicating with devices outside subnet configuring proxy ARP incapable device proxy ARP between subnets proxy ARP. See CLI common commands (table) communicating with devices outside subnet complete configuration download configuration downloading downloading complete downloading incremental logging primary and secondary 22 224 227 44 42 43 43 42 43 42 44 42 41 44 181 234 234 234 234 163 232 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 239 . OSPF areas. FDB boot option commands (table) BOOTP and UDP-Forwarding relay. reverse mask accounts creating deleting viewing adding access lists access masks rate limits Address Resolution Protocol. OSPF blackhole entries. configuring using BootROM menu. understanding Command-Line Interface. See ARP admin account Advanced Edge functionality aging entries. Ethernet ports 77 78 A access control lists adding configuration commands (table) deleting description examples ICMP filter example permit-established example permit-established keyword verifying settings access levels access masks adding deleting access policies.Index Numerics 802. FDB alarm actions Alarms.

configuring server DiffServ.1x port authentication EAPOL flooding EAPS commands (table) domain. RMON 166 export restrictions security licensing 39 SSH2 encryption protocol 39 Extensible Authentication Protocol. 35 F FDB adding an entry aging entries blackhole entries configuration commands (table) configuring contents creating a permanent entry example displaying dynamic entries entries non-aging entries permanent entries QoS profile association feature licensing Advanced Edge functionality description Edge functionality license keys ordering verifying file server applications. About This Guide text. About This Guide creating access lists access masks rate limits 232 234 233 29. See IP route sharing errors. displaying 138 switch mode. and QoS database overflow. connecting equipment to controlling Telnet access conventions notice icons. description DLCS configuration commands (table) description guidelines limitations DNS configuration commands (table) description Domain Name Service. 20 E EAP EAPOL IEEE 802. Spanning Tree Protocol downloading incremental configuration dynamic entries. FDB dynamic routes 144 197 47 40 170 47 90 106 106 106 56 190 190 70 150 223 226 77 195 56 194 155 154 155 155 49 49 169 234 97 179 polling timers. See EAP Extreme Discovery Protocol See EDP ExtremeWare factory defaults 40 features 15. configuring 135 ring port. 54 57 xiv xiv 105 105 105 D database applications. defining 135 ECMP.Index saving changes schedule download uploading to file console port. configuring dimensions Summit 200-24 switch Summit 200-48 switch disabling a switch port disabling route advertising (RIP) disconnecting a Telnet session distance-vector protocol. port 159 establishing a Telnet session 54 Ethernet ports. See DNS domains. See IP route sharing EDP commands (table) 84 description 84 electromagnetic compatibility Summit 200-24 switch 224 Summit 200-48 switch 226 enabling a switch port 77 environmental requirements Summit 200-24 switch 223 Summit 200-48 switch 226 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) routing. See FDB free-standing installation full-duplex 98 97 98 99 99 97 100 100 97 97 97 97 98 38 38 38 39 39 39 145 78 29 17. and QoS flow control Forwarding Database. OSPF default passwords settings STP domain users default VLAN delete access list access masks rate limit deleting a session DHCP and UDP-Forwarding relay. unconfiguring 138 show eaps display fields (table) 140 status information. autopolarity detection feature 78 Events. creating and deleting enabling and disabling a domain enabling and disabling on a switch 71 71 71 134 135 138 138 G Greenwich Mean Time offset offset values (table) 73 240 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

1x EAP Over LANs (EAPOL) Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) IGMP configuration commands (table) description disabling reset and disable commands (table) snooping configuration information. description master port verifying the configuration local logging log display logging and Telnet commands (table) configuration changes description fault level local message real-time display remote subsystem timestamp logging in 224 226 17 21 39 38 38 38 39 39 39 43 196 194 80 81 80 80 81 82 162 162 162 164 163 161 161 162 162 162 163 161 161 31. description load sharing algorithms configuring description load-sharing group. 48 I ICMP configuration commands (table) IEEE 802. 22 93 94 93 93 94 94 46 81 54 22 58 157 179 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 241 . router IP address. RMON 19. load sharing maximum Telnet session media types and distances MIBs mirroring.Index H hardware address heat dissipation Summit 200-24 switch Summit 200-48 switch History.1Q IEEE 802. See port-mirroring monitoring the switch multiple routes 19. entering IP multicast groups and IGMP snooping IP route sharing IP TOS configuration commands (table) IP unicast routing basic IP commands (table) BOOTP relay configuration examples configuring default gateway description DHCP relay disabling ECMP enabling IP route sharing proxy ARP reset and disable commands (table) resetting router interfaces router show commands (table) routing table configuration commands (table) dynamic routes multiple routes populating static routes settings. displaying verifying the configuration IRDP 185 88 71 71 216 215 217 217 217 215 217 231 232 231 29 28 31 178 55 215 180 150 183 190 187 182 177 37 190 189 182 180 180 189 189 178 188 184 179 179 179 179 188 182 187 M MAC address MAC-based VLANs description example groups guidelines limitations timed configuration download management access master port. displaying described resetting image downloading primary and secondary upgrading installation free-standing rack verifying interfaces. 22 223 226 166 K keys line-editing port monitoring 43 160 L laser safety certifications Summit 200-24 switch Summit 200-48 switch LEDs Summit 200-24 switch Summit 200-48 switch license keys licensing Advanced Edge functionality description Edge functionality license keys ordering verifying line-editing keys link-state database link-state protocol.

displaying non-aging entries. FDB permit-established keyword ping command poison reverse port autonegotiation autopolarity detection feature configuring on Summit 200 series switch connections enabling and disabling errors. OSPF Open Shortest Path First. use with port-mirroring proxy ARP communicating with devices outside subnet conditions configuring description MAC address in response responding to requests subnets table.Index N names. 67 67 67 68 70 67 71 66. SNMP protocol analyzers. See OSPF 90 124 126 126 127 66 66.1p configuration commands (table) 802. STP receive errors statistics. See OSPF opening a Telnet session OSPF advantages area 0 areas backbone area configuration commands (table) consistency database overflow description disabling display filtering enabling hello interval link type link-state database normal area NSSA opaque LSAs point-to-point links redistributing routes reset and disable commands (table) resetting router types routing access policies settings. FDB Not-So-Stubby_Area. VLANs NAT configuration commands (table) creating rules rule matching timeout commands (table) Network Address Translation. 69 69 69 67 70 97 permanent entries. displaying STPD membership Summit 200 series switch switch commands (table) transmit errors port-based VLANs port-mirroring and protocol analyzers description example switch configuration commands (table) power supply specifications Summit 200-24 switch Summit 200-48 switch powering on the switch power-off specifications Summit 200-24 switch Summit 200-48 switch primary image private community. viewing STP state. 143 150 147 152 152 98 145 150 P passwords default forgetting 47 48 242 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . SNMP 97 104 50 195 77 78 77 17. displaying public community. See NAT network login campus mode configuration example configuring user login configuration commands (table) DHCP server disabling ISP mode configuration example configuring RADIUS server configuration settings. 20 77 159 160 173 160 159 175 169 77 79 159 86 83 82 83 83 223 226 30 223 226 232 58 83 181 181 181 180 181 181 181 188 58 O opaque LSAs. configuring examples MAC address source port VLAN FDB entry association file server applications IP TOS configuration commands (table) 149 148 144 147 145 144 36. 196 213 212 182 208 200 196 199 198 197 200 201 213 213 198 117 212 212 198 199 211 Q QoS 802. configuring 197 54 194 198 197 198 207 197 197 194. See NSSA NSSA. displaying show commands (table) stub area virtual link wait interval. viewing monitoring display keys priority.1p priority applications blackhole configuration commands (table) database applications description DiffServ.

Index monitor description real-time display traffic groupings access list blackhole by precedence (table) explicit packet marking MAC address source port VLAN verifying video applications voice applications web browsing applications Quality of Service. See console port sessions. 65 61 61 60 62 60 63 62 60 61 105 154 106 160 163 91 233 181 115 194 203 205 194 195 182 194 195 201 206 115 195 206 206 195 195 195 167 166 166 165 History group probe Statistics group route sharing. command Simple Network Management Protocol. See QoS 153 153 146 146 147 146 148 147 152 152 153 144 144 145 R rack mounting the switch RADIUS and TACACS+ client configuration configuration commands (table) description Merit server configuration (example) per-command authentication per-command configuration (example) RFC 2138 attributes servers TCP port rate limits adding and QoS deleting receive errors remote logging Remote Monitoring. See IP route sharing router interfaces router types. deleting shortcuts. displaying supported MIBs system contact system location system name trap receivers using SNTP configuration commands (table) configuring Daylight Savings Time description example Greenwich Mean Time offset configuring offset values (table) SNTP servers 223 226 219 232 234 232 39 39 56 42 58 59 58 60 58 59 59 59 58 58 75 72 72 72 75 72 73 72 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 243 . See RMON renaming a VLAN reset to factory defaults responding to ARP requests reverse mask RIP advantages configuration commands (table) configuration example description disabling route advertising enabling limitations poison reverse redistributing routes reset and disable commands (table) routing access policies routing table entries settings. See IP unicast routing 166 165 166 178 198 115 118 114 114 114 119 114 117 116 114 117 114 118 115 114 179 S safety certifications Summit 200-24 switch Summit 200-48 switch safety information saving configuration changes scheduling configuration download secondary image security licensing description obtaining serial port. See SNMP SNMP community strings configuration commands (table) configuring settings. See RIP routing table. displaying show commands (table) split horizon triggered updates version 2 RMON alarm actions Alarms group Events group features supported 28 60. OSPF routing access policies access profile applying changing configuring creating types configuration commands (table) deny examples OSPF RIP none OSPF permit removing RIP using Routing Information Protocol. populating routing.

65 configuration commands (table) 65 description 65 servers. SNMP system location. ports 78 split horizon 195 SSH2 protocol authentication key 57 description 57 enabling 57 licensing. OSPF 198 Summit 200 series switch free-standing installation 29 installing 28 load sharing 81 load sharing example 82 location 27 media distances. See TACACS+ 244 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . supported 22 port configuration 77 powering on 30 rack mounting 28 stacking with other devices 29 verifying load sharing 82 verifying the installation 31 Summit 200-24 switch certification marks 224 dimensions 223 electromagnetic compatibility 224 environmental requirements 223 front view 16 heat dissipation 223 laser safety certifications LEDs MAC address port connections power socket power supply specifications power-off specifications rear view safety certifications serial number temperature and humidity weight Summit 200-48 switch certification marks dimensions electromagnetic compatibility environmental requirements front view heat dissipation laser safety certifications LEDs MAC address port connections power safety certifications power socket power supply specifications power-off specifications rear view serial number temperature and humidity weight switch logging monitoring RMON features switch port commands (table) syntax. Extreme Networks support website 39 TCP port number 58 stand-alone switch. enabling and disabling ports 77 static routes 179 statistics port 159 RMON 166 status monitoring commands (table) 158 described 157 STP and VLANs 170 BPDU tunneling 170 bridge priority 173 configurable parameters 173 configuration commands (table) 173 configuration example 175 configuring 172 default domain 170 description 36 disable and reset commands (table) 175 displaying settings 175 domains 169 examples 170 forward delay 173 hello time 173 max age 173 overview 169 path cost 173 port priority 173 port state. specifying 65 tagging. See STP speed. supported 22 media types.Index socket. displaying 175 stub area. power 19. understanding syslog host system contact. VLAN 88 technical support 237 Telnet connecting to another host 54 controlling access 57 disconnecting a session 56 logging 162 maximum sessions 54 opening a session 54 using 54 temperature and humidity Summit 200-24 223 Summit 200-48 226 Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus. 21 software licensing security features 39 SSH2 protocol. Extreme Networks support website 39 Spanning Tree Protocol. SNMP system name. SNMP 224 17 19 17 19 223 223 18 223 19 223 223 227 226 226 226 19 226 226 21 22 20 226 21 226 226 21 22 226 226 161 157 165 79 41 163 59 59 59 T TACACS+ and RADIUS 60.

Index TFTP server using timed configuration download. See VLANs virtual link. QoS 86 191 144 W web browsing applications. and QoS viewing accounts Virtual LANs. MAC-based VLANs traceroute command traffic groupings traffic rate-limiting transmit errors triggered updates trunks 231 233 94 50 146 154 159 195 88 types UDP-Forwarding voice applications. OSPF VLAN tagging VLANs and STP assigning a tag benefits configuration commands (table) configuration examples configuring default description disabling route advertising displaying settings MAC-based description example groups guidelines limitations timed configuration download mixing port-based and tagged names port-based renaming routing tagged trunks 31 144 49 199 88 170 88 85 91 92 91 90 36 195 92 93 94 93 93 94 94 90 90 86 91 182 88 88 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 245 . and QoS weight Summit 200-24 Summit 200-48 145 223 22 U UDP-Forwarding and BOOTP and DHCP configuration commands (table) configuring description example profiles VLANs upgrading the image uploading the configuration user account users access levels authenticating creating default viewing 190 190 192 191 190 191 191 191 231 233 47 46 60 48 47 49 V verifying the installation video applications.

Index 246 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .

124 198 197 208 208 207 208 208 117. 190 config dns-client add 49 config dns-client default-domain 49 config dns-client delete 49 config download server 94. 185 185 162. 189 clear log 164 clear session 44. 236 config eaps <old-name> name <new-name> 134 config eaps add control vlan 134 config eaps add protect vlan 134. 119 117. 164 83 83 127 127 127 127 127 127 122. 120. 136. 184 185 185 185 182. 182. 208 208 208 209 207 207 209 209 117. 234. 56 config access-profile 119 config access-profile add 114. 119 208 208 208 117. 135 config eaps primary port 134. 190 config bootprelay delete 183. 137 config fdb agingtime 99 config igmp query_interval 216 config igmp snooping 216 config iparp add 183 config iparp add proxy 181. 138 config eaps delete control vlan 134 config eaps delete protect vlan 134 config eaps failtime 135 config eaps hellotime 134. 137 config eaps secondary port 134. 119 config access-profile delete 115. 136. 189 clear ipfdb 183. 119 config access-profile mode 114 config account 44 config banner 44 config bootprelay add 183.Index of Commands C clear counters 164 clear dlcs 155 clear fdb 99. 135 config eaps mode 134. 183 config iparp delete 183 config iparp delete proxy 183 config iparp timeout 183 config iproute add config iproute add blackhole config iproute add default config iproute delete config iproute delete blackhole config iproute delete default config iproute priority config irdp config log display config mirroring add config mirroring delete config nat finrst-timeout config nat icmp-timeout config nat syn-timeout config nat tcp-timeout config nat timeout config nat udp-timeout config nat vlan config osfp area nssa config osfp ase-limit config ospf add virtual-link config ospf add vlan config ospf add vlan area link-type config ospf area add range config ospf area delete range config ospf area external-filter config ospf area interarea-filter config ospf area normal config ospf area nssa config ospf area stub config ospf asbr-filter config ospf ase-limit config ospf ase-summary add config ospf ase-summary delete config ospf authentication config ospf cost config ospf delete virtual-link config ospf delete vlan config ospf direct-filter 184 184 56. 209 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 247 . 147 clear igmp snooping 217 clear iparp 183. 119.

75 44. 110 120 45 134. 147 99 99 198. 135 99 213 106. 163. 81 59 59 59 59 59 59 72 75 73. 79 79 79 145. 164 45 70 150 155 155 71. 120 79. 120 115. 189 183. 174 192 45. 173 173 173 174 174 174 174 163. 210 105. 164 164 45. 92 D delete access-list delete access-mask delete access-profile delete account delete eaps delete fdbentry delete ospf area delete rate-limit delete stpd delete udp-profile delete vlan disable bootp disable bootprelay disable cli-config-logging disable clipaging disable dhcp ports vlan disable diffserv examination ports disable dlcs disable dlcs ports disable eapol-flooding 106. 152 91 192 134 105. 107 105. 72 192 192 91 91 70 70 70 45. 211 44. 183. 135 99. 78. 110 106.Index of Commands config ospf lsa-batching-timer config ospf metric-table config ospf originate-default config ospf routerid config ospf spf-hold-time config ospf timer config ospf vlan config ospf vlan area config ospf vlan neighbor add config ospf vlan neighbor delete config ospf vlan timer config ports auto off config ports auto on config ports auto-polarity config ports display-string config ports qosprofile config radius server config radius shared-secret config radius-accounting config radius-accounting shared-secret config rip add config rip delete config rip garbagetime config rip routetimeout config rip rxmode config rip txmode config rip updatetime config rip vlan cost config rip vlan export-filter config rip vlan import-filter config rip vlan trusted-gateway config sharing address-based config snmp add trapreceiver config snmp community config snmp delete trapreceiver config snmp syscontact config snmp syslocation config snmp sysname config sntp-client config sntp-client server config sntp-client update-interval config ssh2 key config stpd add vlan config stpd forwarddelay config stpd hellotime config stpd maxage config stpd port cost config stpd port priority config stpd priority config syslog config syslog delete config sys-recovery-level config tacacs config tacacs shared-secret 209 209 211 209 209 208 209 198 207 207 210. 92 45. 56. 108 114. 57 172. 182 91. 206 203 203 203 203 203 203 116. 72 248 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . 48 134. 161 65 65 config tacacs-accounting config tacacs-accounting shared-secret config time config timezone config udp-profile add config udp-profile delete config vlan add port config vlan delete port config vlan dhcp-address-range config vlan dhcp-lease-timer config vlan dhcp-options config vlan ipaddress config vlan name config vlan netlogin-lease-timer config vlan priority config vlan qosprofile config vlan tag config vlan udp-profile configure eaps failtime create access-list create access-mask create access-profile type create account create eaps create fdbentry create fdbentry blackhole create fdbentry dynamic create ospf area create rate-limit create stpd create udp-profile create vlan 65 65 45 45. 79 78. 189 45. 92 70 149 145. 152 61 61 61 61 203 203. 109 172. 120 45. 91. 110 175 192 45. 120 115.

210 disable ospf export 179 disable ospf export direct 213 disable ospf export rip 202. 184 enable bootp vlan 55 enable bootprelay 184. 94. 213 disable ports 45. 184 enable ipforwarding broadcast 184 enable ipforwarding fast-direct-broadcast 180 enable ipforwarding ignore-broadcast 180 enable ip-option loose-source-route 186 enable ip-option record-route 186 enable ip-option record-timestamp 186 enable ip-option strict-source-route 187 enable ip-option use-router-alert 187 enable iproute sharing 185 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 249 . 236 234 49. 138 enable edp ports 84 enable icmp address-mask 186 enable icmp parameter-problem 186 enable icmp port-unreachables 186 enable icmp redirects 186 enable icmp time-exceeded 186 enable icmp timestamp 186 enable icmp unreachables 186 enable icmp useredirects 186 enable idletimeouts 46 enable igmp 216 enable igmp snooping 217 enable ignore-bpdu 170 enable ignore-bpdu vlan 174 enable ignore-stp vlan 174 enable ipforwarding 182. 202. 72 enable eaps 134. 234. 236 235. 151 enable dlcs 155 enable dlcs ports 155 enable eapol-flooding 71. 206 disable rip originate-default 206 disable rip poisonreverse 206 disable rip splithorizon 206 disable rip triggerupdates 206 disable rmon 166 disable sharing 79. 138 disable edp ports 84 disable icmp 189 disable icmp address-mask 189 disable icmp parameter-problem 185 disable icmp port-unreachables 189 disable icmp redirects 189 disable icmp time-exceeded 189 disable icmp timestamp 189 disable icmp unreachables 189 disable icmp useredirects 189 disable idletimeouts 45 disable igmp 217 disable igmp snooping 217 disable ignore-bpdu 170 disable ignore-bpdu vlan 175 disable ignore-stp vlan 175 disable ipforwarding 183. 190 enable cli-config-logging 46. 189 disable ipforwarding broadcast 184. 57 46 49. 231. 234. 77. 236 49.Index of Commands disable eaps 134. 189 disable ipforwarding fast-direct-broadcast 180 disable ipforwarding ignore-broadcast 180 disable ip-option loose-source-route 185 disable ip-option record-route 185 disable ip-option record-timestamp 185 disable ip-option strict-source-route 185 disable ip-option use-router-alert 186 disable iproute sharing 185 disable irdp 189 disable learning port 99 disable log display 164 disable loopback-mode vlan 184 disable mirroring 83 disable nat 128 disable netlogin ports vlan 70 disable ospf 213 disable ospf capability opaque-lsa 197. 236 E enable bootp 46. 164 enable clipaging 46 enable dhcp ports 70 enable diffserv examination ports 150. 163. 82 disable snmp access 59 disable snmp traps 59 disable sntp-client disable ssh2 disable stpd disable stpd port disable syslog disable tacacs disable tacacs-accounting disable tacacs-authorization disable telnet disable web download bootrom download configuration download configuration cancel download configuration every download configuration incremental download image 75 46 175 175 164 65 65 65 46. 236 94. 79 disable radius 61 disable radius-accounting 61 disable rip 206 disable rip aggregation 206 disable rip export 179. 213 disable ospf export static 202.

203 204 179. 152. 151. 232. 110 106. 164 65 66 66 46. 236 106. 165 158. 210 197. 210 179 202. 46 L logout 56 N nslookup 49 P ping 49.Index of Commands enable irdp enable learning port enable license advanced-edge enable log display enable loopback-mode vlan enable mirroring enable nat enable netlogin ports enable osfp export direct enable ospf enable ospf capability opaque-lsa enable ospf export enable ospf export rip enable ospf export static enable ports enable radius enable radius-accounting enable rip enable rip aggregation enable rip export enable rip originate-default enable rip poisonreverse enable rip splithorizon enable rip triggerupdates enable rmon enable route sharing enable sharing enable snmp access enable snmp traps enable sntp-client enable ssh2 enable stpd enable stpd port enable syslog enable tacacs enable tacacs-accounting enable tacacs-authorization enable telnet enable web 187 100 38 162. 188 182. 174 174 163. 164 184 83 124 70 210 182. 188 188 158. 236 79 185 S save show access-list show access-mask show access-profile show accounts show banner show configuration show debug-tracing show diagnostics show dlcs show dns-client show eapol-flooding show eaps show edp show fdb show fdb permanent show igmp snooping show iparp show iparp proxy show ipconfig show ipfdb show iproute show ipstats show log show log config show management show memory show mirroring show nat connections show nat rules show nat stats show nat timeout show ospf show ospf area show ospf ase-summary show ospf interfaces show ospf lsdb show ospf virtual-link show ports collisions show ports configuration show ports info show ports packet show ports qosmonitor show ports rxerrors 56. 110 120 49 46 236 237 158 155 49 71. 57 173. 60 158 83 127 127 127 127 202. 202. 212 212 212 212 212 212 79 80. 204 204 204 204 204 166 180 79. 211 77. 154 217 183. 154 80 153 80. 160 H history 44. 79 62 62 182. 210 202. 138 84 100 147. 165 57. 82 59 59 72. 75 46. 82 80. 50 250 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide . 188 188 183. 190 183. 188. 57 46 Q quit 56 R reboot restart ports rtlookup 232. 162. 72 134.

159 80. 54 49.Index of Commands show ports stats show ports txerrors show ports utilization show qosprofile show radius show radius-accounting show rate-limit show rip show rip stat show rip vlan show session show sharing address-based show sntp client show sntp-client show stpd show stpd port show switch show tacacs show tacacs-accounting show tech-support show udp-profile show version show vlan 80. 152. 81 73 75 175 175 73. 159 80 147. 233. 153 62 62 106. 237 233. 158. 152. 110 206 206 206 56 80. 50 U unconfig eaps unconfig eaps primary port unconfig eaps secondary port unconfig icmp unconfig igmp unconfig irdp unconfig management unconfig ospf unconfig ports display-string unconfig ports monitor vlan unconfig radius unconfig radius-accounting unconfig rip unconfig stpd unconfig switch unconfig switch all unconfig tacacs unconfig tacacs-accounting unconfig udp-profile unconfig vlan ipaddress upload configuration upload configuration cancel use configuration use image 134 138 138 187. 189 217 187. 189 59 213 80 92 62 62 206 175 46. 237 237 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide 251 . 94. 154. 154 T telnet traceroute 49. 237 232. 233 233 66 66 192 92 49. 235 66 66 158 192 158 92.

Index of Commands 252 Summit 200 Series Switch Installation and User Guide .